regulations and syllabi of the irwo year …

BOARD O F IN T E R M E D IA T E E D U C A T IO NA N D H R A P R A D B S H

R E G U L A T I O N S A N D S Y L L A B I

O F T H E

i r WO Y E A R I N T E R M E D I A T E C O U R S E

( Corrected upto 31st December 1975 )

M IEPA D C

IIID01080

Price Rs. 5-Ot)

Third Edition 1976

C o p y -R ig h ts Kesev

Syitcims Uait,K iioT I Insa u c Educational P! r.ning and Aj^^inistration a7-B .SriA urbK dc. ? /, r - N'cwDelhi-llOfflWD C C . h o 3 . . r r . / f > M . .

Daw..................

C oplei Q^dilabie ■Office o f the SeoretdrV,board o f Intermediate Eduoatioo»A - P., Hyderabad*

C O N T E N T S

T he A ndhra P radesh Jn ierm edia te E ducation Act

R E G U L A T IO N S

]. C ourse o f study ...I'i. \dm ission to th e C ourse ...

I I I . A ttendance ...

IV . Public E xam ination ...

A) G eneral ...

B) Fees ...C) Schem e of E ja m in a tio n ...

V. A dm ission o f P rivate cand idates ...

VI. A w ard o f certificates ...

V II. Principles o f p rom otion from first yearto second year ...

V IH . Scale o f punishm ent fo r m alpractipes ...

S U B S I D I A R Y R E G U L A T I O N S ;

I A cadem ic year ...

2. Sem estres ...

3. W orking days ...

4. W ork ing hours5. D is trib u tio n o f teach ing periods

6. W ork load o f teachers

7. M edium o f Instruction

8. C ondonation fo r sh o rtag e in a ttendance

9. C om bination o f a tten d an ce10. Issue o f T ransfer C ertificates

1 1. C hange o f Language under Part M

12. C hange o f com binations under P a r t H I|t3. M edical Inspection

U Presen tation o fjregu tar cand idates forthe Public E xam ination

IS. D ue d a tes for subm ission o f app lica tionform s by p riv a te cand idates

i*age N o.

I to XX

.. I

.. 4

.. 6

.. 8

.. 8

.. 10

. . 12

.. 13

14

15

}1 -

18

19

^0

21

22tJ

;23

24

!6 D ue dates for submissiosi o f appliciitions*fo r e x e m p i io D o f a t t e n d a n c e .. .

17., Adm ission o f P rivate cand idates w ithout previous study for the Public E xam ination ...

.18. M td iu m of answ ering papers under P art IH

19. Office copy o f the C ertificaie ...

20. Issu e 'o f D up lica te C ertificate . .

21. F raud ...

21. A nnexures ...

SY LLA B U SES

P A R T I

25

2«

30

32

4

1. English

P A R T II ( M o d e r n o r C l a s s i c a l o r F o r e ig n L a n g u a g e s )

2 .3.4. 5 6. 7. 8 9.

10.11.12.13.14.

M odern L anguage - M odern Language - M odern L anguage - M odern L anguage - M odern L anguage - M odern L anguage - M odern Language - C lassical Language Classical L anguage C lassical Language Foreign Language - Foreign Language - Foreign Language -

TeluguU rd uH indiT am ilM arathiK annada

- O riya- Sanskrit- Persian- A rabic R ussian

G erm an F rench

47

606364 67 6K 70 7! 73757677 85 84

P A R T I I I ( O P T I O N A L ‘S U B J E C T S )

15, M athem atics16 Phyiical Sciences - Physics

17 Physical Sciences - C hem istry

)8 Biological Sciences - Botony

19. B iological Sciences Zoology

20 G eology

21. H om e Science

22. Logic

23. Ind ian H istory

24. W orld H istory

8.-;

88

94

98

102105

112

118

120

124

25. C ivics (including In d ian A dm in is tra tio n )...

26. Econom ics ...

27. G eography ...

28 Sociology ...

29. C om inerce ...

30. C lassical Language - S anscrit ...

31. C lassical L anguage - Persian ...

32. Classical L anguage - A rabic ...

33. M odern L anguage - T elugu ...

34. M odern L anguage - U rd u ...

35. M odern L anguage - H indi ...36. M odern L anguage - T am il ...

37. M odern Language - M arath i ...38. M odern L anguage - K an n ad a ...

39. M odern Language - O riya ...

40 M odern L anguage - English ...4L F ine A rts - M usic (K arn a tic ) ...

■42. F ine A rts - D raw ing and P ain ting ...

43. F ine A rts - S cu lp tu re ...

44. Fine A rts - D ance (K uch ipud i or B hara tnatya)

45. F ine A rts - T heatrical A rts ...

46. Sanskrit Sastras ...

47. Sanskrit Vedas ■ ...

48. L ist o f U niversities w hich have accorded recogn isa tion to the In te rm ed ia te Public E xam ihation conducted by the Board o f In te rm ed ia te Education , A n d h ra Pradesh, H yderabad ...

126129

130

134135 137139

140141142

144146147 149

*♦151

n154

155156 160 163

164

T H E A N D H R A PR A D E SH IN T E R M E D IA T E E D U C A T IO N ACT.(A C T N o. 2 O F 1971)

An Act to provide fo r the establishm ent o f a B oard to regulate and supervise the system o f In term edia te Education in the S ta te o f Andhra Pradesh and to specify the courses o f s tu d y therefor and fo r m a tters connected therew ith.

Be it enacted by the L egislature o f the S tate o f A n d h ra 'P rad esh in the Tw enty-first Y ear o f the R epublic o f Ind ia as follows:—

S h o r t t i t l e e x t e n t a n d c o m m e n c e m e n t ; —

1. (1) This A ct m ay be called the A ndhra Pradesh In term ed ia te E ducation A ct, 1971.

(2) It extends to the w hole o f the S tate o f A ndhra Pradesh.(3) I t shall com e in to force on such date as the G overnm ent

m ay, by no tification , appoin t.

D e f in i t io n s : —

2. In this A ct, unless the con tex t otherw ise requires—(1) “ academ ic y ear” m eans the period com m encing o n 'th e 1st

day 9 f Ju ly o f any year and .en d in g w ith the 30th day o f June o f the succeeding year, or in the case o f any ju n io r college or any o th e r affiliated college or any class o f ju n io r colleges o r o ther affiliated colleges, the classes in w hich are s ta rted on a da te o ther th an the 1st day o f July w ith the previous sanction o f the D irec to r, the year com m encing on such da te ending with^ twelve m onths from sach date ; knd consisting o f such num ber o f sem esters as may be prescribed;

(2) “ affiliated college” m eans any college or any o th e r ed u ca-tioDal in stitu tion w ithin the S ta te affiliated to the Board as providing w hethrer W holly o r partly , courses o f study qualifying s tuden ts for adm ission to the In te rm ed ia te exam ination , in accordance w ith the regulations; ^

(3) “ B oard” m eans the A ndhra p iadesh Board o f In te rm ed ia te E d u ca tion established under section 3;

(4) “co llegc” means a college established or 'm ain ta in ed by or affiliated to , o r recognised by, any U niversity; bu t does no t include a ju n io r college;

(5) “ com m ittee” m eans a com m ittee appoin ted by the Board under section 11;

(6) ‘‘ D irec to r” m eans th e D irec to r o f Public In struc tion , A ndhra pradesh and includes an A dd itional o r Jo in t D iro c to r o f Public In struc tion on whom all o r any o f the pow ers o f the D irector under this A ct m ay be conferred by The G overnm ent;

(7)“ G o v ern m en t” m eans th e S ta te G overnm em ;

f8)“ In te rin ed ia te exam ination” m eans th e ex am in a tio n conducted by the B oard acco rd ing the reg u la tio n s ;

(9) “ ju n io r college ” m eans any educational institu tion in the s ta te estab lished or m ain ta ined by the s ta te , o r by any association of invididuals and affiliated to the B oard .as p rov id ing courses o f study quah'fying studen ts for adm ission tb 'th e interciiediate exam ination , in accordance w ith the regu la tions, b u t not, to the degree exam inations o f a U niversity;

E xp la n a tio n :— For th e rem oval o f doub ts, it is hereby declared th a t th e term ‘college’ as defined in any law re la ting to th e U niversities fo r th e tim e being in fo rce in th e S ta te , shall no t be deem ed to include or to have ever in c lu d ed , a ju n io r college;

(10)“ n o tific a tio n ” m eans a n o tifica tio n published in th e A ndhra Pradesh G azette;

(11) “ prescribed” m eans p rescribed by ru les m ade by the G overnm ent under th is A ct;

(12) "P rincipar* m eans the head of ju n io r college or o ther affiliated college o r o f a recognised college o r ed u ca iio n a l in stitu iio n ;

(13) “ recognised” w ith its g ram m atica l v aria tions used w ith reference to a college or o th e r ed u ca tiona l in stitu tio n , n o t being a ju n io r college or o th e r affiliated" college, m eans recogn ised by the B oard for th e purpose o f a d m ittin g it to the priv ileges to be g ran ted by the B oard , in accordance w ith regu lations;

(14) “ regu lations” m ean regu la tions m ade by the Board underth is Act;. ,

(15) “ Secretary” m eans any person ap p o in ted by th e G overnm ent under sub-section (I) ^of section 7 to be the S ecretary to the B oard ;

(16) “ sem ester” m eans a te rm o r session w ith in an acadm icyear, during w hich such subjects in a course Of study as may be specified in th e regu la tions shall be ta u g h t in a ju n io r college or o ther affiliated college; '

11

l u

(17) “ T eachers” m eans the lecturers, ju n io r lecturers, teachers, tu to rs , dem o n stra to rs ,an d such o th e r persons giving instruction in a ju n io r 'co lleg e or o ther affiliated co llege 'as m ay be declared by tbe regu lations to be teachers.

(18) “ U niversity” m eans a U niversity established by law inIndia.

E stab lishm ent, C onstitu tion , incorporation e tc ., o f the Board

3. (1) T he G overnm ent may, by notification , and with effect on- and from such dwte as may be specified therein estab lish a B oard for the purposes o f th is Act, to be called the A ndhra Pradesh B oard of In te rm ed ia te E ducation .

(2) T he B oard shiill consist o f C hairm an of the B oard and the follow ing m em bers, nam ely —

E x-O fficio M em bers

(a) ,the S e c re ta ry - 'to G overnm ent in the E ducation D ep art m eat;

(b) th e D irec to r o f Public In stru c tio n , A ndhra Pradesh;(c) the D irec to r o f T echnical E ducation , A ndhra Pradesh; '(d) the D irec to r o f M edical Services, A ndhra Pradesh;(e) the D irector-.of Industries, A ndhra Pradesh;(f) the D irec to r o f A gricu ltu re , A ndhra Pradesh;(g) the D irec to r o f Telugu A cadem y, A ndhra Pradesh;(h) th e S ecre tary to the B oard; j

N om ina ted M em bers

(i) one person to be nom ina ted by the G overnm ent to represen t the F inance D ep artm en t;

(j) one person to be nom inated-by each 'o f the 'U n iversities iii the S ta te , to rep resen t the U niversity co’ncerned;

(k) tw o P rincipals o f colleges, to be non iinated by th e G overnm en t o f whom one shall be from a college ia the T elangana a rea of th e S late; ' ‘

(1) six Principals o f the ju n io r colleges or o ther affiliated colleges and recognised colleges o r educational in stitu tions in the S ta te , to be n om ina ted by th e G overnm ent, o f whom a t least one shall be a P rincipal o f a w om en’s ju n io r college and one §ha!l be a P rincipal o f a ju n io r college under private m anagem ent;

Provided th a t out o f the six Principals a fo resa id , n o l less than tw o shall be from the said colleges or educa tionaM nstitu iions in (he T elangana area o f the S tate;

C o-op ted M embers

(m ) no t m ore th a n th ree persons possessing ex p ert know ledge in the subjects included in the courses of study to be co-opted by B oard in the m an n er laid dow n in the regulations, o f whom one shall be a person resid ing w ith in th e T elangana a rea o f the State;

E xplana tion •- For purposes o f th is sub-section, the expression “ T elangana a re a ” m eans th e te rr ito rie s specified in sub-section (I) o f section 3 o f the S tates R eorgan isa tion A ct, 1956.

(3) (a) T he B oard shall be a body co rp o ra te having perpetual succession and a com m on seal and shall sue and be sued by the said co rp o ra te nam e.

(b) In all su its and o th e r legal proceedings by o r ag a in st th e Board, the p lead ings shall be signed an d verified by the Secretary and all processes in such su its and p roceedings shall be issued to , and served on, th e Secretary .

(4) T he h ead q u arte rs o f th e B oard shall be loca ted a t H yderabad .

T e r m o f o£ B ce o f m e m b e r s o f t h e B o a r d a n d f i l l i n g o f c a s u a l v a c a n c ie s a m o n g m e m b e r s —

4. (I) T h e n om inated m em bers o f th e B oard shall hold office for a term o f th ree years from th e da te o f no tifica tion o f th e ir nom ination ; and th e term o f office o f th e co-opted m em bers o f the Board shall te rm inate on th e sam e d a te as th a t o f the nom inated m em bers th e re of :

Provided th a t th e G overnm ent m ay, by n o tifica tion and fo r reasons to be recorded there in , extend th e te rm o f office o f all o r any of th e m em bers of th e B oard includ jng the C h airm an and Vice-Ghair- m an by such period n o t exeeding one year a t a tim c.aiS they m ay deem fit; so how ever, th a t the period so ex tended shall n o t in the aggregate exceed tw o years.

(2) Mo person w ho is nom inated as a m em ber o f tlie B oard as th e ho lder o f a p a r tic u la r ap p o in tm en t shbll con tinue to be a m em ber of the B oard on his ceasing to be th e ho ld er o f th a t particu la r appo in tm ent.

(3) T he vacancies arising by afflux o f tim e and all casual vacancies am ong the nom in a ted or co -opted m em bers o f the Board may be filled a t any tim e, bu t n o t beyond a period o f th ree m onths from the d a te o f occurrence o f th e vacancy, in the m anner specified in section 3 :

IV

Provided th a t a person nom ina ted o r co -opted in a casual vacancy shall be a m em ber only fo r the residue o f th e te rm for w hich -the person in w hose p lace he is nom inated or co -op ted w ould have been a m em ber o f the Board.

A p p o i n t m e n t o f C h a i r m a n a n d h i s f u n c t i o n s —

5. (1) (a) The G overnm ent shall ap p o in t a person to be th e C hair-r m an o f the Board, who shall, by v irtue of th r said appo in tm en t, be a

m em ber o f the B oard, if he is n o t already a raenaber o f the B oard.

(b) The C hairm an ^hall hold office for a te rm of th ree years from th e d a te on w hich he en ters upon his office ; •

P rovided th a t th e C hairm an shall, no tw ithstand ins the exp ira tion o f his term ; continue to hold office UQtil his successor enters upon hi,s office.

(2) It shall be the duly o f the C h a irm an to see th a t th is A ct and regu lations are observed and he shall have all powers necessary fo r th is purpose.

(3) In any case o f em ergency arising out o f the adhiin istrati\fe business of the B oard, w hich in the op in ion o f the C hairm an , requires' the tak ing of im m ediate ac tio n , he shall take such ac tion as he deems necessary and shall th e re a f te r rep o rt his ac tion to the B oard a t its nex t m eeting.

(4) The C hairm an shall perform sucli o th e r functions as m ay be la id down by the reg u M io n s.

A p p o i n t m e n t o f V i c e - C h a i r m a n a n d h i s f u n c t i o n s : *

6. (1) The G overnm ent shall appo in t one/>r m ore bu^ no,t exceed ing th ree V ice-C hairm en from am ongst the m em bers o f th ^ B ja rd , o f w hom one shall be a person o rd inarily residing a t the h ead q u arte rs o f the B oard. Every V ice-C hairm an shall hold office only so long as he continues to be the m em ber o f the Board. ..

(2) The V ice-Chairm en shall assist the C hairm an in all m atters, adm in istra tive o r aci^demic, and shall exercise such powers and p erform such functions as m ay be delegated to them by t h j C hairm an .

(3) W hen the office of the C hairm an is vacant, one of the ViceC hairm en as m ay be appoin ted by th e G overnm ent in this behalf, shall perfo rm the func tions o f the C hiiirm an.

A p p o i n t m e n t , o f S e c r e t a r y a n d h i s f u n c t i o D S a n d o f o t h e r e m p lo y e e s o f t h e B o a r d .

7. (1) The G overnm en t shall appo in t a Secretary to th e B oard for perform ing such functions as may be en trusted to h im k>y or under this Act.

(2) (a) The Secretary shall be the ch ie f excuMve officer o f th e B oard and its com m ittees and shall be rc 'p o n s ib le ftfr im plem enting, the reso lu tions of the B oard or its com m ittees.

(b) He shall be the custod ian o f all th e reco-rds o f th e B oard and shal} be responsib le fo r the efficient function ing o f its ofiSce,

(c) He shall exercise such pow ers o f coriiro l and supervisionover the ofiSces un d er the B oard and the staff thcFein, 'as m a f be prescribed . , . i

(3) (a) Subject to such rules as m ay be m ade ir> th is behalf, th e B oard may appo in t such o th e r officers and servants as it m ay deem nccessary and p roper for the efficient execution o f its duties.

(b) N o t w ith stand ing any th in g in clause (a), the G overnr nicnt m ay transfer any officer o r servan t o f th e B oard to th e service of, th e G overnm ent, and transfer any officer o f the G overnm ent to the-service o f the B oard ,

R e m o v a l o f a m e m b e r o f t h e B o a r d

8. T he G overnm ent m ay, by n o tifica tion and fo r reasons to be recorded th ere in , rem ove any nom inated o r co-opted m em ber o f the B oard during the term o f h is office, who, in th e ir op in ion , has abused his position as such m em ber so as to render his. co n tin u an ce on th e B oard d e te rim en ta l to -th e public in terest :

P rov ided th a t th e G overnm ent shall, before issuing th e no tification for Ute rem ovaf o f such m em ber give him an o p p o rtu n ity to m ake his rep re sen ta tio n against the ac tion proposed and consider th e sam e.

P o w e r s o f t h e B o a r d

9. (1) Subject t6 'su ch d irections as the G overnm eht m ay give in this behalf and to the o ther provisions o f th is A ct, the B oard shall have the follow ing pow ers, namely :—

(i) to m ake regu la tions, p iov id in g for courses o f study and medium of in struction in such brunches of In te rm ed ia te education as it may th ink fit, and for carry ing o u t o th e r purposes o f this A ct;

VI

vn

fii) to affltiate any coliege or o th e r ed ucational in stitu tio n in the S ta te to the B oard as p rovid ing courses o f study qualify ing students for the In term ed ia te exam ination , an d to recognise any colioge or o th e r ed u ca tio n a l institu tion fo r the purpose o f ad in ittin g i t to the priv iit ge to be g ran ted by the Board; and to w ithdraw such affilia tion o r recognition ;

(iii) to Say dow n th e q u a lifica tions o f teachers requ ired to teach lile subjects included in the courses of study in d ifferen t b ranches of th e in te rm ed ia te ed u ca tio n , th e w orkload o f such teachers and the num ber of w orking days in an academ ic year o f sem ester and o ther m a tte rs inc iden ta l th ere to ;

(iv) to fom ru la tc ichem es fo r co n d u c t o f In te rm ed ia te exam in a tion an d to ad m it cand idates to such 'exam ina tion ;

(v) to dem and and receive such fees and o th e r charges as may be fixed in th e reg u la tions for the In te rm ed ia te exam ination ;

<vi) to c o n d u c t the Im e n n e d ia te exam ination , to ta k e all steps anciU aiy th e re to and pub lish the resu lts thereof ;

(vii) to g ran t certificates to the can d id a tes who. have-passed the In te rm ed ia te exam ination ;

(viii) to co -o rd inate and co-opera te w ith the U niversities alid o th e r a u th o ritie s in the S tate in such m anner and fo r such purpose as m ay be p resc rib ed ;

(ix) to d irec t inspection of ju n io r colleges or o th e r affiliated co lleges, and to tak e all m easure nccessary to ensure th a t-p ro p er stan d a rd s o f instruction are m ain ta ined in them ;

• I

(x) to call fo r such repo rts , re tu rn s and o'ther in fo rm ation as m ay be prescribed , from th e ju n io r colleges o r a ffilia ted colleges o r the recognised colleges or ed u ca tio n a l institu tions arid to call f6 r repo rts from the D irec to r on the co n d itio n , o f the junior- colleges or o ther a ffilia ted colleges, or o f colleges or educational in stitu tionsjapp ly ing

.for affixation or recogn ition ;

(xi) to ad o p t m easures to prom ote physical, .m ora l and social w elfare o f s tu d en ts ia the ju a io r colleges or o th e r affilia ted colleges and to lay dow n cond itions o f th e ir residence and discip line ;

(xii) to recognise, any d ip lom a or ce rtif ica te g ran ted by any other B oard or ed u ca tio n a l au th o rity , w hether w itjiin or outside the S ta te as equivalent to the ce rtif ica te g ran ted by the Boarci, and any course

vjn

o f study undertaken by cand id a tes as sufficient for the purpose o f adm itting them for the In te rm ed ia te exam ination ;

(xiii) to hold and m anage endow m ents and to in s titu te and aw ard scholarships, m edals, prizes and the like under conditions th a t may be prescribed;

(xiv’i to acqiure. hold and dispose o f p roperty , b o th m ovable and im m ovable, lo r the purpose o f the Board and to en ter in to agreem ents th e re fo r ;

(xv) to adm in ister the funds p laced at its disposal for the purposes for w hich they a re in tended or generally for purposes of the Board;

(xvt) to approve its annua? accounts and to delegate financial pow ers to a com m ittee , if any, constitu ted therefo r;

(xvii) to delegate stich of its powers as it deem s fit to any o f th e com m ittees or to theC hairm an or to any other a u th o rity of the B oard;

(xviii) to subm it to th e G overnm ent, its views on any m atter w ith w hich it is concerned , and its rep o rt on any m a tte r called for from it by the G overnm ent ;

(xix) to perform such o ther functions as m ay be en tru sted to i t by the G overnm ent *by o r under th is A ct fo r regu la ting and superv ising all aspects o f the In te rm ed ia te education in the S tate ;

(XX) to do all acts o r (hings necessary or in c iden ta l f o r carry ing o u t the purposes o f th is A ct. ' ,

(2) N o tw ith stand ing any th ing in any law relating to the U niversities for the tim e being in force in the S ta te ;—

(a) th e B oard shall have, and a U niversity in the S ta te or any au tho rity thereof shall no t haVe and,shall be deem ed never to have had the pow er to a ffilia te any college or o th e r educational in stitu tio n in the S tate as prov id ing courses o f stu d y for qualify ing studen ts fo r adm ission to the In te rm ed ia te exam ination and to recognise .any cof- lege 'o r educational in stitu tion for the purp6se o f ad m ittin g it to the privileges to be g ran ted by the B oard in accordance w ith the regu la- tioBS or, any o f the pow ers specified in item s (iv),(v),(vi) and (vii) o f su b 'sec tio n (l), no tw ithstand ing th a t any such college o r o ther educational in stitu tion has been a ffila ied to) or recognised by. any U niversity for any o ther course o f study provided by such U niveisity ;

(W any pevsoii passing th e jn te rm e d js te -ex a m ih a tio fi and 'ho ld ing a cej-tificate g ran ted by th e B oard th e re fo r shall be eligible fo r'ad ip i- ision in to any c o lle g e jn the State-.to a co u tse ,of- study qualifying s tuden ts for admis>ipn to. UoiversUywexam,inations iniaccordance-w ith the regu la tions o f the U niversity co;iccrne,d.

M e e t i n g s o f t h e B o a r d

10. (1) T he B o^rd shall, fo r the d isposal o f its business, ipêt ^ s often as necessary but .not fess th a n tw ice ;n each acaderdi'c year. ^

,(2) -Every m eeting o f the.B oa,rd ind.-uding af m eeting.at-thei;r4qui- s ition o f m em bers o f m ore than o ne-ha lf o f t.he to ta l s tren g th o f the Board, shall be convened in such m anner and at such tim e and place and by such au th o rity as may be p rovided ia .ilie regu la tions '

(3) Every m eeting o f ’the B oard sh'all be presided over by theC hairm an , in bis absence iby th e V ice-C hairm an, and infJhe< ^bênce o f b o th th e C hairm alf and V ice-C hairjnan ,,by a m em ber choSen^hep- efor by th e tuembeTS p re se n t;a t the m eeting . ■- 'f -’JSij

(4) All questions a t any m eeting o f 'th e B oard shall be 'tfec id e^by a m a jo rity o f the’m enibers pfi'esent an d voting a t 'th e andin th e case o f equality o f votes^.thc-pjsrspn-prfjid ing shall jiave and exercise a second or casting vote

' .. \(5) O nc-^hird o f tlje to ta l s trength .o f th e B oar^ -^xisting;,afe ,4be

tim e o f a m eeting o f the Board, shall form, the qUiOrurft-forithat m eeting.

I t I /<5(

E xplandfibn — Foi" the -purposd o f th is sub seci'ioiT, frtictions exceeding o n e-h a lf be counfed ' as" one and orh§r *fracti(3rts s M ll ' be disregarded., . |. i

(6) T he Board shall observe such r u l |s o f,p rocedu re in regard to the tran sac tio n o f business a t its'Si'eetingS ^’s mây be lîd (l(5wn byth e ’regula'lions. '

j i . » ,r. .

C Q m m i t t e e s 'c i f th e ''B o a r c f 5I I ' ' j M ’ ;

llr. (1) The: Board m ay, fro m 'tim e , td -tim e *ap(Jt)int ohe 6V m ore com m ittees fo r .such p u rp o ses 'an d .in suckra 'anner-an 'd consisting Qjf such num ber o f jn 'em bers as may b^prescribed '. > " "

' (2) Every m fe tin g o f the co ihm ilice fehall* be convened arid Kel'd in such m anner and a t such tiriie and pl^ce as' friky' be pVoVide^'* Vn ^he regulations.

(3) T he B oard m ay refer to any such com m ittee fo r enqu iry and rep o rt any m a tte r re la tin g to any o f th e purposes o f th isA ct o r. delegate to i t any -o f its functions by reso lu tion , sub ject to such co n d itions as i t deem s fit to im pose and m ay cancel any such delegation .

(4) The B oard m ay. a t any tim e, dissolve any such com m ittee .

P o w e r o f B o a r d t o m a k e r e g u l a t i o n s .

12, '(1) The Board may, with the approval o f the Government and by notification, make regulations, not inconsistent with the provisions o f this A'ct or therrules made thereunder, to carry out the purposes o f this Act.

(2) In p a rtic u la r and w ith o u t p re jud ice to th e genera lity o f the fo regoing pow er, such regu la tions m ay p rov ide for—

(a) th e m anner o f co -op ting persons as m em bers o f the B oard and th e convening and holding tof m eetings o f th e B oard and its com m ittees, th e tim es and p laces a t w hich such m eetings shall be held and the conduct o f business th e rea t;

^ b ) T he functions o f th e com m ittees appo in ted un d er section 11;

(c) any o th e r fu n c tio n s to be perfo rm ed by th e C hairm an;

(d) th e m ethod o f m anagem ent o f th e p ro p erty o f the B oard and *the ap p o in tm en t o f officers and o th e r em ployees o f th e B oard and th e ir conditions o f service.

(e) th e conditions fo r affiliating any college o r o th e r educatonal in stitu tion in th e S tate o r fo r g ran tin g recogn ition to any college o r o th e r educational in s titu tio n u n d er th is Act;

(f) the s tan d ard s o f staff, equ ipm ent, accom m odation , tra in in gand o th e r facilities m any ju n io r college o r o th e r affiliated college;

, f(g) th e courses o f study inc lud ing p rac tica l tra in in g , if any , and

the p e rio d thereo f, and th e m edium o f in stru c tio n , fo^ In te rm ed ia te education and th e elig ib ility fo r adm ission o f studen ts to th e courses ot study in d ifferent b ranches o f In te rm ed ia te education ;

(h) th e subjects fo r, and th e co n d u c t of. In te rm ed ia te cxam ina- -tion . th e ap p o in tm en t, qualifications, du ties and pow ers o f exam iners in re la tio n to th e sa id exam ina tion and th e rem u n era tio n payable to them , the fixation o f fees and o th e r charges for adm ission to th e Inte rm ed ia te exam ination , and th e copd itions for adm ission o f candidates to th e In te rm ed ia te exam ination ;

(1) tne standards o f proficiency requ ired fo r the gran t o f certificates;

tj) the allow ances payable to th e m em bers o f th e B oard o r 4ts com m ittee fo r a tten d in g m eetings o f th e B oard o r its com m ittees;

(k) any o th e r in a tle r w hich is to t e 01* m ay be p rov ided under this Act and in respect o f w hich no ru les have 'been 'm a'de.

I n c o m e a n d e x p e n s e s o f t h e B o a r d .

1 ?. (1) T h e incom e o f th e B oard shall consist o f—

(a) all fees and o th e r charges received-by th e B oard under theprovisions o f th is A ct; '

(b) all m onies received from th e S ta te o r C en tra l G overnm ent and th e U niversity G ran ts CommissiOa by w ay o f g ran t, g ift, o r deposit;

(c) donations or other sums received by, the BoartJ from any person or institution; and

(d) all o th e r incom e from endovfrmcnts and o th e r p roperties.

(2) The expenses o f th e B oard shall include th e sa la rie s and allo- w,ances,of the S ecretary , officers and o th e r em ployees o f th e Board', the rem u n era tio n payable to exam m ers, invigilator^ and o th e r persons em ployed in re la tio n to , o r in connection w ith , the conduct o f the In te rm ed ia te 'ex am in a tio n , the allow ances, i f any paid to th e m em bers o f th e B oard o r its com m ittees fo r a tten d in g m eetings o f th e B oard or its com m ittees, and such o th e r expeases as a re necessary fo r carry ing o u t th e purposes o f th is Act.

(3) All m onies received by th e B oard shall be lodged in th e G overnm ent treasu ry or in any bank specified by th e G overnm ent,

(4) T he B oard m ay, w ith the san c tio a o f the G overnm en t, invest its su rp lus funds in such m anner as m ay be p rescribed .

(5) The m onies o f th e ^ o a r d so lodged o r invested sjiall be draw n by the S ecretary in such m anner as m ay fee p rescribed .

(6) Any sums placed a t the d isposal o f th e Board by th e S ta te or C en tra l G overnm ent, th e U niversity G ran ts C om m ission o r by any person o r o th e r in s titu tio n fo r a specific ,purpose shall be adm inistered by the B oard fo r th a t purpose , su b jec t t* any genera l o r special orders o f the G o v e rn m en t in th a t behalf.

XI

>'(7 ‘The Board-sh'airi keep .proper scco iin ls o f its 'in co m e an\i expenses and the annual accounts o f the Board shall be subject to au8 it

rby an auditt5r appo in ted annually by th^*ôard .

,P ro _ 9 e e d in g f( ,n o t-to l?e i n v a l i d a t e d b y ^ i f ^ p n o f v a c a n c ie s e t c in t h e B o s ( i^ ;a r .its^ c o ^ m i t t e e s . -

14. N o act o r proceediigg.of th e ,3 p a n i or any o f its com rpitte^s shall be deem ed to be invalid by reason only o f a defect in th e constitu tio n o f the B oard pj, such jcpm m iuee o r on the g round th a t tl\e C hairm an or Vice C hairm an o f the B oard , o r any m em ber o f ihe Board Qr>pommitte,e, a?.th^;C.9se n:\ay ,b,6j no t en titled to ,h o ld ’oi; continue in such office, o r by reason o f such act o r p roceed ing .ha ving been done-or ônû(^te^ dyeing the; pet;iod o f any va,cancy .in office o f the* Chajr-man, y r Vice-^hairmai;?^ of the B oard o r ^ n y o f thevinem bers o f the B o ard ’o r com m ittee , as the case m ay b e .

P o w e r s b 'P G o V e r b m ^ n t/

15.. (l')'TherG ove!rrm ent'sh 'all!hav€ ifie rrgHt to ra u s e an inspec tion to be m ade by such person or persons as ihey may d irec t, o f the Bd&.rd an d o f every jum cfi!-cbllege'or*dther affiliated co lU ge,-and also fo cause an inquiry t o be rhade, in respect o f any m a tte r connected w ith the Bcfard or, In to the le a c h in g an'd'othfer w ork conducted or done by anj? ju n io r co lleg e 'o r 'o th er 'a ffilia ted college. T he G overnm e n t shall in evfery;suCh case give n o tice to th e B’o a r d '‘and ro the junirff collfege; Ot'OihCT a'ffilia'tcd'tdilege cort'cferned o f th e ir in ten tion to .cause suiJh inspfect'ion or inqu ify to be m ade and th eB 6 ‘ard . ju n io r college or o th e r affiliated college, as the cMd may be, shUll b'e en titled to be represen ted therea i.

!

(2) T he G overnm ent sW ll fo rw a rt fo 'th e 'C h airrtian orth 'e BoaYd' a copy o f th e inspection re p o rt fo r ob ta in ing th e views o f the Board and on receip t o f buchvifewS; the G o v irn m e n t in'ay lender suciri advice as they consider neceSsary.and fix a tiifiS fim it fo r 'a tU o n 'to b e ta ken by the Bob rd :

P rovided th a t fhe G overnm en t may, fo r .sufficient cause showî by the B oard , ex tend the tim e lim it by sucli period as tliey may deem

(3) Tffe J& bvernm ent'rtay, w W re acti.on has noC been taken by the B o a rd 'to th e ir sa tisfac tion svithin' th e tim e'fixed o r ex tended by them under^siib s e c t io n \ i ) , a fte r considerini^ 'any explahation furn is h e d ,o r I'epresefifation m ade by th e lôard^, issue such "directions a’s th e y m ay th in k fit and th e B oard shall comply" w ith such d irectio li's’

k\i

(4) If a l,any tim e, the G ovcrnm e;ir arc jaiisjlêd,that c jrcum stanccs exist which render it necessary fo r the;i^ tp . take .im m ediate action , they m ay, consisten t w ith the purposes o f.th 'S A ct, take such actiop as may appear lo jh cm to l?e necesâ,ry and u ifo rp i tîc Boajjd, of th^ action takeij. ,

D i s s o l u t i o n o f t h e B o a r d in c e r t a i n cas«s-.

16, (\ W here it appears to the G overn'm eht th ^ t the B o a ri has fa iledto exercise its pow ers or to perform its fiihciions o r lias excfeede'd or ab,used any of the pqw c/s conferred upon it by o r under th is A ct ih,e G overnm ent m ay direct ,the B oard to rem edy such failu re , excess or abuse o r to give a satisfactory , exp lanajion th ere fo r w ith jn .such tim e as the G overnm ent m ay fix in this behalf, and where the Board fails »o Comply w ith siioh'directx^n, for'where I'hc GoVernmfent a're'sa’tJsfied th a t a s itu a tio n has 'a risen in nvhich the functions o f ihe Board canriot be ca'rried'ftri in &f6<i(5irdance w ithK he p ro v isitions of th isA ct, fhe'^jroyi- e rn raen t m ay dissolve tfte B oard w ith effct f ro n ra sf>ecified date-and rcconstirutfe it,cither*iTrtmediately o r 'w jth effect from ano ther i^ptcifidd d a te n o H a t ^ than six m onths^from tlie datfc of-s'ucH ‘dissolution*and cause all or any o f the poAVers‘‘|i®rfo'mecl'by- Siich-person or Sdthbrity as the G bvenm ent m ay ap p o in t in this b eha lf uniil the Board is recon stitu ted in acco rdancc 'w ith trfe't>r6^si6nsioF' this A il; !»fid*anJ'''i)^sofl o r au th o rity so appo in ted m ay, if the G overnm ent so d irect, receive rem tioera tion for 'the services rendered from the fudds of 'th e Board;

(2) W ith effect tro m the da te speclded for the d issolution o f theB o a rd “ under sub-section (1 its meml>crs including tis Chairm atTand V ice-C hairm an shall fo h h w ith “be deem ed to fiave vacated th e ir offices as such. ’

(3) Eveiry o rd er o f dissoUJWJUffladft under sub-section (-1) s l i a j l . ^ soon as m ay be a fte r it is made, be la id before each H ouse of the A ndhra Pradesh State L egislajurc.

Power o f .th e G o v e r o m e a t i i:p.les.

T7-. (1) The*G overn‘m ent'm ^V , By‘notification , m ake rules fo r ca rry ing out all o r any o f the*purpose'fif'llii8 Ac£. ' ■'

(•2)-Every rulei'inade u n d e r t>iiS Acr shall,'" 'im m ediately a /ie r it is m ade^'be'lai'd beforfe âclr HouSe* oT'tlic S tate Le^gisiature i f l t i s i n ‘ sS io n And if it is ^ o t in session, in the session im m ediately 'fo llow iag for a to ta l period oT fou rteen days \vhich‘ A ay be com prised in one s'issiun or i n tw o successive sessions, and if, before the ex p ira tio n s’o f the sessi<in 'ia which' it is '-sdfaid or th e V esssion'im m ediately fo llow ing, b o th H ouses agree in m aking any m odificaliou in the ru le o r in

5011

the annuljnent o f the rule, the rule shall, with effect fVoni the d a te o f notification o f such m odification or annulment have effect only in such raodifie'd form or shall stand annulled, as the case may be ; so however that any such m odification or annulment shall be without prejudice to the validity o f anything previously done under that rule

M e m b e r s <of t h e B o ^ r d , e x a m i n e r s , a n d ofiE icers a n d o t h e r e m p lo y e e s o f t h e B o » r d t o b e p u b l i c s e r v a n t s .

18. (1) the members o f the Board and examiners, officers and other em ployees o f the Board shall be deemed to be public servants within the m eaning o f section 21 o f the Indian Penal Code.

(2) An assault on or use o f criminal force to an examiner, invigilator or any other person em ployed in connection with Jhe examination conducted by the Board within a period one month prior to the com m encem ent o f the examinatioQ, during the course o f the exami- natipn-and within tw o months immediatley following such examination shall be deemed to be^n obstruction caused to a public servant in the discharge o f his public functions and shall be cognizable offence.

P r o t e c t i o n o f a c t io n t a k e n in . g o o d f a i t h .

19. N o ?uit, prosecution or other legal proceeding shall lie against the Government or the Board or any oflScer or employee o f the Board for anything which is in good faith dons or intended to be done in pursuance o f any o f the provisions o f this A ct or any rule or regulation madf thereunder.

‘S a v in g i n r e s p e c t o f e x i s t i n g B o a r d t

:0- (1) The Board o f Intermediate Education constituted and furi- ctioaing immediately before the commencement o f this Act under extcutive orders o f the G overnm eot (hereinafter referred to as exiisting Board) shall cease to exist on the d&te on which a Board is established in accordance with the provisions o f this Act.

(2) All thing! di n c o r ot'ier actions taken b> the existing Board ox ,deemed to have Ijcen done o-‘ taken by it as a succesQr to any previous Board, shall be deemed to hi>vc been done or t^ken by the Board established ip its place under this Act and all assets vested in, and all liabilities subsisting againist. the existing Board on the date, shall devolve on the Board established in its place uuder this /Vet-

xiv

JCV

P o w e r t o r e m o v e d i f f i c u l t i e s ,

21. ( ! ) I f any difficulty arises in giving effect to any provision o f this Act, the Government may, by notification, make such provisions not inconsistent w ith the provisions o f this A ct, as appear to them to be necessary or expedient for the purpose o f rem oving the difficulty;

Provided that no such notification shall be issued under this section after the expiry o f two years from the date o f commencement o f this Act.

(2) Every notification issued under this section shall be laid before each House o f the State Legislature and the provisions o f subsection (2) o f section 1 7 shall appli in respect o f such notificatioo as it applies in respect o f a rule m ade under this Act,

RULES U N D E R A N D H R A PRADESH IN T E R M E D IA T E ED U C A TIO N ACT. 1971.

(G. O. M s. N o . 539, Education (V), •>)th April, 1975)'.

I. In exercise o f the powers conferred by sub-section ( i ) o f section 17 read with clause (1) o f section 2 o f the Andhra Pradesh Intermediate Education Act, 1971 (Andhra Pradesh Act No. 2 o f 1971). the G overaor o f Andhra Pradesh hereby makes the follow ing rule relating to semesters

RULES

Every academ ic year shall consist o f three semesters.

11 In exercise o f the powers conferred by sub-sectio/» (!) ,of section17 read with elapse (c) o f sjib-?ection (2) and sub-section (3) o f section 7 o f the Andhra Pradesh .Intermediate Education A ct, 1971 (Andhra Pradesh Act N o . 2 o f 1971), the Governcr o f Andhf.a Pradesh hereby makes the follow ing Rule relating to the powers o f the Secrctiry and appointm ent o f other,etnployees o f the Board

R U LES ’

I. The Secretary shall exercise the follow ing powers o f control and supervision over the officers under the Board and the stafi' therein.

(i) tp take all steps to conduct the, Intermediate ^examination and award certificates:

x v l

(ii) to appo in t ih e m inisterial ariy tVs'i grade 'sl'irtfa 'nd 'cohtingeri? staflf;

(lit) tp exercise d iscip linary contfoJ over the stan m entioned in item (i.) above. A»;râppearshall lie t.o l.lic V ice-C hatrm an,

, against th e cyders passed by the Secretary ;

(iv) to sanction tJI k inds o f leave lo the officers an d ' em ployees o f.tb e B oard ; . ,

(V) t6 sarte iion casual- leave* in respect o f 'o ff ic e rs a n d 'o ih c r em ployees on d ep u ta tio n to the Board;

(vi) to p e rfo rm such other functions as may be e;>trus(ed to him eitiier by th e C hîrm art o r by th e Board; '' ‘

(v ii),to draw m onies o f the B oard as.la jd dow n in th e rules.

2. T h e Secretitry may delegate any o f his'po'wers t o ‘'th e o ther oIH- le rs of the Boaid w ith th e approval o f the Board

3. (1) The Board m ay appo in t, as a n d \^hen nefcfes§ary, th e req u isite Dumber of officers, m in isteriiW tafF , last graeiW servan ts and contin- fe n t staff

(2) The Officers and o th e r servants requ ired fo f the Board m ay be. appo in ted e ither by d irect rec rv iim en t or by pYorVoiioh fio h i th e low er c a d re s 'o r by dep u ta tio n frornT he G bverhnien t D eparim eo ts or aî^ôDomous ooaies.

(3) The terras and cond itions on w hich the officers and servan ts m ay be ap p o in ted by th e B oar^ on d ep u ta tio n shall norm ally be in conform ity w ith those prescrihted u n d er the Fvjndam ental Jlules.jr,'- I . . . . . j

' -(4) T h e depii'talfch 'allow ailCe and cotitribuiionsT to^vards leavesa la ry afid 'pen si oft ahd othfer allow ances kFlo'wed to officers and servan ts taken on d^'pii'taticSn by th e &oard shall be me’t fjo in the funds o f the B oard .

(5) T he 'B oard 'sh 'a ll alstf have pow ers to appoint- or re-em ploy persons who haVe re tired 'fro m G overnm ent Service or au tonom ous bodies dr from the Board itself to any o f thfe p b s iso n the term s ahd cond itions as may be fixed by the Board in each case on its m erits,

III. ih exercise of-ihe pow ers cortferred by sub-section (1) o f section)7 read with clauses (viii), (x) and (xiii) o f sub-section (1) o f section 9o f t h e A'ndhra'Pr’adesh fA term edlate E ducation A ct, ’1971 (A ndhra

t r , T

P rad ish A ct N o 2 o f l9 7 l ) , th e ’G overnor b f A n d llr/V raJ jesh hereby« * I " . 1 j , f! > -O' > , I '1 >makes tlê folIow[pg rules r e l a y i ^ t o exerci^se o f pojvers o f the__Bqa^^d

KVll

.(0

1. The B oard shall co -o rd ina te and co -o p era te w ith all the U niversities in th e S ta te and w ith th e Teluû A kadem i and o th e r educational in stru c tio n s in th e S ta te for p rep a ra tio n of cu rricu lam and syllabu^ p rescrip tio n o f t e ^ book^, evaluatfon o f ce?l*&cate?, co’ndu c t ’exam inations; awfff^ o rsc h o la rsh ip s based o h lrieV t,"c rea tio n ‘’o f endow m ents, conduc t o f o rien ta tio n courses and a llied top ics, in th e^m an - ner de term ined by the B oard and the G overnm ent from tim e to tim e.

j (I ‘ n I*' j m t)/' f’y '■ -t' V

2. The B oard maj? call fo r th ^ jfo U o w ^ g repo rts , reti^rn^ apd ptherin fo rm atib n .fro ra th’e Ju n io r Colleges and'other'V ffiliate'd colleges, or .. f.i' 1 » . •„ n t >v,. rr °the recognised colleges or E ducationaL institu tionS i nam ely

* a -» T

A ll, repo rts an d re tu rn s necessary fo r the conduct o f the* n* >, t Cii >ry< i \ • n tIn te rm ed ia te E xam m ation :

■ ' i ■ '

(ii) R etu rn o f recogn ition fee collected from In te rm ed ia te Stu-‘ dent's; i ' * ' " '

<1' - f t . ).i> T ' falS' t t . ^ >(iii) Applications for affiliation or recognition;

1 t r . i ' i i . o / I } j ' " . r ‘ f i d <•

(iv) Reports on rectification of the defects pointed out by the t j 1 ’‘ Inspection Commissions appointed'by the Board, v,

1 f t 8 n j 1' f n n ‘O t ' l !3. (1) E ndow m ents, i f any^^ shÎl .b e- jifc^p ted , t>y,*he B oard forspecific p m p o ses , like in stitu tin g and aw ard ing scholarships, m edals, prizes.an^Cthe^l.iJfe»,for th e q^ndidate.s appeartngjfiOrj.thjs.'Tntermediate exam in a tio A Û co u ^ J u n ip r {Ioileg?$ Qr stu d y in g imStbS<'*tej:ognised o r affiliated educationa;! ^pstitutiQpS(ai>jl-,P/fispatingjith''eini fo r In te rm ed ia te E xam ination conducted by the B oard. I f th e endow m ents are given in the shape o(i m onies theinlotfeyisK all.be deposited in any nationalised bank and the in te rest accru ing th e reo n shall be utilised fp;:Jji?.'Speci^c,purpbê.t<yr'yhjgh thCi^ndpjvm^jH is jn&titute4^.iî"the- m anner to be deta iled in the endow m ent deed. I f the endow m en tj is ' in th e shape o f im m ovable p roperty , it shall have to be registered in th e naJn.e ,of tiig B o ^ rd ô i, .0 mU ^ ' li. -n ,, * • 1 1 )

^ iJ'if'ToC) m b n t '3 • ' 'D jfi tb (3)h Th?.-epôwnient.shaljjê;pper/ated;by>i;hQj. S^ccetd’ry in the

sam e m anner as he o pera tes o th e r incom e o f the Board.

XVlll

IV ;- In , exercise ofj th e pow ers co^nferred by . ûb-s^ction (I), ofj sec tio n 17 read witH sub-section (I) o f secjion 11 q f 'th e • A ndhw , P ra - des?i In te rm ed ia te E d u ca tio n A ct. 1971 (A ndhra Pradesh. A ct 2 o f 19^1), the G overnor o f A n d h ra E r^ds^ hereby m akes the follow ing rules relating to com m ittees o f th e B oard.

i . T ^ e Board^ rn^y a n o i n t tlje Ijolôwing CJ!p^niittees, ôr the purpoise, in the rd^mberânjj^consisting o f tjip num tjers, asslôw n against each.i r

(1 ) Standing Com m ittee on Adm inistration and Finance:

J j ^ t - ‘ *(i) .I t shaM be appo in ted b y .th e , Board on the^ recom m e^ndatioh

o f the C hairm an o f the,B oard and it shall consist or m em bers • I * f>[. ry-."' lu -'’ ■ ( ' f ” ‘ ‘ f- .,3 ^n o t exceeom g ten;

(li) th e Secretary to 'G rovernm ent in th e EdiicjUibn D e p a rtm e n t shall be th e C hairm an o f the* C om m ittee;

(iii) I t shall deal w ith all adm in istra tive and financial, m atte rs o f th e Board o f In te rm ed ia te E ducation .

f

2. S tan d in g C om m ittee on A cadem ic affairs:.1 '• * tl> i t Ti r -

(i) It shall be ap p o in ted by:the -Board on the, recoran iendationo f th e C hairm an o f th e B oard and it shall consist of the

■ mem'bet's not ^Xcfeedinfg‘twelve; * - ‘ ^, J ! 1 1 > h . f f , I

(iiy theSChk'irm aniD f'the C om m ittee ' shall btf the D irec to r of. ‘ 'P ublic Iifttrcfc^d'n o1‘'E)ife£tX)'r oT High'ir-feducafio'fi j[wKbêr5■ I ' i§ iff-ch'lr^ o5 '4ht6f Aedi&r^ CtTurSe) ;• i sif ''''

• '1 t

(iii) it 'sh a ll deal, w ith a ll 'a ’cadem ic m atte rs; ’ 'I, ' " i r . " T » ' '

3 , 'S y llab u s’C om tniftees fo r each sub jec t tku'ght in 'lh e In term ed ia te C ourser '' ' '*

a'

(i) I t shall be appo in ted by the B oard on th 'e -reco n im en d a tio n .o f the C h airm an o f th e S tand ing C om m ittee on A cadem ic A lfairs selecting ptiso'hTfel frttm* am d6gflh 'e‘'panelS ’'o b ta in ed

w x

from all the Universities in the State and the Director o f Public Instruction.

(ii) there shall-be a com m ittee for each subject and the number^ o f members shall \>e not less th'Sii 5, exceptTor tlie minorfty languages, like Marathi Kannada ctc., and subject like Hpm< Science, Dance etc7, for'whic^ tlie number inay. tfele'si'thai^ fi^e;

I '(ill) the said Com m ittees shall deal w ith the framing o f the sylla

bus, prescription o f the text books, com m endation o f books in languages other than Telugu, and reivew o f the books;

4. Evaluation Cofnmittce;f 'j

(i) It shall be appointed by the Board on the recommendation o f the Chairman o f the standing C om m ittee on Academic Affairs for evaluation o f the various qualifying examinations conducted outside the State for admission to the Intermediate Course and similar other purposes;

(ii) the number of members shall be not less than five,

5. M alpractices Scrutiny Commlttee;

(i) It shall be appointed by the Board on the recommendation o f the chairman of the Standing Com m ittee on Academic Affairs for scrutinising the cases o f malapractice» resorted to, at the Interm ediate Examination and offeringT it^j advice to the Secretary ;

(ii) it shall consist o f not less than 4 members;

2 In addition to the above Committees, the Board may appoint any other com m ittee for a specific purpose concerned with Intermediate C oune or any aUied purpose.

V :— In exercise o f the powers conferred by sub-section (I) o f section n read w ith sub-sections (-*) and (5) o f section 13 o f the Andhra Pradesh Intermediate Education Act, I97[, Andhra Pradesh Act No. 2 o f 1971), the Governor o f Andhra Pradesh hereby makes the follow ing rules relating to investment o f surplus funds o f the Board o f Interm ediate Education and drawal thereof

R U ;.E S

1. T he B oard m ay w ith th e san c tio n o f the G overnm ent invest its surplus,in any N ationa ljsed B ank as ,reqom m .ended by the S tanding C om m ittee on A dm inistratio .n apd ,F inance .,! -

2. T he monje^s o^ th e p o a fd lodged pr) inv isted in th e Q pvernm enl T reasury or in any b an k shall be draw n by th e secretary,^ w ith the sanction o f th e S tand ing C om m ittee on A dm snistraion and F inance ,

M.V..S ecretary to G o v ern m en t.

BOARD OF INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION - A.P.R e g u l a t i o n s o f t h e T w o - Y e a r I n t e r m e d i a t e C o u r s e

( C orrec ted up to 31-12-1975 )

I. C O U R S E O F S T U D Y :

(i) The C ourse fo r the tw o -y ear In te rm ed ia te E xam ination shall coinprise o f the follow ing subjects o f study :

P a rt I English.

P a rt II T elugu o r any o ther classical o r m odern or fo reign language.

T he follow ing shall be the classical, m odern and fo re ign languages.

Classical : S anskrit, Persian , A rabic.

M odern : T elugu, U rd u , H indi, T am il, ,M ara th i, K an n ad a and O riya.

Foreign : G erm an, F rench and Russian.

P a rt III O ptional Subjects :

M odern Languages, U nder this part shall consist of Telugu, U rd u , Hindi,‘T am il. M ara th i, K annada, O riya and English. ^

Classical Languages shall com prise o f Sanskrit, Persian and A rabic.

(ii) C andidates shall select an approved com bination o f two subjects e ither from G roup A under Sciences or th ree subjects from G ro u p B under H um anities or one subject under G rg u p C,

G R O U P A

1. M athem atics2. Physical Sciences3. Biological Sciences4. Home Science5. G eology

G R O U P B

1- M athem ati'cs2. Logic

3. Ind ian H is to ry

4. W orld H i'story

5. C ivics-(including In d ia n A d ra ia fs tra tio n )6. E conom ics7. G eo g rap h y

8. Sociology

9. C om m erce

10. H om e Science

n . C lassical L anguage

12. M odern. L anguage

IL F in e A rts r (an y one o f th e foKowfng)

a ) M usic

b) Ehrawing & Pkiratmg;

c ) S culp ture

d) D ance(K uch ipud i oi* B h a ra tan a ty a )

e) T h ea trica l Arts..

G R O U P G

1. Sanskrit Veda&

2. S anskrit S astras,

( l i i ) A p p r o v e d C o n r b l i i a t u m s ;

G r o u p A (S c ie n c e )

1. M athem atics “ Physical Sciences

2. Physical Sciences - B iological Scicnces

3. H om e Science - Physical Sciences

4. Physical Sciences and G eology.

5. G eology - Geography

G r o u p B ( H u m a n it ie s )

1. M athem atics - Econom ics - Logic

2. M athem atics - Econom ics - Com m erce.3. Ind ian H istory - Econom ics - Civics.4. W orld H istory - Econom ics - Civics.5. Jndian H istory - Civics - Logic.

6. W orld H isto ry - C ivics - Logic.

7. Ind ian H istory - G eography - Econom ics.

8. W orld H istory - G eography - Econom ics.

9. Ind ian H istory - Econom ics - F ine A rts.

10. W orld H istory - Econom ics - F ine A rts.

11. In d ian H isto ry - Econom ics - H om e Science.

12. W orld H isto ry - Econom ics - H om e Science. ^13. Indian H istory - C ivics - Fine A rts.14. W orld H isto ry - C ivics - F ine A rts.

15. C om m erce - Econom ics - Civics.

16. C om m erce - Econom ics ~ Geogi*aphy,

17. Econom ics - G eography - Civics.

18. M odern Language - In d ian H isto ry - Civics.

19. M odern Language - W orld H isto ry - Civics,

20. M odern L an g u ag e '- H om e Science - Fine A rts.21. M odern Language - Ind ian H istory - Fine A rts.

22. M odern Language-+-W orld H istory - Fine A rts,

23. M odern L anguage - Indian H istory - Hdme Scicnce.

24. M odern L anguage - W orld H isto ry ~ Home Science.

25. Classical Language - Ind ian H isto ry - Cfvics.

26. Classical Language - W orld H istory - Civics.

27. Classical Language - H om e Science - F ine A rts.>n

28. Classical Language - Ind ian H isto ry - Fine A rts.

29. C lassical Language - W orld H isto ry - F ine ^ r ts -

30. Classical Language - Jndian H isto ry - Hom e Sciencc.

31. C lassical L anguage - W orld H istory - f jo ln e Science. . 132. W orld H isto ry - In d ian H isto ry ~ Civics.33. C lassical L anguage - M odern Language - Ind ian H istory.

34 . C lassical L anguage - M odern 'fcahguage - W orld H istory.

35. C om raerec - Econoipics - Logic,

36. Ind ian H isto ry - Econom ics - Logic.

37. W orld H istory - Econom ics - Logic,

38. M odern L anguage - Logic - Ind ian H istory .

39. M odern Language - Logic - W orld H istory .

40. C lassical Language - Ind ian H isto ry - Logic.

41. C lassical L anguage - W orld H isto ry - Logic.

42. M odern L anguage - Econom ics - Ind ian H istory .

43. M odern L anguage - Econom ics - W o ild H istory .

44. C om m erce - Econom ics - M odern Language.

45. C om m erce - Econom ics - fnd ian H istory .

46. C om m erce - Econom ics - W orld H istory .

47. In d ian H isto ry - Econom ics - Sociology.

48. W orld H isto ry - .Ecohom ics - Sociology.

49. G eography - Ind ian H isto ry - Civics.

50. G eography - W orld H isto ry - Civics.

G r o u p C ( S a s t r a s & V e d a s ]

1. Sanskrit Vedas.2. Sanskrit Sastras.

iv. The full p a rticu la rs o f th e couj-se for the tw o -y ear in term ediatecourse a re as follovi's :

a) T he course o f study in English under P a r t I shall consist of de tailed as well as non-detailed study o f prescribed tex t books as p er the syllabus.

cb) The course o f 's tu d y in T elugu o r any other m odern or classi

cal language or fo re ign language under P a r t l l shall consist of d e ta iled as well as non-detailed study in the language o f p resc ribed tex t books as per the syllabus. H ow ever, fo r Persian R ussian , F ren ch and G erm an languages, no non-detailed study is p rescribe d. '

- -•»c) The course ^of study in subjects under P a r t ,I I I shall be as

p rescribed in tlhe Syllabi and tex t books and shall include in s tru c tio n in pra 'ctical w ork also.

II I . A D M I S S I O N T O T H E C Q U R S E ;

The follow ing cand idates ar6 eligible fo r addm issidn to the C ourse

(i) (o) Those who passed ,ip one a ttp m p t or C om partm en tallythe X class Pub lic E xam ination (S .S.C .) o r O .S.S.C . exam ination

conducted by the B oard o f Secondary E ducation , A ndhra P radesh or t h e M atricu la tio n E x an .'n a tio n (X Class s tandard) o f A ndhra U n iversity or Sri V enkatesw ara U niversity o r O sm ania U niversity or any o ther exam ination recognised by the B oard o f In te rm ed ia te E ducation as equivalen t tliereto .

(b) C and ida tes who passed at one s itting o r com p artm en tly theH .S .C , or S .S .L .C . E xam in a tio n or M atricu la tio n (X I class standard) or any o ther exam ination recognised as equ ivalen t th e re to by the B oard o f In te rm id ia te E ducation m ay be ad m itted in to the I I year of In te rm ed ia te C ourse.

(c) W here the B oard or U niversities do no t issue certificates to com partm enfally passed candidates the m in im um m arks req u ired fo r a pass in all the subjects of exam ination at one o r m ore sittings and the m arks ob ta ined by them in any subject a t the la test perfo rm ance only shall be taken in to co nsidera tion for purposes o f adm ission.

(d) In cases w here qualify ing exam inatiohs fo r w hich com part- inen tal pass certificates are issued by th e respective B oards o r U ni- Yersities the C om partm en ta l Pass C ertificates issued by such Boards o r U niversities shall be tak en in to considera tion ,

(e) The ru les o f e lig ib ility fo r com partm en tally Passed condidates o f the S.S.C ., O.S.S’.C., S .S .L .C ., o r >0.S.S.L.C. and M a tricu la tio n E xam ination of O sm ania U niversity , Sri V enkatesw ara U nive sity a re fu rn ished in A nnexure-V II for in fo rm ation and guidance.

(ii) C and idates w ho have passed the qualifying exam ination W ith G eneral M athem atics as one o f the subjects and who seek adm ission to In te rm ed ia te C ourse w ith M FC. group should secure 50% m arks in G en era l M athem atics. The samp percen tage shall be .follow ed in co rrespond ing subjects in o ther E xam inations recognised by th e B oard as equ ivalen t t c S.S.C. or H .S.C . etc.

iii) S tudents w ho have received in stru c tio n fo r tw o years sfiall n o t be re-adm itted to the Two Y ear In term ediate, C ourse unless vacancies still reruain a fte r all,J,he fresh cand idates are considered . Such re a d m iss io n ,can be .in to , the II year class provided th ere is no change o f subject under JPart I I and the change o f sub jec t o r subjects under P a r t II if desired, should be w ith in the .same facult^y i.e., w ithin H um anities or Science com binations b u t no t from t^e H um anities group to the Scince,group^pr V ipe-yersa. The afoove concession,shall b e availed o f by the candidates only once preferab ly in th e succee-

ding year, o f the appearance a t the Public E xam ination . In case w here there is a change o f subject under P a rt II o r the change of g roup subjects is under P a rt I I I from H um anities group to Science group or vice-versa he shall have to p u t in the prescribed a ttendance o f tw o years in a recognised college.

iv) A cand ida te a fte r passing the tw o-year In term edia te Exam in a tion desiring’to reappear fo r the sam e exam ination w ith subject or sub jects o ther th an those "with w hich he had already passed the exam i nation may be perm itted to reappear fo r the exam ination subject to the condition of p u ttin g in the prescribed a ttendance o f two years in a recognised college. H ow ever if a passed candidate desires to change the g roup w ith in the same facu lty i.e., w ith in H um anities or sciences as the case m ay be and reappear for the exam ination he may be p e rm itted to do so a fte r p u ttin g m the a ttendance in the new group only for one year in the Second year o f the In term edia te C ourse in a recognised college.

v) A dm issions 'to the Interm ediate. C ourse in the Evening Colleges shall be restric ted stric tly to em ployees only who^ canno t study the course as regu lar students.-.

vi) C and idates who com e from other States for adm ission to In te rm ed ia te C ovtse should fu rn ish a 'declatation to the effect th a t no d isciplinary action was taken lagainst them a t any tim e e ither by B oard or U niversity befo re I seeking adm ission to In term edia te Course in this S tate . -

vii) C andidates w ho had th e ir educational career in foreign countries should have passed X Class or X G rade either in house Exam ination or in Public E xam inations, as the system m ay be for the purpose o f adm ission to the In te rm ed ia te C ourse. Such adm ission shall be m ade only with the p rio r perm ission o f the Secre tary , B oard of In te rm ed ia te E ducation .

in. A T T E N D A N C E :

(a) (i) T here shall be an annual exam ination condducted by the Colleges a t the end o f first year course and a can d id a te ’s p rom otion to second year class depends on his’‘Satisfactory perform ance at th e exam inations held during the year, p rovided he pu ts in a tten d a nce o f no t less th an 75% in 'theory and 75% a ttendance a t p racticals held during the year. C andidates appearing fo r the In term ed ia te Public E xam ination in a recogniscd college m ust pu t in a ttendance

of no t less th an 75®' in theo ry and 75% a ttendance a t p rac tica ls fo which there w ill'be public exam ination du ring the second year of In term ediate Course.

But th e cand idates appearing fo r the In te rm ed ia te Pub lic Exam ination from M arch 1974 onw ards, shall pu t in a tten d an ce o f not less th a n 75% in T heory and 75% in .P ractica ls d u rin g the first and second years of the In te rm ed ia te C ourse tak en together, instead o f in each year separately .

(ii) Provided, in special cases the Board m ay, on th s r<*commen- dation o f th t p rincipal o f the T o litg e , con'don the deficiency in a tte n dance up to I'5% subject to 'th e paym ent o f p rescribed fees, for reasons of illhcahh due to prolonged Ti lnes s (supported by m edical certificate by R M P )o r H ue'io a ttendance a t N . C. C. cam ps o r Inter-U niversity or Jn ter-C fillegiate or In te r-S ta te m atches o r D ebates or Educational Excur.ions o r such o ther In ter-U niveisiiy oi In ter-C ollegiaie activities appm ycd by the au tho rities or„for any o ther val»d reason. The absence o f studen ts on account o f strikes w ill no t be recicofied as a valid reason for the g ran t o f condonation .

(iii) T he au thorities o f the B oard reserve the righ t o f rejecti'ng an app lica iion fo r condonation o f shortajge o» attcnoance in respect o f any cand idate or candidates wiiKoui assigning any' reasf^ns.

(iv) T he applications for cond o n atio n o f shortage o f a ttendance on behalf o f reg u 'a r studen ts w ho in tend to ap p ear for the puolic exa- m ira tio n .shoulo reach the Secretary, Board o f In term ediate Exam ination a tleast 30 days p rio r to the Hate o f the com m encem e''t o f the Public exam ination in the p re 'c rib ed proform a. A pplications received a fter due da te are 'ioble to be rejected sum m arily .

( b ) ( i ) I f a regular student leaves a college in the m iddle ®f an acadf^mic yea r^e ith e r first o r se^.ond year) and in tends to jo in another college, the a ttendance pu t in bv him in the form er college should be taken in to account for the a b jv e purpose, provid’cd perm ission for com bination o f a ttendance has been obtained from the B oaid. The P rincipal o f the form er coltepe shall send the a ttendance certificate to the college in w hich the studen t soug h t adm ission. The A ttendance certificate shall include the follow ing particu lars ;—•

1. A cadem ic year.2. The date on w hich the student left the college.3. N o. o f w orking days to th a t date.4. N o. o f days aftpnHpH

(ii) T he P rinc ipa l o f the college in which the s tuden t intends to join in the m iddle ot an academ ic year shall send the app lication for com bination o f attendance a long w ith the copy o f the T iansfer Certificate, a ttendance certificate issued by the P rincipal o f the form er college and the prescribed fee receipt. Pend ing receip t o f the orders for th e com bm ation c f a iteadance th e P rincipal o f a college may adm it provisionally a student from ano ther college in th e m iddle o f the academ ic year provided the cand ida te does no t change his/her subjects ot course o f study, pays the prescribed fees for com bination o f a ttendance and there is a seat availab le in the college in w hica he/she seeks adm ission. A lte r admit£»ng the cand idate th e p rincipal o f the College shall fo rw ard t'^ the b o ard the applicap 'on fo r com bination o f a ttendance o f such candielate a lo n g ^vith the chalan tow ards the p rescribed fees. I f th ere is no seat availab le in th e college, the_Principal shall no t adm it atiy such cand idate p rovisionally . P rio r perm ission o f the Board may have to be obcained^for such admission^.

(c) S tudents who have a lready appeared once for the public exam ination w j H be allow ed to appear fo r the'' subsequent exam inations W ithout a tten d in g a college. B ut studen ts w ho 'study the suolim entjrf course in a recognised college w ith change o f subjects either under P a rt II »'r F a it I I I o f the C ourse s la ll'have to p u t in the prescribed a ttendance (as clarified under Ruê I I (n i & iv ). Should how ever a suplim ental s tuden t who jo in s in the second year In te rm ed ia te course w ith the sam e sybjep^s in any collegq, has to w ithdraw subsequcnily for reasons considered satisfactory bv the headôf th e college, he may appear as a private candidate during tjif t acadam ic y«ar by subm itting along w ith bis application a certificate o f “ No ob jec tio n ” fiom the P rincipal o f th e college.

R egular students can appear for the tw o-year Ja te rm ed ia te exam ination for the -first tim e only wlien presented there a t by tê Prm cipal and m ust have undergone the course in a recognised college.

IV. PUBLIC EXAMINATION

A : General

(i) A t the end of^ the tw o-year In ferm td ia tp C ourse, a public E xam inatinn shall be conducted by the Board o f In term ediate Education. The Public E xam ination shall be conducted in the subjects m entioned under “ C9 urse o f S tudy” and o» Uve courcs o f both years o f study.

8-

(ii) T he Pub lic E xam ination shall be held a t such centres and or. such dates, as m ay, from tim e to tim e, be notified by the Secretary , B oard o f In te rm ed ia te E ducation . The last date for the sub mission o f ap p lica tions shall also be notified by th e Secretary . A pplications received a fte r the prescribed dates will no t be e n te r ta ined even w ith a penal fee.

(iii) A supplim cntal exam ination shall be held in Septem ber every year fo r the benefit o f the cand idates who are n o t successful a t the p receding M arch exam ination o r previous exam inations. R egu lar candidates, w ho fulfil all th e req u is ite cond itions such as a ttendance in T heory and P rac tica l classes e tc ., bu t could no t appear fo r the Public E xam ination fo r reasons beyond th e ir co n tro l m ay be p e rm itted to appear for the subsequent e ia ra in a tio n s as p riv a te cand idate on p ro d u c tio n o f a certificate from the P rincipal concerned to th a t effect. Such cand idates should pay th e exam ination fee w hether or not they have paid it p reviously .

(iv) Fees once p a id tow ards the exam ination by any cand idate cannot be refunded under any circum stances n o r can it be ad justed for subsequent exam ination

(v) A regu lar cand ida te applying fo r the exam ination piust have undergone the prescribed, c o u rs ^ o f study in a recognised college o f the S tate .

(vi) A cand idate applying fo r the exam ination on the first occasion shall pay the fee prfescrfhed fo r all the th ree p a rts o f the exam ination though he m ay n o t be able to sit for all the p a rts and th ereafter may appear fo r any p a r t or p a rts o f th e exam ination .

(vii) A candidate , who has been allow ed to appear a t the two- year In te rm ed ia te E xam ination once, b u t has n o t been able to appear or has failed to pass the exam ination , m ay be perm itted to appear for the sam e exam ination again w ithou t p u ttin g in any fu rth e r a tte n dance p rov ided th a t he does no t change the subject or subjects o rig inally selected by him ,

(viii) C andidates wh.o fail to pass the exam inati,on shall be p erm itted to appear a t subsequent exam ination eith,er fo r the whole exam ination or only in the p a r t o r p a rts in w hich they have failed.

(ix) O ut o f the th ree subjects in p a r t I l f , if a cand idate has passed in one or tw o subjects he m ay be perm itted , to appear in the

subject or subjects, in w hich he has failed o r in ai] th e th ree sub jec ts i f he so chooses.

(x) C and idates who have passed o r fa iled in the P.U C. exam in a tio n o f any U niversity w ith in A ndhra P radesh S ta te are eligible to ap p ear fo r the Two Y ear Ite rm ed ia te E xam ination w ithou t undergoing the prescribed course o f study in a recognised college o f the S ta te , a f te r ob ta in in g necessary o rders o f exem ption from p u ttin g in the req u ired a ttendance.

(xi) A can d id a te a fte r passing the w hole tw o years In te rm ed ia te E xam ination m ay be p e rm itted to reappear for the exam ina tion again as a p riva te can d id a te w ith the sam e subjects to im prove his qualifica tion . Such reap p earan ce shall be p e rm itted only fo r all sub jects u n d er any of th e 3 p a rts now -com prising the Public E xam in a tio n . T his concession is given only fo r tw o chances. The can d id a te canno t avail the chance fo r im provem ent while s tudy ing higher course o f study.

N o t e : Such reappearance does no t result in th e cancellationo f his p rev ious perform ance.

(xii) W hether the perfo rm ance o f a cand idate a t one s ittin g o r different sittings under the categories m entioned above shall be considered fo r purposes o f adm ission to h igher courses or no t depends upon th e ru les and regu lations fram ed by those concerned a u th o rities.

B . F E E S ‘

T he fees for adm ission to the exam ination or re-exam ination in respect o f regu lar and p riv a te cand idates shall be as follows.

C and idates appearing fo r the first tim e should pay the fees for the en tire exam ination .

I . R E G U L A R C A N D I D A T E S :

A — E x a m i n a t i o n F e e s : ,

10

(o) W hole exam ination (Sciences) Rs. 50/-

(A) W hole exam ination (H um anities) Rs. 50/-

(c) P a rt I Rs. 25 /-

('/) P a r t II Rs: 25 /-

(e) P a rt I I I Rs. 351-

I I

(/) P a rt I & II Rs. 40)-

(g) P a rt 111 w ith P a rt I or P a rt 11 Rs, 45 /-

B — P e n a l F e e s :

(F o r the la te ap p lica tions w ith in a prescribed tim e)

(o) F o r th e first 10 days a fte r th e due dale Rs. 10/-

(b) F o r the next 16 days Rs. 25 /-

C—O t h e r F e e s :

(«) Fees for R ecognition o f qualify ing exa- m in au o n fo r adm ission.

Rs. 6/-

Fee fo r co m b in a tio n of a tt tn d a n e e Rs. 61-

ic) Fee for change o f g roup . Rs. 251-

id) Fee fo r g ran tin g condonation o f shortage in a ttendance.

i) Shortage no t Exceeding 10 days Rs. 50/-

ii) S hortage n o t exceeding 15 days Rs. 75/-

iiii) S hortage o f m ore th an 15 days (only up to 40% o f th e to ta l

* N o . o f w orking days) Rs. 100/-

(e) Fee fo r change o f 2nd language and also fo r p riv a te study: Rs. 25/-

(f) Fee fo r change o f m edium . Rs. 25/-

(e) Fee fo r perm ission to study one o f the g roup subjects under P a r t - I l l ; Rs. 25/.

II . P r i v a t e C a n d i d a t e s :

(a) E xam ination Fees : Sam e ra tes as for reg u lar candidates.

(fe) Penal Fees : Sam e ra tes as fo r regular candidates.

I(c) Fee fo r exem ption o f a tten d an ce to p r i

vate candidates.

(rf) L ate fee fo r belated app lica tions for exem ption from a ttendance :

i) F irs t 10 daysii) N ex t 21 days

iii) N ex t 30 days

Rs. 100^

Rs. 51- Rs. 10/Rs. 35/-

I I I . M i s c e l l a n e o u s F e e s C o m m o n t o a l l :

12

(«) Fee fo r M ig ra tion C ertifica te Rs. 1 5 / '

ib) Fee fo r th e issue o f m em orandum o f M arks (In add ition to the prescribed exam ination fee) Rs. 5 /-

(<;) Fee for th e issue of Provisional C ertificate. Rs. 5 h

id) Fee fo r th e isstje o f D u p lica te hall ticket Rs. 5 /-

ie) Fee for the issue o f D uplica te C ertifica te Rs. 15/-

i f ) Fee fo r checking the to ta lling o f m arks fo r each subject. Rs. 20 /-

C. SCH EM ES O F E X A M IN A T IO N

^a) S c i e n c e s

PA R T Su b j e c t t o t a l m a r k s

L E nglish 200IL Second L anguage 150

I I I , Two Subjects (each subject 200m arks including p rac tica ls w herever p rescribed ) 400

T o ta l 750

(b} H n m a n i t i e ^

PART SUBJECT TOTAL MARKS

I. E nglish 200IL Second L anguage 150

111. T hree Subjects {each subject 150 m ark sincluding p rae tica ls w herever p rescribed) 450

Total 800

H Sastras & Veda'S

I . English 200

J l . Second Language 150

i l l . Six p ap ers either in Sastras or ifiV edas, e ach paper ■oarryiag 75 m arks 450

13

T o ta l '800

No1v : 1. D eta ils o f the Schem e of exam ina tion except of Sastras■and V edas are g iven in A nnexure I

2 . D etails o f the Schem e o f exam ination in Sastras & Vedas ar€ g ivea in A nnexure I I

V . A d m i s s i o n o f P r i v a t e c a n d i d a t e s i

A ppetirance of P riv a te ■ca’ndidates fo r th e InteTKiediate Pub lic tx a ta in M it)ti ’shall be go’verned b y the regulatrons p rescribed by the teoard o f In tem ied ia t« E ducation ,

V I . A \V a T d o f C e r t i f i c a t e s i

(A) T o "whora a m r d e d '

1 T h e certificate rflay be aw arded to the candidates w ho have undergone tfie p rescribed courSe •of In 'fenned iate in a recognised co llege -altd appeared fo r the Int'erin 'ediate P u b lic E xam ination cond u c ted b y th e B oard In le rm ed ia te E d u ca tio n and passed.

TlVe p riv a te cand idates wht) appeared fo r the In te rm ed ia te p u b lic ■examination as per p rescribed re;gulations a&d'passed-

(B) By Avhom aw arded

The In te rm ed ia te Certi'ficate ishall be a'Warded by the S ecre tary , B oard o f In terinfid iate E d tication .

A c a n d id a te a fte r he/she h as been declared successful in the public exam ination shall be g iven a ce rtifica te by the B oard setting fo rth the y ^ r o f the deam ination , the -subjects in w hich he/she wds exam ined an d the division in Which he/she was placed.

(C) Eligibility ^A cand idate shall be declered lo have passed the In term ed ia te

E xam ination if he ob tains no t less th an 35% o f m arks ia each subject

under Parts I, II & I II o f the Public Exam ination provided th a t no candidate shall be declared to have passed the exam ination in P art I I I unless he also ob tains a m inim um of 30% raarks in theory and 30% of m arks in p rac tica l exam ination in subjects w here a p rac tica l exam ination is held. A ll o ther candidates shall be deem ed to have failed in the exam ination.

(D ) D ivisions :

C and idates who pass in all the th ree p a rts a t one and the sam e a ttem p t shall be a rranged in th ree D ivisions as s ta ted h ereunder :

F irst D ivision 60% and above m arks on the aggregate.

Second D iv ision M arks below 60% and no t less th an 50% on the aggregate.

T h ird D ivision M arks below 50% and n o t less th an 35% on aggregate.

V I I ‘ P r i n c i p l e s o f P r o m o t i o n f r o m F i r s t y e a r t o S e c o n d y e a r

An annual exam ination has to be conducted a t the end o f first year In te rm id ia te C ourse and th e resu lts tab u la ted in a R egister. The follow ing in structions a re to be scrupulously follow ed for p u rposes of p rom otion o f students from first year to Second year In te r m ediate Course.

]., The Students should have secured no t less than 20“’;, o f m arks in each^subject a t th e annual exam ination or re-exam in^tion . if any, conducted by the college, for, getting p ro m o tio n to th e Second year.

2. W here a s tuden t fails to get the m inim um o f 20% m arks in each subject a t th e annual exam ination /re exam ination , his p erfo rm ance a t the class and term inal exam inations also m ay be taken into acco u n t and if th e average satisfied th e m inim um 20% rule, he/she m ay be prom oted .

3. I f still th e re are cases no t qualified fo r p ro m o tio n under the above provisions, th e S taff Council o f the C ollege m ay consider each case on its own m erits and if the S taff C ouncil feels th a t the unsatisfac to ry perfo rm ance o f a s tu d en t was due to genuine reasons, he/she m ay be p ro m o ted w ith a w arning,

4. Those w ho have no t a ttended the annual or re-exam inationsexcept fo r genuine reasons considered sa tisfac to ry by the staff councilo f th e college; need no t be considered fo r p ro m o tio n to the Second year.

14

15

V III S c a le o f p u n i s h m e n t t o b e a w a r d e d t o t h e C a n d i d a t e s r e s o r t e d t o M a l p r a c t i c e s .

S. No. I.

Offence2.

]. C and idate who has in his possession p rin ted books, notes o r m anuscrip ts bearing on the subject o f the exam ination but w ho volu n ta rily su rrenders them w ithou t being detec ted by the Superin tendent.

2. A cand idate who is discovered by the S uperin ten d en t to be in possession o f p rin ted books, no tes or m anuscrip ts and the candida te m ade use o f the fo rb idden m ateria l.

3. A cand idate detec ted copying from an o th e r cand ida te or tak ing help from any in the exam ination hall o r from outside.

4. C and idate or his asiocia- tcs influencing the exam iner.

5. Im personation cases.

Scale o f Punishm ent3.

W arning by the C h ief S uperin tendent. If th ere is repe tition of th is in the Some session o f the .same exam ination , the cand ida te m ay b'e expelled affer ab ta in ing an on the spot explanation to a show cause notice. Subsequent papers may still be answ ered. The facts should be rep o rted to the S ecretary , B oard o f In te rm ed ia te E ducation, A. P. H yderabad .

“ Expulsion a fte r ob ta in ing an on the spot exp lanation to a show cause no tice. Subsequent papers may still be aiiswe ed. The scrip ts and ob jectionab le m a tte r should be sent to S .'cretary , B oard of In te rm ed ia te E ducation , A. P ., H yderabad- C ancella tion o f perform ance a t the' exam ination and debarm ent fo r o.ie year i. e ., two subsequent exam ina. na tions ” .

E xplusion a fte r ob ta in ing an on the spo t exp lana tion to a show cause n ^ ’.ice. Subsequent papers m ay s.ill he answ ered. C ancella tion o f p erfo rm ance at th e exam ination and de.)arm en; fo r one year i. e., two subsequent exam inations.

C ancellation perform ance a t the exam ination and debarring for two subsequent exam inations.

C ancellation of perform ance at the exam ination and aeb arrin g perm anently.

16

6. Substitu tion o f a d- s w e r books.

CanceH ation o f perform ance at th e exam ination and debarring up to a p eriod o f five years i.e., ten subsequen t exam inations.

7. C and idates w riting objectionab le , abusive o i offensive language, o r letters to th e exam iners requestin g them to aw ard pass m arks etc,

8. M isbehaviour o f the cand idate tow ards inv ig ila ting staff o f the exam ination cen tre including assault on the invigilating staff e ither in the exam ination hall o r ou tside the cen tre .

C ancella tion o f perform ance a t th e exam ination or the particu lar exam in a tio n .

C ancellation of perfoim ance a» the exam ination and debarring the cand idate for specific period or pern jan- en tly ,

9. A candidate or his associates infliuencing the officers

' o f the Board o f In term ed- ate E ducation.

10. In sertion o f answers in the answ er books by the candidates or by his associate either a t the cea tre or a t a higher level.

U . T aking away the answer books or leavm g the exam ination hall w ithout handing over the answ er books to thfe invigilator w hether re turned subsequently or no t.

12. Sending ou t the question paper.

C ancellation o f perform ance a t the exam ination and debarring tw o subsequent exam inations.

C ancella tion of perform ance al the 'exam ination and debarm ent u p to a period o f five years i. e., 10 subs- quent exam inations.

C ancellation o f perform ance in th e exam ination besides debarm ent for the 'subsequen t exam ination .

C ancellation o f perform ance at tbe exam ination and debarm ent u p to a period o f th ree years i.e„ 6 subsequ- n t exam inations.

i3 Refusal to offer an on tbespo t explanation to tne invigilator or C h ief Super- rin tendent.

14. C opying defected on t>ie besis o f in te rna l evidence such asa) during valuation, or'b) during special scrutiny.

15. Exchange or change o f Roll Nos. o n ’the 'answ er scripts w ith a view to give o r take help or change o f answ er books w ith ano ther exam inee.

16. W riting nam es, in tials, o ther m arks o f identification on outside or in side the answ er scrip t and noting the Roll N os. on the add itional answ er books.

17. T hrow ing o f question paper after w riting the answers on it, to the o ther cand idate .

C ancella tion o f perform ance at the eaAramation besides debarring !or the subsequent exam ination .

17

^Cancellation o f perform ance besides debarring for tw o subsequent exam inations.

C ancellation o f peform ance besides debarring the cand idate fo r a m axim um period o f five je a rs i.e., 10 subsequent exam inations.

A w arning «r cancellation o f perform ance i f necessary, a fter ab tain - ing the exp lanation o f the candidate depend ing on the circum stances.

C ancellation o f perform ance.

jt

N ote 1.. O ther iiem j. i f any, th a t are not c w ered in the a 'love ’ categories, shall be oecided by ihc Sccretaiy, Board o f

In term ediate E ducation as be-detnis h t on the nneriis o f each ind iv idual case,

t •• 2. The Secretary, Board o f In te rm ed ia te E ducation is em

pow ered to aw ard punishm ents in ail cases o f m alpracties except those for which the’ C hief S’u pcrin tenden t o f the E xam ination centre is com petent.

3. The V ice-C hairm an, Board o f Int'jrm edlHte E ducation is the appella te au th o rity over the decisions o f the Secretary, in a ll ca«cs.

S U B S I D I A R Y R E G U L A T I O N Sf

1 . A C A D E M I C Y E A R

A cadem ic ye'^r is the p»n'od ccm m erciV g on the first day f>f Ju ly o f an year and ending w ith 30th day o f June o f the succ ’ edmg year o r in the case o f any Junior Colleges or affiliated college's in which ifid clarses are started 'on a tla te other- th an the first day o f J u l /w i th the previ'nus sanction o f the Directoi^jof- H igher E ducation , the year com m encing on such d^te and ending w ith 12'jn -nths from such date .

2. S E M E S T E R S :

y ' } i iThe College shall have 3^sem e^ers as given below r

F irst Sem ester T iis t Ju ly to ,30 th Sec'tem ber o't th e acadcm sc ' ! £> * ■»

. i , .Second Sem ester ;— F trs t O ctober to 3 Ist Dcce^(w_f^ o f the

academ ic year,

4 Thirds Seinesfter FirSt Ja'iiuary to "the closing d a te of" th e . Cotiege?-!- '

N o te : t> u ritio n o f th e Sem esters shaff be prescribed by the D irec to r in case o f the at:aaem iic'year is also changed by h im -

3. W O R K I N G I> A Y S O F T H E C O L L E G E :/

E ach C ollege recognised by the B oard should w ork a t least fo r ISO days in’ an academ ic ye'ar excluding all exam ination days. T he exam ination days shall includc the days-6n w hich tTie m onthly^ th e te rm in a l, the annua) and .the B oard exam inations a re held.

4. W O R K I N G H O U R S O F T H E C O L L E G E j

Tfhere shall 6 w ork ing days'in. a weSk w ith 6 periods' a day o f 50 ^nin;jtes d u ra tio n each and the college shall have th e classes bet- w,een 10--00 A .M , ’& 4^00 P .M . . . .

The college w orking on shift system should also have preriods o f 50 n iinu tes each. T)ie gap betw een '^hifts should be 'lO m inu tes only ,

b ’l S T f t l B U T I O N O F T E A C H I N G JP P R IO IX $ . '

Subjec( '' 'N o . o f periods per week in the Jfir^J and second yeg.»>. ,

'Second Longuage t i 'a r t II) 6

1?

Optiona^ s u b je c ts '! '& I Iunder Sciences 8 periods cach subject.

O ptional Subjicj-s 1, I I & H I , i iunder H um anities ' " ^6 ^^eriods eagli sub jcct e x c e p t

“ M athem atics, G eography andH om e Science fo r Which 8 periods a r t a llo tted . ' *

Sports & G am es, E x tra 2 '{To be utilised'^fo'r Sciences', ^c u rric u la r activities H om e ScieniS and Geograpfvy

w jierever neqesjary^

6. W O R K L O A D O F T E A C H E R S *' ' -

T he w ork load o f teach ing sta ff shall consist o f 18 periods o f teach ing , p rac tica ls , etc; and 3 hdurs o f C o rrec tfo n worlc. ,

7 . M E D I U M O F I N S T R U C T I O N :

The m edium of in n ru c tio ti for tw o-year In te rm ed ia te C ourse shall be T elugu excepf w here spep.iftc -perrnissiort 'js* 'grinteJd by CovernvTient to have some sectjo.ns iivm edja^other'thA n T e lu g u .’. » -i! ‘ '7. ■'(a) “ Such pf thosp students who have studied^ jn .ptUer m ed iaand w ish 'to cTiange m edium in to E n ^ ish a t In te rm ed ia te level m ay do so provided they secure not less than 40'’/. >n E;iglish a t the qualifying E xam ination . A concession of 5% m arks should be given to tlie pandidates belonging to Scheduled Castes and SchediHe'd Tribes-. U nder no circum stances can a s tuden t obtai.ning, less than 40'yo''in English be ad n n tted in to English medi)jm section o f Jn term edia td ’ Course.

8. G r a n t C d n d o n a t io n f o r s h o r t a g e in a t ; te i id a n c c :

S tudents who fail t o ‘put in the* phescribed a ttendance should apply fo r condonation o f sh o rtag e o f aYtcndance th ro u g h the P rin c ipal to the B oard. P rincipals o f Colleges should follow the ipstruc- tions'-given below scrupulously for jforwarding the app lications ofsuch cand idates. ■' '

I ' r '(i) A pp lication fo r condonation o f shortage in a ttendance

should be in the prescu*Lb?d profota"tfai(AnneXurrf fllj* ^ ’

( ip P rescribed (ee Ijas to ,b e paid . and. the receip t cn tlos^d to tho application.

(iii) T he reasons fo r llie shortage in a ttendance should be c learly sta ted in CoL N o. 5 of the app lica tio i.

(_iv) In case o f ill-health due to pro longed illness m edical coTtifi- ca te issued by a R egistered M edical P rac titio n e r should be enclosed.1 i '

(v) In case sjiortage is due to p a rtic ip a tio n in N .C .C . camps or In te r-U n iversity or-^Inrer-Collegiate or In te r-S ta te m atches or debates or educational excursions or such o th e r activ ities approved by the au th o ritie s , ,the P rincipal should clearly certify the facts

(vi) I f the shortage is due to o ther adm in istra tive reasons such as la te adm issions under special circum stances, etC ;T the P rincipal should clearly sta te the details.

I(vii) The a ttendance pu t in by a student in a college before his

adm ission into the p resen t college in academ ic year should also be taken in to account in counting^ th f ,sh o rta g e .provided or'derS foV the com bination o f a tten d an ce are ob tained .

/v ii i) T he P rincipal should no t send any proposals fo r condo* n a tion o f shortage in a ttendance to studen ts vt’ho have not pu t in a t least 60% a ttendance to th e B oard for consideration and they should n o t perm it such candidates to appear fo r the P ub lic Examiiiiation.

t

(ix) W here cand idates have not pu t in a tleast 60% attendance a t th e tim e o f applying fo r condonation o f shortage in a ttendance bu t are likely to m ake up the deficieney before the com m encem ent o f th e Pub lic E xam ination the ir cases m ay be considered by’'th e P rincipals fo r recom m ending to the B oard for g ran t o f condonation after ob tain ing from them a specific u n d ertak in g in w riting th a t they w ould m ake up the deficiency in a ttendance before t-he com m encem ent o f the Public E xam ination and th a t they also agree for th e w ithholding of their H all T ickets for the Public E xam ination in case they are unable to jn ak e u p the deficiency in a ttendance.

(x) The au tho rities .reserve the righ t o f re jecting an app lica tion fo r condonation o f shortage o f a ttendance in respect o f any s tuden t or students w ithou t assigning any reasons th e re fo r.

9. C O M B IN A T IO N OF A T T E N D A N C E :

I f a studen t seeks-adm ission in to the first year or second year o f th e In te rm ed ia te C ourse on T ransfer C ertificate in the m iddle o f an

20

academ ic year, the P rincipal o f tlie concerjjed college sjiaH a d /n it h 'm provisionally and perm it him to a tfend the classes subject to ^ lje grant o f com b’n a tion o f a ttendance by the Bpard ,and also subject to the availab ility of seats and subject to the usual rules o f adm ission. ]n case there a re no seats in a 'p a r tic u la r com bination , p rio r sanction of an additiori<il seat o r sfi;ats should bci^obtuined from the ,^.ofird before ad m ittin g the students. W hile .ad q iittin g the studen ts on T ransfer C ertificate, change of cQ ijibipatipa under P art III ,shall nQt be allowed. A fter ad m itting such candidates, the P rincipals should ob tain the a tjendapce particu lar^ o n 'b e lja lf o f such.^'u5i£Ai5 from the Principals o f the previous colleges and fo rw ard such cas6^ to the B oard/or* g ran t o f co m b in a tio n .o f attenda-nccjtogfcthec w ith a .rece ip t o f rre sc rib ed fee. ■

lo . IS S U E O F T R A N S F E R C E R T I F I C A T E :' I' .

S tudents adm itted to the tw o-year In te rm ed ia te ' C ourse whd choosfe to leave the college during* th^ cou'rse should request* the p rincipal in w riting for the issue o f T ran sfe r"C ert’ftcate sta tin g the reasons therefo r. The P rincipal a fte r satisfy ing him self ab o u t the dues position , etc., o f the studerft should issue T ransfer C ertificate to the s tuden t in 'th e form prescribed by educational au th o ritie s of the State. All the colum ns o f the T ransfer C ertificates should 'be filled in before issue. P a rticu la r m ention should be m ade abou t the students elig ib ility fo r prom otiofi tb th e ‘ next'highW '^cIass. A tte n dance certificate of the studen t d u rin g ,th e year may_ also be issued along w ith the T ransfer C ertificate, A ttendance (ig rtificate shou ld con tain the num ber of w orking days of the college till thV date of issue o f T ransfer C ertificate and the“num ber o f 'd ay s 'a tten d ed by*the studen t.

l o (A ) A D M I S S I O N O N T R A N S F E R C E R T I F I C A T E S :

(i) C and idate who had to leave one college cfuring the aca'demicyear or afrer 'com pletion o f the Ju n io r In te rm ed ia te C ourse and who wish to seek adm ission on T . C. can be adm itted by the Principal w ithout referring to the B oard subject to the condition th a t the can d idate is otherw ise eligible fo r adm ission to In te rm ed ia te Course and also subject to availability o f seats. ^

(ii) As per the regulations o f the. Two Y ear In te rm ed ia te Courseth ere is no need to condone .the b reak in continu.ity o f studies o fstudents for adm ission (either I year or II year of the In term ed ia te

C S^rscj. C a 'n ii'(fê s’"fiavi'ng "’any b reak o f studies m ay therefo re be id im tte d to 'th e cbuVs^ prov ided tb e^ are otherw ise eligible Tor adm ission accord ing to hi'C R.uies'Em.d"Regu[Jitioas’o f the ‘Two Y e a r 'in te r -inle'diate C ours^, ' * '

r , ' / I I

' T he form preScrib'^d th e Goverrimei^f v/de A m iexure' N o , 'V lllr sh o tld "Be used while^ issuing T! Cs. to the s tu den t,6 n ly ‘p rih ted .copies o f th e from ^fiould be 'used, ‘I « f ‘ ii'j.11. c h a n g e ; o f i A isJGUAGE U P to iH ^ P A R t II :J, J 1 ‘ 'jq ’v,TIie cho icex)f language under P a r t- I I in 'Jn term edfa te C oarse td b o th R egular and P rivate cand idates is left lo th e caiid idates .irrespective o f the language stud ied a t th e qualifying exam m atio ii,

: 3 T / , P " -i j '^ I . IC and idates siiould choose the language to be studied u n d er

f |a r t- I I , b^fore^the end o f Jhe 1st,year Ir^terinediate C o u r^ an^ any c |iange in .the language chosen under P a r t r l l .shall,be perm itted^by th ^ P rin d p a lfin th e ^rijd y ja r o f |h e Intei-m ediate Course before the end o f the te rm o f th a t y p r only, fo r v^hicli a fee o f Rs. :25/- shoultl be collected from each o f th e studciits and rem itted to the cu rren t accoun t o f the S ecretary , B oard o f Ii^ tennediate E duca(ion ,A .P ., H yderab ad and sent the challan to' the B oard w ith the deta ils o feach x ;ase .tJ 1 » , /

12. C H A N G E ,.O F C O J^^lN A T^pN ^, U N D E R P A R T IH

j A. T|a,e followi/ig procedure sKoufd be followed ^by the Principals 9f the colleges fo r th e cfiange o f apjiôved com bination o f a student undej.-. Pftrt Ul, o f the In term ed ia te Course, ^

(I) T he principal o f a recognised college is vested w ith th e discretionery pow er to perm it a s tudent to change his com bination under -fâjt I I I &t h is own fisk fill ( l/P ia S t date of th e ftfst' semesteV subject to the availability o f sea t and the usual rules o f admission.

(ii) Beyond the last date o f t h i first s 'm este r, such) perm ission shalV b e 'g rin ted by the Secretary, ô a rd o f In te rm ed ia te E ducation upto O ctobei' lStH on application by the studenf-and on the recom - inendatibii o f the Princ?pal o f th e college.' In all such cases, the Principal shall specifically sta te the avaiiability o P a 'sea t' ni the p roposed com bination and also enclose a receipt fo r ti.e prescribed fee. The Principal should no t accepK applications f ro m 'th t students fo r change o f con lb ination u n d e p 'P a r : lU beVond ISth O ctober. The

22

sludcnts a re to >56 i.vforme^d in sxicli d rcxunslances th a t they shall riol be en titled to any condonation o f shortage rn a tten d an ce or a 'ny 'o thef priviJeges such as 'exemptJon f io m the study o f the etc.

K Penrn’iss'ion m ay be g ran ted by-the* Secretary o f the ' B oard-to th e nebular ca’ndidat€S to study p riv a te ly any one sub jec t' o f the approver! cotnbiTiations in H um anities w here th ere are n o practicals on d er-P a rt I I I o f th e course a tid ap p ear fo r the Public E xam ination p rov ided the college to w hich h e h '^ Yiiigrated’ has no provision for ihstrxiction in tlie sub jec t w h ich 'h e w as previously studjîng, A. fee of R s, 2 5 /- shall a-ocompany every suchr applicati<6n. '

C ' ‘Principals o f the colleges should screen Ihe applications received fo r change cif growp su b jec ti 'with reference to the rules .prescribed a n d fo rw ard to th e Boatxi xuch o f the applicatibns 9f th e candidates^ w ho a re ‘en titled fo r pern i'ss io n to change the group, ApplicatioTis’fo rw ard ed ’h y th e P rincipals \jphich' do n o t 'sa tisfy 'thd ru les jiesCTihed shall be rq e c te d und in' all such cases 40% o f the^ fees, prescribe'd fo r change of groxfp subjects, sh a ll'b e 'deducteid and "the i'est shall be-r'efunded by the B oard,

n . MEDICAL INSPECTION:

23

<

'T he Principals o f the-'coliegefs have to a rran g e fo r th e conduct o f m edical inspection fo r 't lfe students of* tn’te rm ed ia te course before ^hey a re sent fo r th e Pablic E x a m in a t io n ,M e d ic a l inspection fo rm i in the prescribed p ro fo rm a (A nnexure IV) m ay be got ;?rinted ou t of |l je Qu^î jpubjicjfuad-pQ llectei a t'th e itim b ^ o f ad!kissi(*i-¥or»th6 pur- |Dos^ ^The^j*rinc'i|>al should ap p p ^n ^^n p raa lly only^-loca!. R egistered jvieoical P rac titio n ers fo r th e p u rjo ^ e of_. M edical ipspej:tioij.___Lady D o cto rs have f'ci be a'ppoint'ed in case o i v?omen condidates. T he p p 9to rs so appoipl^^c} sâU be paid hÛ 'Jrarium o f 50 paise per each can'didate fo r the first inspection ap.d a t t h e / a t e .o f -25 p aise ,per leach subse/qiieni' iuspeclioh,'’

>4. P » « s e i i la l io ] i o f R e g u l a f a il'd P f i v a t e p a n d id a t e s ^ f o r ‘t h e P u b l i c - E x a m in a t io n t

T h e applications alsrig V ith th e nominal^ roU^ ,\fl th e .p te^^p b e d p ro fo rm a should be accom panied by the Tee receiptSvThe fee will no t u nder any. circum sances'fe'^^-efunded. The principals should there* fqrj?tt-ake p a rticu la r ^care fo see th a t the call'di'ciates preifented are eligibleiO fappeai* fo r HheOycamijaatjoB, ^

To present a s tu d en t,fo r the public exai.iination will be regarded as a d ec la ra tion on the p a r t of the principal th a t in his opinion the student, by the end o f the course, wili have com pleted sa tisfacto rily the 'course^of study and fullfilled o th e r cond itions viz. a tten d an ce , p rac tica ls etc.

A notification will be issued to all the Principals calling for subm ission o f app lications f r o ^ the R egular and P riv a te cand idates every year du ring the M ontji? o,f O ct./N ov . ind ica ting the detailso f last dates for receip t o f app lication w'ith and wijjl^f-''

- ' '5 '•dfate C oarse tbA sim ilar no tification will 5e ';ipued t6 ■iji cff’ng

June/Ju jy p e r y year fo r subm issiop o f applicatio rti)^V ti'^pect ■pf Ex and P riv a te cand idates ap p ean n g at the supplem ental exan^inatjop to be held in S ept./O ct. The applications along w ith th e , nom inal rolls in th e p rescribed p ro fo rm a should be accoJnp^^nied by the fe e receipts.- The fee will n o t,u n d e r any circuttistancps be refunded . The principals should th e re fo re take p a rticu la r care to see th a t th e candidates presen ted a re eligible to ap p ear fo r the .exam ination .

To present a studen t fo r the public exam ination will be regarded as a d eclara tion on th e p a r t o f the p rincipal th a t in his op in ion the stu d en t, by th e end o f the course, will have com pleted sa tisfac to rily the course o f study and fulfilled o th e r cond itions viz., .a ttendance, p rac tica ls etc. -

15 . D u e d a t e s f o r s u b m i s s i o n o f A p p l i c a t i o n f o r m s f o r

E x e m p t i o n o f a t t e n d a n c e b y P r i v a t e C a n d i d a t e s w it jv o u t

a n y P r e v i o u s s t u d y i n a 'R e c o g n is e d C o l le g e .

The follow ing shall be the due dates fo r 'su b m ittin g tjie '^pp l ca

tio n form s f o r exem ption < f a ttendance by p riv a te car>flid^teSj|vithout any pervious study in a recognised college.

. J , Jt T » 'M a r c h S e s s io n o f E x a m i n a t i o n :

D ue da te w ith o u t penal fee 10th A ugust (P receding)' D ue date w ith 'p e n ^ rfe e ': ' .

V ‘f, ■„- j o f R s., 5 /-, _ •> 20th A ugust (Preceding)'

(b) o f R ^ . ,1 0 / - 10th Septem ber (Precediflg)' (c) o f Rs'. 35 /- . , Ip th O ctober'(P reced ing ) '•

24

S e p t e m b e r S e s s io n o f E x a m i n a t i o n :

D ue date w ithou t penal fee lOih F eb ruary (Preceding)D ue dates w ith penel fees :

(a) o f Rs. 5/“ 20th F eb ruary (Preceding)(b) o f Rs 10/- 13th M arch (Preceding)(c)^ o f Rs. 3 5 /- 13th A pril (Preceding)

i6 . A d m is s io D . o f P r i v a t e C a n d i d a t e s - w ith o u t ' P r e v i o u s S t u d y i n a R e c o g n is e d C o l l e g e f o r t h e P u b l i c E x a m in a -

A. , V in g categories o f persons arc eligible to appearfor th e InYj’ '^ a fa te Public E xam ina tion as p rivate cand idates w ith out" College study. ^

(a) W om en cand idates o f A ndhra Pradesh.

(b) S tuden ts o f A ndhra P radesh who have passed the qualifying exam ination and w ho are denied adm ission in colleges o f the State to prosecute the ir fu r th e r studies.

(c) A dults (M ales) w ho have com pleted 17 years o f age on the 1st o f th e m o n th (i. e. M arch o r Septem ber) in w hich th e exam ination is conducted .

(d) Failed candidates of H. S. and M PSLC (M ultipurpose) Pub lic .E xam ination C onducted by the, Board o f Secondary Educu- tion , A. P.

(e) Passed, Failed or d iscontinued cand idates o f P. U. C conducted by th e U niversities in th e S tate .

C o n d i t io n s t o b e f u l f i l l e d :

C a t e g o r y (a) a b o v e :

(1) They should have passed the ^lulifying exam ination or itsequivalent exam ination recognised by the B oard for adm ission into Two Y ear In te rm ed ia te C ourse. '

(2) T hey should be natives "of the S ta te o f A ndhra P jadesh.

(3) T here should be a ^ a p o f two academ ic years after passing the ir qualifying exam ination.

25

(4) They should obtain order? ro f exem ption from pu ttin g in necessary a ttendance in a recognised college froni the Board on paym ent o f the prescribed fee therefor.

C a t e g o r y (b ) a b o v e ;

(1) They should have passed the quaj'fyi^lg exam ination or itsequivalent exam ination recognised by the B oard fo r adm ission into Two Y ear In term ejiia te Course. • ••

(2) They should be natives of A ndhra Pradesh.

(3) They should p roduce a certificate from the- P rincipal of a recognised college in the S ta te th a t they co^ld nq t be given adm ission to the In te rm ed ia te C ourse in th a t college though ,they reg istered their applications in tim e fo r adm ission to the course.

(4) T here should be a gap of tw o academ ic years after passing their qualify ing exam insition.

(5) They should o b ta in o rders o f exem ption from p u ttin g innecessary attendance in a recoganised college from the Board on paym ent o f th e prescribed fee therefo r. - '

C a t e g o r y (c) a b o v e ;

(1) They should haye passed the qualify ing exam ination o r its equivalent exam jnap'on recognised by the board fo r ailm ission ifa to Tw o Y ear In te rm ed ia te C ourse.

(2) They should be natives o f the S tate o f A ndhra P radesh

(3) T here should be a gap o f two academ ic years a fte r passirg the ir qualify ing exam ination .

(4) They should ob ta in orders o f exem ption -froiri p u ttin g inn ecessary . a ttendance in a recognised college from th e B oard on paym ent o f th e prescribed fee th e re fo r. "

C a t e g o r y (d ) a b o v e s

(1) They s^j,quld have appeared fo r the H . S. & S. L. C , Public E xam ination (A ndhra o r T e lan g asa areas) conducted by the B oard o f S eco n d ary E ducation , A. P ., H ydera \jad in "Ivlarch 1973 o r e a rlie r and failed m it.

26

(2) They should be natives o f S tate o f A ndhra Pradesh.

(3) T hey should o b ta in orders o f exem ption from p u ttin g in necessary a ttendance in a recognised college from the B oard on paym ent o f the prescrijped fee therefo r.

C a t e g o r y (e) a b o v e :

(1) They should have passed the qualify ing exam ination o f its equivalent exam ination recognised l?y the B oard for adm ission into Two Y ear In te rm ed ia te Course.

(2) They should be natives o f A ndhra Pradesh.

(3) T here should be a gap o f two academ ic years a fte r fiassing the^qualifying exam ination.

(4) They should ob ta in o rders o f exem ption from pu tting in thenecessary a ttendance in a recognised college from the Board on paym efit o f prescribed fee therefo r.

N o te : 1. In ca?e of all catego;-its o f P riyate cand idates sefckingadm issipn to the In te riped ia te Public Exam indtion after passing a qualifying exam ination which ihake? fhem pj.igibje fq r Adm ission tQ the Sefcond year of In term edia te C ourse the gap period shall be only one year.

2. C and idates appearing fo r the Intc/m edialjc PyblicE xam ination by p rivate stydy m ay appear in any o f theapproved com hinations in H um anities or Scierices under P a r t I I I . C andidates choosing the subjects having prac tica ls have to undergo a course o f p ractieals in the respective subjects a t College or C olleger J»ermitted -by the B oard and produce a certificate o f sa tisfac to ry com pletion o f such course.

B . P r o c « ( ^ r e fo ;r .s n l;m j$ s io n p f a p p l i c a t i o n fo r jo is b y th e

p r | v a t « caxi4 i< ?» tes a n y p r e v i o u s s t u d y I n ar e c o g n i s e d C o l le g e . ^

C andidates who i n t ^ d to appear fo r^ th e Two^y^^ar In te rm ed ia te E xam ination should subm it tli^ ir ap ^H ca tio p | in the prescribed form th ro u g h the P rincipal o f a recognised college presenting candidates fo r th e ^ i d exam ination along w ith thq £ollDwin.g docum ents.

•21

(a) E xam ination fee receip t.

(b) O rig inal exem ption o rd er issued by the Board

G. A d m i s s i o n s o f p r i v a t e c a n d i d a t e s w h o h a v e s t u d i e d t h ec o u r s e o n c e a n d w h o w i s h t o c h a n g e t h e o p t i o n a l s .

(i) A cand ida te w iih a regular study or w ithou t a regular study who wish to appear p riva te ly w ith change o f op tional subject or subjects w ith in the faculty or outside the facu lty shall pay a fee of Rs. 100/ - tow ards the exem ’ption fees from pu ttin g in ihe requ ired a ttendance.

(ii) The previous perform ance will rem ain unaffected .

(iii) In case the perm ission is for change .of op tional subjects from H um anities to sciences candidates have to undergo a p ractical tra in ing in a recognised in stitu tio n as was prescribed for p riva te candidates w ith o u t 'college study.

(iv) C and idates w ho have passed the In te rm ed ia te Public Exar. m ination w ith Bi. P . C . g roup and who wish to appear only for M athem atics to becom e eligible fo r adm ission to fu r th e r studies w ith M athem atics can do so prov ided a fees o f Rs. 100/- is paid . Such candidates a re p e rm itted to appear for the E xam inations only one year a fte r they pass the In te rm ed ia te Public E xam ination w ith Bi. P. C.

(v) C and idates who have passed the Ail In d ia H igher Secondary E xam ination C3 years course) conducted by the C en tra l Board of Secondary E ducation , New D elhi are eligible to appear fo r the In term edia te Public E xam ination private ly , one year after the date of passing the All In d ia H igher Secondary E xam ination . Such cand idate^ should also ob ta in necessary exem ption from p u ttin g in the req u ired a ttendance from the B oard.

(vi) C and idates who have discontinued the In term ad ia te C ourse and who have passed or failed th e P . U . C. E xam ination o f this S ta te are eligible to appear fo r th e In te rm ed ia te P u b lic Exam in a tion P rivate ly a fte r ob tain ing 'necessary exem ption from p u ttin g in the req u ired a ttendance fro m the B oard.

17. M e d iu m o f a n s w e r i n g p a p e r s u n d e r P a r t I I I o f th e

p u b l i c e x a m i n a t i o n :

The students cf th e In te rm ed ia te C ourse have to answ er th e non- ^inguage subjects under P a rt I I I a t the public exam ina tion ’ in the

28

language in w hich they received in struc tjqn in th e ir colleges during the course. T here is no objection fo r any can d id a te to take the exam inations in Telugu irrespective^of th e jn e d iu m th ro u g h w hich h e received instruction . '

/H ow ever, the follow ing categories o f studen ts, a re p e rm itted to

answer the n o n -language suhjecis under P a r t I I I e ith er m English or in the m o th er tongue subject to the cond ition th a t tjiey have to answ er the p rac tica l exam inations in English or in the m edium o f o f in struc tion availab le in the College. Such perm 'ss on shall be gran ted bv the S ecretary o f the B oard on app lica tions frdm the cand idates duly recom m ended by the p rincipal.

(a ) S tudents w ho, under valid circum stances, jo in ano ther college, w here thpre- is no provision fo r th e mfedium in whfcrf they got in struc tion in th e ir fo rm er coUfige-

(b) S tudents o f m inority languages such as O riya, M ara th i K ^nnada, H indi, Tam il and U rdu who passed the qualify ing exam ination w ith the ir m other-tongue as m edium and w ho jo in the local cnlleges w here there is no provision fo r tlje m edium o f in stru c tio n in th e ir m other-tongue.

(c) S tudents who passed the qual fy ing exam ination th rough English m edium and jo in a college w here there is no p rovision , for English m edium .

P e r m i s s i o n t o c h a n g e m e d i u m i n r e s p e c t o f R e g u l a r C a n d i d a t e s :

T he Principals o f Colleges are em pow ered to g ran t perm ission for change o f m edium , p rovided , it is no t from In d ian language to English, on paym ent o f Rs. 25/- to the account o f th e Board o f Inter* m ediate E d u ca tion and the post fac to approval o f th e Secretary , B oard o f In te rm ed ia te E ducation should be ob ta ined after p e rm ittin g such change. Such perm ission should be gran ted only w ith in a period o f tw o m onths from ihe dale o f pub lica tio n o f the first list o f adm ission and n o t beyond . Before permitting^ the change o f m edium the Principals should m ake sure th a t th e cand idate was eligible fo r adm ission even a t th e first instance w ith th e m edium asked foe and th a t his nam e w ould have been included in th e o rig inal list o f selected cand idates fo r adm ission w ith th a t m edium .

29

18. O ff ic e <ropy o f t t e C e r t i f i c a t e i

T h e ofece copy-of-the-'In fem ieiiia te C ertificate o f each reg u la r s tu d en t should b e m a in ta in ed by th e p rinc ipa l in the fo rm given ia A n n rau re N o . V.

' o ■T h e resu lts o f th e pub lip exam ination , will not, be en tered in th e

ofSce copy o f th e Certifi,cftte, o f,any c a j^ id ^ te w ho does n o t satisfy a)l th e cond itions-la id dow n fo r the aw ard o f In te rm ed ia te C ertificate.

U nless th e resi^It o f a st,u3ent is en te red in th e pffic? copy o f th e C ertifica te , n o C ertifica te o r M em orandum o f M ark s issued by th e B oard shou ld be delivered to h im ,

19. Forged C erti^cates s

C and ida tes w ho seek o r o b ta in adm ission to 'th e Two Y ear Intern^^diate, C ourse by m eans o f forged or false certificates shall be d eb arred pejrm3nentf|f from adm ission to th e 'In te rm e d ia te C outse iu any recogn ised C o llege in th is S la te '

20. . I s s u e o f t t ia p t ic a t e d e r t i f i c a t e s

T he fo llow ing in stru c tio n s should be follow ed fo r th e p rep a ra tio n an d iisue o f D u p lica te Interm fcdiate C ertificates in cases w here th e loss o f th e o rig ihat has been satisfactorily a tc o u h te d for.

(i) T he fee fo r the D u p lica te C opy o f th e C ertifica te shallbe Rs. 1 5 /t . ^

(ii) T he am ount shall be rem itted to th e cred it o f the B oard o fIn te rm ed ia te ed uca tion and th e .ch a lan th ere o f should be enclosed to th e ap p lica tion fo rm japd., handed-oven to th e P ric ipal o f the coll^g,e where=. thp c^r^dj4 ^te l^ jt s tud ied along w ith th e fo llow ing docum ents ,

* ' t(a). A pp lica tion fo r the issue o f the D u p lica te copy o f the

certificate in th e p rescribed from (A nnexure V I.)

(b ) C halan fo r the prescriSed fee.

(c) A h affidavit in th e follow ing form on a stanrp paper w orth Rs. 4-50 (to “be a ttested by M u n s if} M ag istra te o r N o ta ry (Judicia l D ep t.)

30

^ f F i p A V I T

f , .................................... Son/daughter o f ............... ......................... .

a g e .................................. *...................occu p ation ...... .......................... ........ . . . . . .residen t o f ............. ........... .o n solem n o a th atfd a lf im a tio ii

‘ d ec la re as under :

! , T h a t I have a p p e a re d 'fo r fw 6-year Ih le rin ed ia te E xam inatio n held in the to o n th 6 f M arehf Septembers 197 ' w ith R egister N o. th ro u g h ............. ....... ....... ........ C ollege........ .....s..-.................................

2- T lia t the O rig in a l C ertificate issued to m e by 'tH e B oard o f In te rin ed ia te E d u c a tio n has beea lo s t by m e and insp ite o f my best efforts’ ! am u n ab le to tra c e i t a n d i t 'i s lo s t beyond recovery . In ca“se It i? traced in fu tu re ' I sh a ll ' sufemit if to t h t B oar4 o f Inter* jn ed ia tc E d u c a tio n fo r cance lla tion .

31

3- T h a t r a m in need 6 f dup lica te copy o f- th e -sa id tJtrtificate fo r w hich purpose , I am hereby m aking this d ec la ra tion as requ ired b y the S ecre ta ry , B oard o f I r it^ rm e d iitC E d u c a tio n ,

D E P O N E N T

S W O k N B E FO R E M E ')

O F F IC E S E A L : M A G IS T R A T E

D A T E : ............... .................... ......... < ' “ ■

d) A declaratioTi by the candi-date th a t th e p r ig ^ ^ l certificate w as n o t suspended o r cancelled by th e co m p eten t a u th o rity .

c) A n iden tificd tion ce rtif ic a te from tjie P rinc ipa l o f th e ’college th ro u g h whom Jhp can d id a te applies fo r th£ issli^ o f D\i^)lic'af-ei Ce'r i* fica te to the erf'ect t 6a t th e cand idate is th e sam e p e rso a to w hom the o rig in a l certifica te was issned, j l

iii) O n receip t c^f titii ap p lica tio n a l6ng with^ th 6 'ajbove docum ents, tlie P rinciffel afteH satisfy ing h jn ise lf as to .th e .cprrectoess o f 4he p a rticu la rs f^ lr iiish ^ ih the ap p lica tio n etc., w ill fo rw ard the p ro p o sa l a lb n g w ith his rem arks to tl^e S ec re ta ry , .B oard c^, Inter* m ed ia te E ducation . '

iv) The Secretaty^ il" satisfied w ith th e reasons s ta te d in the app lica tion , w^ll iskue'a p u p fib a te certifidaie to the-- candicjfite thro* ugh the P rincipal £6 tfceM ed.

v) T he S ecretary , B oard o f In te rm ed ia te E ducation will no tify in the G azette once in six m onths a list of cand idates w ith the register num bers o f th e lost certificates and o f the dup licates issued.

N ote ! I f any o f th e colleges presen ting studen ts fo r.th e tw o -y ea r In te rm ed ia te E xam ination ceases to exist fo r any re a s o n s , , such colleges should fo rw ard the undelivered certificates, if

'any , office copv ' f In te rm ed ia te C ertificate and o ther connected reco rds, to the jS,ecrttary,- Hoard of In term ed ia te E ducation ,

21.' F R A U D :

Cases o f frau d o r^ ta n ^ ^ n n g o r erasing the en tries in the ce rtificates or apy o ther docum ent,issued by the Board o f In te rm ed ia te E ducation > shall be p ro m p tly rep o rted lo the Secretary . Board o f In te rm ed ia te E d u ca tio n fo r necessary ac tion . A p p ro p ria te ac tion shall be ta k e n by the-B oard on the m erits o f e ,c h case.

A N N E X U R E ^l

SC H E M E OF PU B L IC E X A M IN A T IO N

35

S.N o.

N am e o f the ■'Subject.

D u ra tio nof

pap er.

M axim nM arks.

C on ten t o f the Pa.per.

1 2 3 • 4 5

P a rk I

-1 -, , English p ap e r I 3 H rs. 100. 1

2 . , English, ]?aper p 3;H rs., 106 '

P a r t 11

3; T elugu Paper I ,i3,iHrs. 75

4. Telugu P aper 11' '13. H rs: 75

n5.

' \ . f.V TU rd u P aper I 3 'H rs . 75

6 . U rd u P a p e r 11A* f

3 H rs. 75

7.

* IHiiidi Paper L 3 H rs . 75

Prose and P oetry

N on-'detailed, G ram m ar & Cpm positioD .

Poetry, D ram a & G ram m ar

Prose, N on-deta iled , C om position & T ransla tion .

P rose, P o e try & G ram m ar.

N o n - de ta iled ; < jeneral C om position & T ranslation

P rose, P oetry and applied G ram m ar.

33

S. H indi Paper II 3 H rt.

9. Tam il P aper I 3 Hrs.

10. T am il Paper II 3 Hrs.

75 N on-deta iled . Genera!C om pdsition & T ranslation

75 Poetry and Prose.

75 N o n -d e ta ilc d , GVammafG eneral C om position and TransJjition.

1 1 . M ara th i P aper I 3 Hrs. 75 Prose, P oetry & G ram m ar.

12 . M ara th i Paper 11 3 Hrs. 75 N on-deta iled , C om position unseen passage and T ranslation!

13. Kannad^i Paper ] 3 H rs. ?5 Prose, P oetry i G ram m ar & Prosody.

14. K annada Paper U 3 H ts. 75 N on-deta iled , C om position* C om prehension T ranslation . ,

15. O riya Paper I 3, Hrs. 75 Poetry , D ram a, G ram m ar and poetics. r

16. O riya Paper 11 3 Hrs. 75 Prose, N on-detailed , G eneral, C om position , Traivsla- tio n ' o r predis-w riting .and p a ra Phrasing o f an unseen, poeln'. '

17. SiA skrit Paper 1 3 Hrs. '75 Poetry an d Prose. '

18. Sanskrit Paper II 3 Hrs. 75' N on-detaiied , G ram m ar & T ran sla tio n (5 -Slokas)' '

19. Persian Paper 1 3 Hrs. 15 Gram m ar^ T ransla tion ancj C om positi6 n

20. Persian paper 11 3^Hrs. ?5 Prose and poetry.

2 1 . A rab ic paper I 3 HVs. 75 '(jfam m ar^ T ran sla tio n and 'L e tte rw ip in g .. . . ■-

22 . A rabic paper H ‘ ( .

3 Hrs. 15 Prose, poetry and N ondetailed .

23. G erm an paper I 3 h r s . 75 C om prehension of a G er, \ r m an T ex t and G ram m ar.

24. G erm an paper 11 J Hrs. 75

>

T ransla tion o f an English T ext in to G erm an and

.G ram m ar., v ju •>

25. F rench paper 1 3lH rs.t

• 75 Prose, poetry and G ram m ar P a r t I

34

26. French paper II 3 Hrs. 75 Prose, po e try & G ram m arP art II

27. Russian paper T 3 Hrs. 75 Prose & G ram m ar (p o rtions in I year)

28. Russian paper II 3 Hrs. 75 Prose & G ram m ar (portionsin II year)

P a r t IK (Sciences)

29. M athem atics '<• 100 A lgebra, Trigonometfery &p aper I 3 Hrs. S tatistics.

30. M athem atics 100 C alculus, A nalytical andp aper I I 3 Hrs. Pure G eom etry .

31. Physical Sciencesp ap er I (Physics) 3 H rs. 70 W hole Syllabus in phxsics-

32. Physics p ractical 2 Hrs. '2 5 + 5 F or R ecords.

33. Physical SciencesI

paper I I (C hem istry) 3 H rs 70 W hole Syllabus in Chemi-

34. C hem istry p rac tica l 3 ^ r s .

35. B iological SciencesP aper I (B otany) 3 H rs,

36. B o tany p rac tica l 2 H rs.

37. BioIogicaK gciences Paper I I (Zoplogy) 3 Hrs.

38. Zoology P rac tica l 2 H rs.

39. G eo logy paper. I 3 Mrs.

40, ’ G eology p rac tica l I 2 H rs.

41. G eology paper II 3 H rs.

stry

2 5 + 5 F o r Records.

70 W hole Syllabus in B otany.

2 5 + 5F or records.

70 W hole Syllabus in Zoology.

2 5 + 5 F o r R ecords.

70 Physical G eology : S tructu ra l G eology, C rystallog raphy , M inerelogy and Petro logy .

26 C rystellography , M i n e- re logy and S tru c tu ra l Geo-

4 logy F o r records.

70 S tra tig rap h y , pa laeon to lo g y and E conom ic G eology.

35

42. G eology practi-cals II 2 H rs.

43^ H om e Sciencep ap er J 3 H rs.

44. H om e SciencePaper I i 3 Hrs.

45. Home SciencePractica l’’ 3 Hrs.

46. Hom e Sciences P ractical IJ 3 Hrs.

25 Petrology, P alaeon to logy + and E conom ic G eology.

5 F o r R ecords and Viva,

70 Section A Physiology, H ygiene & F irst A id. Sec. B. Textiles and C lothing.

70 Sec. A Foods & N u tritio n . Sec. B H om e M anagem en t, C hild D eveiopm em and F am ily R elations.

2 5 + 5 For N eedle w ork ; ■Records.

(

25 + 5 For Foods & N u tritio n . Records.

M o d e r n & C l a s s i c a l L a n g u a g e s

47. Telugu Paper 1 3 Hrs. 75

48. Telugu Paper II 3 Hrs. 75

49. U rdu Paper J 3 Mrs. 75

50. U rdu. Paper II 3 Hrs. 75

51 H indi Paper I 3 Hrs. 75

52 Hindi Paper II 3 H rs. 75

53. Tam il Paper ( 3 H rs. 75

54. Tam il Paper II 3, Hrs. 75

55. M ara th i'P ap e r I 3 Hrs. 75

56. M ara th i Paper II 3 Hrs. 75

P oetry lives and w orks o f the Poets, D ram a & D ra ma tu rg / ,

Prose-Criticism or C ritica l essays E lem ents o f L anguage and G ram m ar.

Prose P oetry and G ram m ar

N ovel, D ram a and H isto ry o f L itera tu re .

Pro^e, Poetry and D ram a

Non “ detailed . G ram m ar and essay |

Prose and P o ey y .

G ram m ar. D ram a and G eneral C om position .

Prose, P oe try and Proso(Jy. N on-deta iled , G ram m ar, C om position and Precis w riting.

36

57. K an n ad a P aper 1 3 Hrs,

58. K annada P aper II 3 Hrs.

59. O riya P aper I 3 H rs.

^0. O riya P ap er i r . 3 H rs.

61. S anskrit P ap er I 3 Hrs.

6i . S anskrit P ap er II 3 H rs.I

63. Persian P aper I 3 Hrs.

64. Persian P aper J I 3 H rs.

65. A rabic P aper [ 3 Hrs.

66. A rab ic P aper II 3 H rs.

67. English P aper I 3 H rs.

'68 . E nglish P aper U 3 H rs.

75 P rose, P oe try , G ram m ar P rosody

75 Non-rdetailed, C om position , T ransla tion <S^Comprehension

75 P oetry and D ram a.

75 Prose and G ram m ar.

75 P oetry and D ram a,

75 Prose, /Vlankaras & G ram m ar.

75 H isto ry o f P ersian .L ite ra tu re , T ran sla tio n and (G ram m ar,

75 Prose and P oe try

75 Prose, Poetry and Nonde-; ta iled . i

75 G ram m ar T ran sla tio n and p recis w ritin g o f s e e n

’ Passage. >

75 D ra m a and Poetry .

75 Prose aqd N on-detailed .

I ’69. M aths. P aper I 3 Hrs.

70. M aths. Papar fl 3 Hrs.c

71. Econom ics Paper I 3 Hrs.

72. Econom ics P a p e r ll 3 Hrs.I ) f ;

73. Logic P aper I 3 Hrs.

74. Logic P aper 3 H rs.

’7$'. C om m erce P ap er I '3 Hrs.

76. C om m erce P aper II 3 Hrs.

)7 . In d ian H istory

P a^er I 3. Hrs.

78. Ind ian H isto ryP aper I I 3 Hrs.

H u m a n it i e s

75 A lgebra, T rigonom etery & S tatistics.

75 C alca lus, A riaiytical and P ure G eom etry.'^ ' '

75 E lem ents o f Econom ics.

75 Econom ic £l(eveloi)ment of ' In d ia . ' ; ' ^

75 I Y ear Syllabus. .

75 I I Y ear Syllabus.

75 E lem ents o f C om m erce.

75 B ook-keeping & A ccounts.

< I

75 U p to l5 2 6 A .D .

75 1526 to 1955 A. D .

37

79 . W orld H istoryP aper I 3 Hrs. 75 A ncien t and M iddle ages

80. W orld H istoryP aper 11 3 Hrs. 75 M odern period

81. Civics P aper I 3 H rs. 75 Civics

82. C ivics P aper II 3 H rs. 75 Ind ian A d m in istra tion .

83. G eography P aper I 3 Hrs. 50 G enera l, Physical andSocial G eography.

84, G eography P aper I I 3 Hrs. 50 Eco. G eography o f W orldand Ind ia .

85. G eography P rac tica l 3 H rs. 3 0 + 1 0for records—10 V iva voce.

86. Sociology Paper I 3 H rs. 75 E lem ents o f Sociology.

87. Sociology Paper II 3 Hrs. 75 In d ian Social Problem s.

88 . H om e SciencePaper I 3 Hrs. 50 Sec. A Physiology, H ygiene

^ F irs t Aid-Sce. B, T extiles and C lothing.

89. Home SciencePaper II 3 Hrs. 50 Sec. A Foods & N u tritio n

Sec. B. H om e M anagem ent child developm ent and fam ily rela tions.

90. Hom e SciencePractical I 3 Hrs. 20 + 5

F o r records N eedle w ork.91. H om e Scicnce

P ractica l 11 3 Hrs. .20+5F o r records Foods andN u tritio n .

92. F ine Arts-A* m usicT heory 3 Hrs.' 60 W hole Syllabus

93. - do -p ractical 1 H r.

94. F ine A rts-B T h ea trica lA rts. T heory 3 H rs.

8 5 + 5 F o r record

75 W hole Syllabus

38

fS. Fine Arts-B TheatricalA rts, p rac tica l 40 M ts,(a) Viva-voce 20 M ts,

Firre A rts -C , D ance" > T heory 3' Krs.

50 M ake up, ac tm g ("T) w ith 25 words, giving 15 days-nonce

and (2) w ithou t w o rd s im prom ptu giving 10> preparatio iL , ^

60

97 Fine A rts -C D ance I <5 M ts , to p rac tica l 1 H r , 30

9 8 , (a> V iva-V oce- 2 45 Mts-. to-I H r , 30

15 + 15 Cor reco rd

99. EMrce Arts D. Drawing <S

paintirvg T heory 1 1/2 H rs,

too -d o ^ ppiactical I 2 Hrs--

10 1 , -d o - p rac tica l 11 3 H rs,

5» '

40*4-[O' Obj'ec( druw iiig ( tn F or record peiveil-or C rayon)

4 0 + 1 0 IV aturr D raw ing o r F or re c o rd design ia W ater

C o lo u r,

lOX Fine A rtS-E ScufptureT heory

l03. - do-*-practical J

104. - d c - p ractical

2 1/2 H rs, 5C?

4 0 + icy O bject drawi'iig vege- 1 l-Jrs^ F o f reco rd tab les fru its etc., ir»

re lief w ith C lay,

3 Hrs- 4 0 + TO S cu lp tu re in roand f, F o r record B irds, A nim als, Toys

etc., w ith clay io ro u n d .

■SCHEME O F E X A M IN A T IO N

INo, N arne o f the D u ra tio n M axim um C onten ts 't)F P a p e r S u b jec t o f paper .M arks

ANNEXURE-II

S A N S K R IT SASTRAS P A R T 1

1. ’Englisli p a p e r I

2 . JEnglish p ap er II

■PART n

3 . Second Uanguaige p a p e r I

<4, Second L anguage pap er II

P A R T IH

5. 'Sans'krit 'Sastras p a p e r I Nit5 '

€ . SansTcrlt S as tra s parer^ll

7 , Sajiskrlt Sastnfs paper III

8 . Sans'krit S astras p ap e r IV

9 . S an sk rit S astras papec V

3 H rs.

3 H rs.

3 Hrs.

3 Hrs.

3 Hrs.

3 Hrs.

3 Hrs.

3 Hrs.

WO- P rose and Poetry .

aO0 N on-deta iled , Gram>gnar an d C om position

75 As per tlie scheme in Genera'i 'Course,

75 B liartrlia ri N itisata 'kam ray an a H ito p ad esa , (M itra^

la b ^ a 'only.) ^

/"75 'Bleme&ts o f / N y ay a and

M im am sa (i) Anna’i& S h a tta T a rk a 'S am agraha T ext only < ii) K rishnayaj yam i M im - am sa P ari b h asa T ex t only.

75 G ram m ar^ S id d h an ta K.au- •mudi, Sam jna P aribhasa S an d h i 5 tr ip ra ty a y a .

?5 P o e try , Magha> Sisupalava- d h a C en to s I & II

3 H rs. 75 Prose.

40

10. S ansk rit S astrasp ap e r VI 3 H rs.

V ED A S P A R T I , * ' i

11. E nglish p ap e r I 3 H rs.

12. E n g lish p ap e r I I 3 H rs.

P A R T I I

13. S anskrit paper I 3 H rs.

14. S ansk rit p ap er I I 3 H rs.

75 D ram a K alid asa , M alavi K ag n im itra .

100 Prose and P o e try

ICO N o n -d e ta iled , G ram m ar an d C om p o sitio n .

75 P o e try and ProSe.

75 N on -d e ta iled , G ram m ar and T ran sla tio n (5 Slokas)

PA R T I I I (V ED A S)

15. V edas;paper I , N iti 3 H rs. 75

16. Vedas: paper I I 3 Hrs. 75

17. Vedas: V iva Voce: 1 3 H rs.18. Vedas: V iva Voce: 2 3 H rs.19. Vedas: V iva Voce: 3 3 Hrs.20. Vedas: Viva Voce: 4 3 Hrs.

B hartrhari^ N itisa tak a ra , N a- ray an a H itopadesa , (M itra L ab h a on ly .)

E lem en ts o f N yaya and M i- m am sa (i) A n n am b h a tta ; T ark asam g rah a T ext only(ii)K rishnayajyam ; m iraam sa P arib asa T ext only.-

75 T hese four papfers are to test the cand idate’s a tta in m e n t on the o ra l rec ita tio n o f one o f th e Vedas.

A P P L IC A T IO N FO R C O N D O N A T IO N O F SH O R T A G E O F A T T E N D A N C E A N D E X E M PT IO N

1. N am e o f the C and ida te :

2. C ollege and Class in w hich the cand ida te is studying.

3. S tatem ent giving in detail.

4i

ANNEXURE III

M onths N o. of w ork ing T o ta l N o .o f days T o ta l N o . o f T otal days o f the ac tually days

College a tten d ed absent by the

can d id a te

firstyear

Second first | Second first year year [ year year

Secondyear

June

JulyA ugust

Septem ber

O ctoberN ovem ber

D ecem ber

Jan u ary

February

M archA pril

T o ta l :

N o te : The above pa rticu la rs should be furnished separately for theo ry and p racticals.

4. A ctual shortage o f a tten d a nce (N o. o f days and the p ercen tage o f shortage to be clearly m en tioned separately for th eo ry and prac tica ls).

5. R easons fo r sho rtage o f A ttendance ( I f on m edical grounds M . C. should -be enclosed)

6. S ignatu re o f A pplican t.%1. W hether the prescribed fee

has been co llec ted by the Principal and rem itted to th e B oard (C hallan or Bank D raft to be enclosed)

8. In case the can d id a te 'h a s no t p u t in a tleast ||60% a ttendance on th e d a te o f ap p lica tio n , it m ay be s ta ted w heth er an u n d e rtak in g in w ritin g has been o b ta in ed from him th a t he"will m ake up th e deficiency b efo re the com m encem ent o f Public

• exam ination , an d th a t he also agrees fo r w ithho ld ing Jof hall ticket o r cancella tion o f p erfo rm ance a t Pub lic E xam inatio n i f he is unab le to m ake up deficiency.

9. W hether th e s tu d en t to o k p a rt in any S trike , th e N o . o f days he w as absent in th a t connectio n and th e penalty i f any, levied by th e College.

>0. R ecom m endation o f the Principal.

42

S ta tio o

Signature of the Princlpat.

A N N E X U R E -IV .

F O R M I.

Name o f the In stilu tio n :(To be filled in by th e M edical Officer) >

M E D IC A L E X A M IN A T IO N R E P O R T

Students’ N am e..........................................................................................................H eigh t.................. M etres ................ ciris. W eig h t...............Gs.

G eneral Build & N u tr i t io n ................... P o s tu r e .................. G a it................

D eform aties, if any, such afe-talipes flat foo t etc. r

M easurem ent o f : Biceps..........................cms.

I Full in sp ira tion c.ras.Chest 1 C om plete E xpiration c.m s.

I D ifference c.ms.

W aist over navel c.m s. !

Vital C ap ac ity ......................................S trength o f G rip ] RighiI Left

(where necessary) | i) Scalp ............ii) B ody........... ;

C leanliness and cond ition o f skin and hair o f

G um s N o se ......................T h ro a t T onsils & A deno ids.........................Eyes.....................

T eeth C on jucitive, A naem ia or JaundiceE xternal and in ternal eye diseases.

Vision : (i) R ight(ij) Left.

Tongue W hether w earing glasses........................E ars & hearing R ight •

Lefi

M E N T A L C O N D IT IO N

Speech................... ......r................................G lands.............i ...............................N eck .............................................................T h y ro id .............................................

H ea rt ........................ .. ............................. '....Position o f Apex B e i t ...............

R ate before exercies...............m , aftei

43

A ft tW here necessary R ate

44

A fter exercise (20) squats)

R esp ira tio n ..............................R a te per m iftute

Lungs..............................A bdom en..................................

L iver...

Spleen.

G enitelia , H ern ia , H ydrocele, V erice ' cele

Phim osis, Piles................Vari'cese volns in th e legs

N ervous system ............................. . Reflexes.....................

Result o f b lood exam ination (W hen necessary)

R esult o f S pu tum E xam ination (W hen necessary)

Any o ther pecu liarities or defects n o t n o ted above.

Advice to s tuden t fo r : (i) Im provem ent o f Physique.

(ii) T rea tm en t of disease.

R ecom m endation to the P rincipal

S ignature o f P rincipal.

D ate o f M edical E xam ination Signa ture q f M edical Officer.

N. B :— If th ere is no th ing abnorm al p resen t under any o f th e above H eadings, th e space opposite should be left b lank . E ntries should be m ade to th e p o in t and as b r ie f as possible.

FO R M II( T o be filled in by the s tuden t )

45

A N N E X U R E IV

N am e and place o f the In s titu tio n ...........................................

S tuden t’s N am e ............................ A ge.............................. S ex ....

C aste or C om m u n ity .....................R e lig io n .....................C lass.

P erm anen t H om e A ddress ........................................... .................

F a th e r’s o r G u n rd ian ’s nam e, address and o ccu p a tio n ..............................

Econom ic p o sitio n o f the fam ily (Ind icate by p u ttin g a cross a t the p ro p er place)

fa) Enough fo r p leasure and charities.(b) Enough fo r o rd in a ry com forts.(c) Enough for necessaries only.(d) Just tn o u g h for subsistence.(e) C arry ing on w ith difficulty. ‘

B etro thed , or m arried , o r sing le ......................................I f m arried .(1) H ow -long a^o consum m ated.(2) N um ber o f children, if any.

W hether boarding p r lodging in th e U niversity or approved hostels if not, are you satisfied w ith your.

(1) Lodging ?(2) Boarding ?

Have you a separa te study and living room fo r yourself ?If living w ith fam ily, how m any m em bers are there in your family? How m any m eals do you p a rtak e o f per day ?W hat do you take fo r tiffin ?W hich o f the follow ing artic les do you take daily ?

A rticle Approxim ate Q u an tityRice

“ W heat DaliFish o r m eatEggsM ilk o r m ilk p roducts F resh fru its F resh green vegetables SweetsTea, Coffee, C ocoa or o ther beverages.

D o you tak e any o f the follow ing substances ?(a) T obacco (in w hat form )

(b) O pium

(c) A lcohol

(d) any o th e r sim ilar substance.

(a) H ow m any hours do you devote daily to ( I ) Sleep ?(2) Exercise?

(b) D o you feel refreshed a fte r sleep and exercise ?

(c) S tate n a tu re o f exercise taken .

(d) G ive nam es o f gam es played.

H ow m any hours do you devote fo r s tud ies a t hom e ?

H ave you any occupation b efo re or after .college h ou rs or during vacation a p a rt from study o r exercise ?

A re you in terested in any hobby ?

Previous personal H isto ry ; ,

H ave you had any o f th e fo llow ing illnesses, if so, when ?(In d ica te by crossing ou t)

Sm all Pox K a la A zarC hicken Pox R heum atismM easles P a lp ita tio nW hooping cough A sthm aD ip h th e ria C hron ic coughPneum onia F its o f any k ind like epilepsyT yphoid PilesD ysentery V enereal diseases :D ia rrh o ea (a) G enorhoeaCholera (b) SyphlisM alaria

(a) W hen were you last vaccinated.

(b) H ave you h ad any severe acciden ts if so, th e ir n a tu re ?

Present Personal H i s t o r y ;

(a) D o you feel in perfect h ea lth ?

(b) H ave you had a good appe tite ?

(c) H ow often do your bowels m ove daily ?(d) D o you suffer from piles ?

46

(e) Are you subject to frequen t headache, carache, discharge from the ear, discharge from the nose and th ro a t, colds, d ia rrh o ea , acid ity , p a lp ita tio n o r breathlessness ? (Ind icate by crossing out).

( f ) Is your w eight increasing o r decreasing ?

(g) D o you h ab itua lly suffer from inflam ed lids o r eyes ?

(h) A re your sight and h earin g norm al ?

( i ) Have you experienced difficulty in b rea th ing on slightexertion ?

Fam ily M edical H istory : ( if exceptional) ;

47

S IG N A T U R E O F T H E STU D E N T .

N. B : —If th e answ er is in the negative the space opposite shou ld be left b lank : en tries should be m ade to th e p o in t and as briefly as ppssible. All in fo rm ation supplied by th e student would be tre a te d as s tric tly confidential.

A N N E X U R E IV

F O R M III

Inform ation to the Parent

48

M edica l Inspection C e r tif ic a te :

N am e

Class.

Disease^

or

D efec t

M edical Inspection C ertifica te F o r

In fo rm a tion fo r parent or guardian.

N am e o f S tu d en t Class

N am e and address of p a ren t o i G u a rd ian

Y o u r w ard suffering from

Y ou should

M edical Inspector

A dvice

M edical Inspector

C ollege......................

D a te ..................... 19

D is t ...........................

OFFICE COPY OF

Qualifying Examination Subjects taken i'rfor admission intermediate C(

oZ

0>*oZ34->V)«•soVE

o(UrtQ

4 i.rtOJ0 >«-J TJ

>vJ-lV)CO

cfdo ^"rtc o Z ;;;

.2rt

Z

Ut/3VI

i/i _ rtM ^ 01 <*- a: o

<yD04C

-J = TJ

i § ^ VI

Optior III V

10

A N N E X U R E - V

T H E I N T E R M E O lA .T E G E R T 1F 1G A .T E {To b e m a i n C a i n e d f o r I y e a r ciasis & l l y e a r c l a s s s e p a r a t e l y )

In the ‘o u r s e

Attendance(Theory)

Attendance In (Practicals)

3nals under Part with medium

12

VI i-tr a c

T 3 <u

M1/1OJc L .a

V .O S-

Vm .0 0d d

Z Z

13 .14

DOft c •-« rt C t3<y cy 5O)Q_

15

SUBJECT

oZ

ua.

U

OZ

o OiV 0

" -Sc ^ O c: u 0)X.VQ- <

16 i7 U

(1)

uu -odZ

SUBJECT :i

jsu (JO S

. Vio «z ^

19 20

o; ft) t>a o rt c: rtS I

sCU t i Q . M

21

Annual Prom otion marks (In case of first year) Board Examination m arks (isi case o f second year)

PART

< O <Q- fS Q- —

21 23

A. B. C . . 4 25 26

u O rt T3gE

"rt rt ^ W i - t O 3

H O O

27

g(Ua:

28

Signature of the candidate for

receiving the Memo of marks (in case of Second year students

only)

29

Signature of the candidate for receiving the

Pass Certifi ate (in case of passed candidates only)

Remarks

30 31

A P P L IC A T IO N FO R T H E ISSU E O F A D U PL IC A T E ' IM T E R M E D IA T E C E R T IF IC A T E

51

ANNEXURE VI

1. N am e o f the applicant :(in block letters)

2. A ddress o f the app lican t ;

3. F a th e r’s N am e :

4. College th ro u g h w hich th e app lican t appeared fo r the In te rm ed ia te Pub lic E xam ination and passed :

5. Serial N um ber o f the O rig inal In te rm ed ia te C ertifica te issued to him :

6 . N um ber o f tim es the app lican t appeared for the In te rm ed ia te Public E xam ination w ith the m on th and year o f the E xam ination and the R oll N um ber assigned to each ap p earance ;

7. D eta iled circum stances under which the app lication for the issue fo r dup lica te in te rm ed iate C ertifica te is m ade :

8 . W hether an afidavit regard ing the loss o f the O rig inal In te rm ed ia te C ertifica te beyond recovery from M ag istra te is a ttach ed :

9. W hether th e challan o f the S ta te Bank ofIn d ia or S ta te Bank o f H yderabad fo r Rs 15/ tow ards fee fo r ob ta in in g a dup lica te In te rm ed ia te C ertifica te is enclosed (N am e o f the Bank and N o . and d a te o f the C hallan to be m entioned). ^

H e a d o f A c c o u n t : C u rren t A ccount ofSecretary , B oard o f In te rm ed ia te E ducation A ndhra Pradesh, H yderabad :

I®. W hether the In te rm ed ia teC ertifica te has ai any tim e been suspended or cancelled :

p E C L 4 RATIOr>ir

I solem nly declare th a t th e p a rticu la rs furnished above a rc 'tru e to the best o f my know ledge and belief. '

52

S ig n a tu re o f the Applicant.

N o te : The fu rn ish ing o f inaccu ra te o r false p a rticu la rs will en ta ilbesides w ilh -ho ld ing o f the dup lica te certificate, such disciplinary ac tion as m ay be called fo r or deem ed fit by the Secretary , B oard o f In te rm e d ia te E duca tio n .

ID E N T IF IC A T IO N C E R T IFIC A T E O F T H E PR IN C IA L

I certify th a t th e above p a rticu la rs furnished by the C an d id a te have been verified and found co rrec t w ith reference to the records o fthe C ollege and the app lican t S r i/K u m ............................................................(nam e to be given) is the sam e person to whom the O rig inal In te rm ed iate C ertificate was issued and th a t the issue o f the duplicate to the cand idate is recom m ended.

S igna ture o f the Principaf.

(W ith College Stam p)

S ta tion :

D ate ;

N o te : I) The follow ing C ertificates should be sent along w ith th e app lica tion w ithou t fail.

1. Bank challan fo r Rs. 15 /- (R em itted to the H ead o f A ccount as given in the C olum n 9 supra)

2. An affidavit on a stam p paper w orth o f Rs. 4- 50

N o te : ii) I f the spoiled In te rm ed ia te C ertifica te is available or in case any pieces o f it a re availab le it/th ey m ay be sent to th is office-^loijg v^ith th e app lica tion .

R u l e s o f E l i g i b l i t y o f t h e Q ,u a l i f y in g E x a m i n a t i o n s C o n d u c t e d in A n d h r a P r a d e s h f o r G o m p a r t m e n t a i l ly P a s s e d Ca.n> d id a t e s :

i) S. S. C. (A cadem ic C ourse) : C and idates should secure notless th an 35% o f m arks in each of th e subjects i. e. F irs t language, T hird L anguage (English), M athem atics, G eneral Science and Social Studies and 20% in Second L anguage.

ii) O. S. S. C . : C and ida tes shou ld secure Hot less th an 35% o f m arks in each of the subjects (i. e.) F irs t L anguage, T hird language (English), 70 m arks ou t o f 200 in classical Language P aper-I, C lassical L anguage Paper-II (C lassical L anguage Paper I & II are trea ted as one subject! and 35% in one o f the non-language subjects and 20% in Second Language.

iii) S. S C. (B ifurcated C ourse) : C and idates should secure notless th an 35% in the F irst Language and T h ird Language (English), 20% jn Second Language and 30% in the four rem ain ing subjects

iv) S S. L. C. (A cadem ic C ourse) : C and idates should securenot less than 80 (eighty) m arks ou t of a to ta l o f 200 m atks in the F irs t Language or languages chosen under Parts-I & i l to g e th ;r 40% o f m arks in English and in the follow ing th ree subjects viz., v iathe- m atics, Social studies and G eneral Science, no t less th an J5% m arks in tw o o f the subjects and n o t less than 30% m arks in the th ird subjcct,.

T he cand idates shall be declared elig ib le for adm ission lo U niversity Courses o f study only, i f they secure n o t less th an 15% of m arks in H indi under the T liird Language. This rule ( P rescrip tion of 15% m arks in H indi ) shall apply only to the candidates v/ho lake th e S. S. L. C . E xam ination fo r th e firs t tim e in M arch 1959 or subsequently .

v) S. S. L. C. (B ifurcated C ourse) : C and idates should secure n o t less th an 40% in P a r t I o f the F irs t L anguage, 40% in English and in the fou r rem ain ing subjects (or p e rscn b ed com ib ination o f subjects) n o t less th an 35% in each o f any tw o of th e fou r subjects and no t less th an 30% in each o f th e o th e r tw o subjects.

vi) O . S. S. L. C. : C and idates should secure n o t less than 40% in the F irs t (R egional) L anguage Part-1, 40% in the Second Language English 70 M arks out o f a to ta l o f 200 m arks in the m ain languages

53

ANNEXURE-VII

chosen & 35% in one o f the O ptional subjects viz. G eneral or Composite M athem atics o r G eneral Science or Social Studies.

In ad d itio n to satisfy ing the above cond ition the candidates <jhail be declared elig ib le for adm ission to U niversityC ourses of study only if they secure no t less than 15% o f m arks in T hird L anguage- Hindi.

vit) O SM A N IA M A T R IC : The cand idates should ob ta in 30% in each sub ject and 35% in aggregate-for a pass in the w hole exam ination.

The cand idates w ho appeared for the O sm ania M a tric and obtained an aggregate for T h ird o r Second o r F irs t C lass bu t who tailed in one or m ore subjects and who com plete these subjects subsequently are given the class accord ing to th e ir o rig inal ag g reg a te ’ Such s tu d en ts m ay be considered fo r adm ission to h igher classes. For adm ission purposes th e ir o rig inal aggregate m ay have to be taken in to considera tion fo r arran g in g them accord ing to m erit. The m arks ob tained by them to com plete the exam ination shall be taken into consideration fo r considering the ir adm ission in the op tionals .

viii) V EN K A T E SH W A R A M A T R IC : A can d id a te shall be dec la red to have passed the E xam ina tion if he ob ta ins n o t less th an 40% of the m arks in each o f the subjects o f English language and second language, no t less than 35% o f the m arks in each o f any tw o o f the rem aining th ree subjects and no t less than30% of th e m arks in the rem aining subjects. A ll o ther cand idates shall be declared to have failed in the exam ination. A cand idate who fai.s to secure pass m arks in apy iubject or subjects shall be requ ired to appear again fo r the exam ination in all subjects and se::ure a pass.

54

FO RM O F T R A N S F E R C E R T IF IC A T E FO R [N T E R M E D IA T E

C O U R SE

T ransfer C ertificate N o. :

1. N am e o f the Ju n io r College(Place and D istric t.)

2. N am e o f the pupil,

3. N am e o f the p a ren t or guard ian .

4. N atio n a lity and R egligion.

5. W hether the cand idate belongs to S.Cs. orS.Ts. o r V im uktha Ja th is or o ther Sociallyand E ducationally B ackw ard Classes specified A .P .E .R s, o r is he a convert from theS. Cs. o r the S. Ts. If so, the pa rticu la rsthereof.

6 . D ate o f b irth (in words) as en tered in the A dm ission R egister.

7. (a) Class in which the f>upil was read ingat the tim e o f leaving (in words).

(b) F irst Language under P a rt J,

(c) Second J^anguage under Part II.

(d) O ptionals under P a r t H I.

8. M other tongue and m edium o f In struction .

9.- D ate o f adm ission to the 1st year In te rm ediate C ourse (the year to be entered in w ords).

10. .C lass and year in w hich the pupil was first adm itted into the In te rm ed ia te C ourse (1st year or 2nd year).

11 . W hether qualified to study II year class or In term ed ia te C ourse (in case o f students leaving after com pleting 1st year Class).

55

ANNEXURE V III

] 2. W hether the pupii h^5 been deW ared eligible by the B oard o f In te rm ed ia te E ducation

* ' ' f o r ' C o u r s e o^ 'study ' ' ' >o

13. (a) W hether the pup il was in receip t c fany Scholarship (N a tu re o f the Scho-' larsh ip to be specified).

V • » r .(b) W hether the pupil was in receip t o f,

any concession (N atu re o f the concession to be specified).

14. Personal marjcs o f identifica,tion. i ) ;ii):

15. D ate on w hich the pupil has actually left th e college.

16. D ate of T ran sfe r C ertificate.'

17. C onduct.

18. S ignatu re o f th e H ead o f the In stitu tio n :

56

N ote : (i) Ju n io r C ollege un d er P rivate m anagerneiit shall thefo llow ing in the T ransfer Ce^'tificates: “ R ecognition and affiliation ob ta ined from th e B oard o f in te rm ed ia te E duca tio n , A n d h ra P radesh and" fhe to i le g e '^as perm itte d to be opened un d er G .O . M s, N o .......... , Educiaiiion,d a te d ..............................1 . , , ,

(ii) T ransfer (Certificates i^syefl by the ^ riv a teJu n i^ r colleges w ith o u t the w ords m entioned in N o te (I) above shall no t be considered valid 'fo r 'p u rp o se of-admission itfothtfr Colleges.,

Two Year Intermediate Course -P A R T I E N G L I S H

S Y L L A B U S F O R F I R S T Y E A R

P o e t r y :

T he p o e try p a rt includes s 'm ple n arra tiv e poetris. B allads, lyrics and one or tw o sim ple sonnets. Poems w ith abstrac t and involvect constru c tio n should be avoided. Sim ple B allads in m odern E nglish shou ld be selected, conform ing to the graded vocabulary and struci tu ra l app roach . T he num ber o f lines shall n o t exceed 500, The exercises on poetry should include m eanings o f difficult \VoTdS" and questions on compreheT)sion. ,

P r o s e :

T he prose p a rt consists o f Essays of tOO pages. Select pi^ce^ from 20th C entury iiu thors m ay be included in th e ir orig inal form .

L anguage e;^erci>es m ust be donje in a way tp include (i) R eporr ted speech, (ii) T ransfo rm ation oF seiilences, (iii)A rticles, (iv) P reposition , (v) Degrees o f com parison , (vi) Typical use o f w ords (one p a it o f speech used as a n o th e r), (vii) Idiom s and phrases and questions req u irin g answ ers o f different lengths ;

(a) Short answ ers, (b) P ara , (c) Essay.

N o n - d e t ? i i le d , T e x t :

The book chosen for non-detailed study should be only an ab rid . ged and sim plified N ovel or re to ld of ab o u t 120 pages, w ith questions on com prehension and exp lanations o f difficult and uncom m on w ords given a t th e end. i ■

C o m p o s i t i o n :

1. L etter W riting 2, Expansion

S Y L L A B U S F O R S E C O N D Y E A R

P o e t r y ;

In the second year, the poetry p a rt should com prise 500 lines o f selected verse. Tw o scenes from Shakespeare no t exceeding 30Q lines should be included.

§7

58

P r o s e ;

T he prose book should com prise 100 pages : T he pages selected should be from the 18ih and I9 th cen tu ry au th o rs . The ed ito rs may ad ap t these pieces w ith a view to m aking them sim ple and lucid in expression.

N o n - d e t a l l e d :

I f a book o f sh o rt sto ries (120 pages) o r (2) a book o f sh o rt b iographies (120 pages) or an abridged or sim plified .or re to ld biography o r au to -b iog raphy (120 pages) w ith questions on com prehension and exp lanation o f tiifRcult and uncom m on w ords a t the end.

G r a m m a r :

The g rarom ar th a t is to be in troduced should be a synthesis of the trad itio n a l G ram m ar and m odern approach . It m ust be such a blend as will enable the pupils learn all th e language skills in a p roper way.

A list o f selected stru c tu res in conform ity w ith the P re-U n iv ersity s tan d ard should be in tro d u ced to studen ts a t twc5 levels, i. e., hrst year and second year. T he ap rox im ate num ber o f such graded struc tu res should no t exceed 25 a t each level. But the studen ts are to be tested in a h the 50 structu res at the end o f the second year.

T he essentials o f functional G ram m ar m ay be em phasised. Useful definitions o f fo rm al and conventional g ram m ar may be de'duced from su itab le exam ples w hereever necessary to help co nso lida tion of language. A t the sam e tim e g ram m ar w ork may am ong o ther things, include th e fo llow ing :—

IF i r s t Y e a r :

(I) Verbs including A nom alous Fanies. (2) P repositions.(3) A rticles. (4) C onjuctions. (5) A djectives. (6) Adverbs. (7) Degrees o f C om parison. (8) D irect and In d irec t form s of

na rra tio n .

S e c o n d Y e a r ;

(9) A nalysis and synthesis. (10) T ran sfo rm atio n o f sentences.( I I ) C orrec tion o f sentences. ( t2 ) Synonym s. (13) Anto'nyms. (14) P unctuation .

C o m p o s i o n :

1. P recis w riting . 2. Essay w riting .

L is t o f B o o k s p r e s c r i b e d f o r F i r s t Y e a r :

1. PR O SE & PO ETR Y - D E T A IL E D T E X T BOOK.

“ T he T w o -H arm o n is ” by Sri A K . Srivastava.Published by M/s. G eorge Allen & Unw in Private Lim ited, M adras-2 . Price : Rs. 3-25.

2. N O N -D E T A IL E D T E X T BO O K .

“ N orna the M agician ” by Sic W alter Scott.Published by O rien t Longam an L td ., 36 M ount R o ad , M a d ra s -600 002. P r ic e : Rs. 2-50.

3. G R A M M A R T E X T BOOK.

“ A P rac tica l English C ourse ” w ritten by Sri N. D . V. Prasad R ao , Published by M /s, S, C hand & C om pany, .P rivate L im ited , S u ltan B azar, H yderabad-500001.

LIST O F B O O K S F O R SEC O N D Y E A R :

4 PR O SE & PO ETR Y - D E T A IL E D T E X T BOOK :

“ Selections from English Prose and Poetry ” ed ited by Dr. N. K rishna R ao and D r. C. Subba R ao , P ublished by M s. W riters A nvil, H . N o . 6 -1 -69 , Saifabad , H yderabad , w ilh the deletion o f the lesson “ The M erch an t o f Venice

5. N O N -D E T A IL E D T E X T BOOK.

“ C ontem porary Short Stories ” by L. A. H ill Published by O xford U niversity Press, M adras.

59

Two Year Intermediate Course-SyUabus Syllabus under Part II Languages

P 4 R T II T E L U G U

I N T R O D U C T I O N : f

The aim o f teaching the R egional Language or the M other Tongue should be to give th e S tudents ad eq u a te tra in in g in th® 'anguage so th a t th e y may rfot only acquire new know ledge th rough that langu'age bu t also develop the ab ility o r express them selve^ freely and clearly in th e sarne. 'The students have to be in troduced to the p ro p er study of th e ir own L ite ra tu re so th a t they m ay u n d e rstand and app rec ia te th e ir past cu ltu re . To achieve these ob jectives a profjer selection o f really good Poetry fo r crea tin g a Realthy litera ry tas te in the students, -and, liberal selection o f m odern Prose pieces on a variety o f in fo rm ative subjects to serve as M odels of good expression, shou ld be placed befo re the studen ts.

f IG rea te r im portance should be given to stan d ard classical Poetry

as th is gives the studen ts a souhB b is is fo r developing good taste for L itera tu re in general and fo r P oetry in p a rticu la r . P ortions w hich are sim ple and are free from e ro tic elem ent and artific ia lity o f ex ' pression m ay be included M odern Poetry w hich is obscene o th e rwise ob jectionable ma,y be scrupulously avoided.

The teach ing o f Prose is m ain ly in tended f o r tra in in g the studen ts in good alround expression M ere n a rra tiv e Prose does no t serve this purpose. U nless the n a tu re and characteristics o f Prose varie ties such as discussive, a rgum en ta tive , scientific, d ram atic , co n versa tio nal, b iographical etc., a re 'p ro p e rly understood by the studen ts, the ir pow er o f expression is bound to rem ain undeveloped. In o rder to tra in the students in these types o f Prose Selections som e passages on m odern subjects, have to be included for study . T he narra tive type of Prose may also be in troduced . The selections shou ld be sim ple, id iom atic and virgorcus. A rchaic and pedan tic form s and expressions should be avoided.

S y l l a b u s f o r f i r s t y e a r :

I. P R O S E :

50 pages o f classical Prose and 100 pages o f m odern Prose con ta in in g 8 to 10 selections represent ng all th e types o f selections may be m ade from the w orks o f ce lebra ted w riters and in preparing the texts, selections m ay be taken from the A nthology already prepared by Telugu A kadem i.

2 N O N -D E T A IL E D :

T here should be iwo non-detailed text-books. One a Novel of h istorical, b iograph ica l o r social back-ground and an o th e r a colle.c* tion o f sho rt s to ries an d /o r one A ct Plays. The XotaJ -number o f pages for bo th the tex ts should n o t exceed 300 pages.

3 G R A M M A R ;

The follow ing aspects o f gram m ar a re to be taugh t w ith reference to the prescribed Prose (P oetry ) Selections.Telugu Sandhis :

Pugagam a, N ug^gam a, Z ugagam a, T ugagam ^, ^D w iruktatakara, P ra tad i, tr ik a . am red ita , gasadada vadesa and sa ia ladesa .K a la d rita , P ra k ritik a L akshana, K rid an tas and T ad h itan tas , Telugu K arakas and six kinds o f Sam asas.

4. G E N E R A L C O M l> O S raO I^ : 10 Exercises.

5. N O N -D E T A IL E D C O M P O S IT IO N : 10 Exercises.

S y l l a b u s f o r S e c o n d y e a r

PO E T R Y ':

350 verses o f w hich 80 m ay be from M odern Poetry (no t less than5 represen ta tive selections from 'classical P oetry and 3 from M odejn Poetry) Selections m ay be m ade from the w orks o f ce lebra ted classical, m edieval and M odern Poets. In p rep arin g the Texts, Selections may b e ta k e n from the A nthology already p rep a red by Telugu Akadem i

D R A M A :

Plays o f Bhasa or plays qf .classical p a tte rn by s tan d ard A uthors may be prescribed.

G R A M M A R ;Sam skrita Sandhis - Savarria D eergha, G una, V ridhi, Y anadesa,

A nunasika and Visarga,

P r o s o d y :

A tavelad i, te tag iia , sisam , dw ipada, kandam , u tpalam ala , cham- pakam ala, sardulam , m attak o k ila and all the o ther m etres occuring in I he prescribed texts.

P o e t i c s :

(F ig u re so f Soeech)Sw abhavokti, u p a tia , rupaka . u ip reksha , a tisayokti. a rth an taran y asa . slesha and the sabda lankaras occuring in the prescribed texts.

61

L i t e r a r y a p p r e c i a t i o n :

K avya, kavyabhedas, (drisya, sravya, gadya, padya, cham pukhavya) K aV yaprayojanas, m odern lite ra ry form s (novel, sh o rt sto ry . One Act Rlay R ad io Play, vachana k av ita and geya.) K av y an iram an a and K avya Prasam sa.

TR A SL A T IO N : 10 Exercises.

C O M P R E H E N S IO N : 5 Exercises.\

T he passages tak en fo r com prehension shou ld cover specific subjects also. T he P u p ils 'm ust h b ta in a certificate o f bonafide w ork re la ting to th e exercises from the H ead o f D ep artm en t o f T elugu and countersigned.

B O O K S P R E S C R I B E D

F o r F i r s t y e a r

PR O SE : In te rm ed ia te T elugu Prose S elec tions-P ub lished by theA ndhra U niversity , W alta ir.

N O N -D E T A IL E D : “ P a ta li” by M allad i V asundhara , published by A n d h ra U niversity , W a lta ir , A P.

F o r S e c o n d y e a r

PO ETR Y ; In te rm ed ia te T elugu P oetry S elections-P ublished by the A ndhra U n iv e rs ity ,'W aM ir.

D R A M A ; “ S an th ip a th am ” by M alaya Sri, Published by Sri Venka- tesw ara U niversity , T irupa ti-2 . A .P.

62

63

P A R T I I U R D U

S y l l a b u s F o r F i r s t Y e a r

I. Prose. 2, N ovel. 3. G ram m ar.

T he follow ing po rtio n s in gram m ar are to be covered.

1. (a) Ism -lsm ekhas ‘Isma K aifia t. Ism e Z a rf’Ism a A la, Ism a Jam a.

(b) Law azim e Ism -Jins T ad ab H a la t.

2. Z am ir-Z am ir Shaksi, Z am ire M ausula; ,Z am ire Istifam i,Z am iri Ishara , Z am ire T ank ir.

3. F a il-F a ile Lazim , F aile M u taad d i, Fail M azi au r uski K hism en, F aile H a t, F aile M u^are, A m r F aile M ustakhbil.

S y l l a b u s F o r S e c o n d Y e a r

I. Poetry . 2. Short S tories. 3. E lem ents of Poetics,

The follow ing po rtio n s in poetics are to be covered.

1. A snafki T arif, G hazal, K hasida , M asnam i, M arsia , Q ata ,R ubai, M usaddas, M ukham m as, Sher M isra K hafia, R adhif, Z am in , M a tla . M aqtea.

f

2. S a n a t : Taslibih, Is lia ra , T alm ih , Tazad, R iayate Lafzi, Iham , T aju is, H usne, T alil, M abaligha, T a jahu le A rifana, Lafo Nashe.

B O O K P R E S C R I B E D :

F o r F i r s t y e a r

PR O SE S E L E C T IO N S : Published by M /s. S. C hand & 'C om pany,P riv a te L im ited , Sultan Bazar, H yderabad . Except the lesson, ( t) K aieera Kh M irza Z ah ard ar Baig Ka Y ah o n ’M ehm an Jana-by N azir.

NOVEL : ‘N irm ala ’ by Prem chand Published by M /s. H yder & Sons,B ook Sellers, C harkam an , H yderabad . (P rice Rs. 2 /-).

PO E T R Y SEL E C T IO N S : Published by M /s. S. C hand & C om panyL im ited Sultan Bazar, H yderabad 1, Except ‘■‘Jn taq u ab le -S h aru l Bayan by M ir Hussain.

ST O R IES : Selected S to ries-P rescribed for 1971-72 and prin ted by O sm ania U niversity , H yderabad. Except (a) M aa by S abber A bid H ussain and bj M auJvi-by K ishan C h an d ar.

PA R T I'l’ - H IN D I

TS y l l a b u s f o r F i r s t Y e a r .

> c

1. PR O SE ; One co llection o f P rose (Essays, S hort-S to ries, b iog raphies one A ct P la y s 'e fc .) o f abou t 100 pages, (o f m odern A u tho rs.)

2. PO ETR Y ; A ncien t 300 lines. 'M odern 600’lines.

3. N O N -D E T A IL E D ST U D Y :A co llection o f sh o rt s to ries o f abou t 150 pages.

4. A P P L IE D G R A M M A R : .U sages from th e P rose T ex t-B o o k .

5. C O M P O S IT IO N :

S y l l a b u s f o r S e c o n d 'Y e a r

1. PRO SE: One co llec tion o f Prose (Essays, Short Stories, B iographies, O ne A ct Plays e tc .,) o f abou t 100 pages (o f M odern A uthors.) <

2. PO ETR Y ; A ncient 200 lines.M odern 300 lines.

3. N O N -D E T A IL 'e D STU D Y ;

N ovel or B iography o f any g rea t persona lity ,

4 . G R A M M A R : C orrec tion o f sitences, change of gender, num ber & Voice. ‘

5. T R A N SL A T IO N :

64

F or Second Y ear

T E X T - B O O K S P R E S C R I B E D

F o r F i r s t Y e a r

1. PROSE : “ G ad y a lo k -P a rt 1” Published by M /s H indi P racharSabha, L. N . G u p ta M arg, N an ipally , H y d e ra b a d -l.

with the deleti.on o f the followin& lessons.

1. “ M anavki C handram apar Vijay”

2. “ K alidas Ke K avya”

3. “ Swami V ivekanand”

4. “ S w atan lra K e.B ees V arsh”

5. “ A n terik sha Paryavekhan K endra”

6 . “ M anavath 'a K.e M andir N ag arju n asag ar”

2. PO ETR Y : “ H indi K avya P arichaya” published by V idyarth iPublishers, k y d e ra b a d -1 (P rice : Rs. 2-25)

T h e f o l l o w i n g L e s s o n s o n l y

65

1. K abir — Sakhi

2. Surdas — Vinaya

3. Tulsidas — D ohavali

4. Rahim — D ohavali

5. F arioudh — K arm aveer

6 . G uptaji — Subha K am ang

7. Pant — Sandliya, M anavajeeva^

8. N irala — H eere-K i-K han, Bhikshuk

9. Subliadra K um ari .— M era Jeevan, T ukaradoyan P'yar K aro

3. N G N -D E T A IL E D T E X T ':

G alpa S am u ch ay a-P art II (P rice : 2-45) O m itting R oj, Bhuka Isw ar, G enius)Published by H indi p rachar Sabha, Hyder;>bad.

4, G R A M M A R - B o o k s re c o m m e ii 't f e d

Sarala H indi V y ak aran -P art I & I],D akshina B harat H indi P rachar Sabha, M a d ra s -17

PR O SE : ‘H indi G adya M an ja ri’ (P rice : Rs. 2/-) Edited by Sri M . R ajesw arayya, P rasad Pustak M and ir, K rish n am u rth y p u ram , M ysore-4 .

PO E T R Y : ‘H indi K avya P arich ay a’ P ublised by V idyarthi fu b ! i- ca tion , H y d e ra b a d -l (Price: 2-25)

66'

F o r Second Y ear

T h e f o l l o w i n g l e s s o n s o n l y :

1 . K ab ir — Pad a

2 . S urdas B alaleela, B hram ar G eei

3. T u lsidas — V arshavarnana, V inayapatrika B alacharita

4 . M eerabai — Pada

5, B hiliari — D ohe

6. G up ta ji — U rm ila-K a-V irahagana,Y asodhara

7. T rip a tb i — A nveshan

8. P rasad — Sonevale Jago , P rabodha gana, M anas-K a-T atpar

9. M ohadevi — Phool

10. R am akum ara V arm a — V isw abandhu Bapu, Aseem-Ke- Sm riti

l\ . D in k ar — B udha A hw an

12 . B acchan — M adhusala

13. G u ra jad a — M anuja

N G N -d e t a i l e d s t u d y -:

“ A dhikar-K e-P rasna” by B hagavati P rasadS. C hand & Co., Sultan Bazar, H yderabad (P rice : Rs. 2-75)

g r a m m a r :

TRA^ISLATION :Books recom m ended :

S arala H indi V yakaran - F a n H I D aksh in B hara t H indi P rachar Sabha, M a d ra s -17.

To-day the Languages o f the S tates are ga in ing more* im portance as the Languages o f ad m in is tra tio n and m edia o f in stru c tio n . So, the students are expected’to have a th o ro u g h know ledge o f th e ir own Languages and L ite ra tu res so th a t they can easily exj)ress the M odern ideas in all w alks o f life. H aving th is in view, the Syllabus is chalked out and Text-B ooks a re p rescribed re la ting to T am il.

Syllabus for First Year

PO ETR Y :

(a) A ncient (Sangam ) P oetry ab o u t 200 lines.(b) M edieval P o e try abou t 200 lines.(c) M odern P oetry abou t 200 lines.

T otal 600 lines.

PR O SE :

A bout 200 pages.T he read ing m a te ria l fo r f^rose should consist o f m a tte rs dealing

w ith the h is to ry o f the A ncient T am il, B iographies o f g reatm en and M odern developm ent p e rta in in g to Sciences and A rts in a G eneral way. The d ic tion m ust be L ite ra ry and the Language niust be pure.

Syllabus for Second Year

N O N -D E T A IL E D :

(M axim um two books only) dealing w ith classical an'd M odern L ite ra tu re o f Essay o f M odern in te rest o r b iographies o f em inent men or short sto ries o r a d ram a in Prose fo rm m ust be prescribed .

G R A M M A R :

The S tudents are expected to know the fundam ental rules of T am il g ram m ar. The teacher m ust have N annool as his guiding book The learn ing sutram s by h ea rt is n o t com pulsory. The questions must be based on the tex t book o f N A N N O O L . The teacher m ust im press upon the studen t th a t the learn ing o f gram m ar is to w rite correct Tam il and to learn abou t the history o f Tam il Language.

G E N E R A L C O M PO SIT IO N :

T he S tudent m ust be able to w rite orig inally and creaiively upon the topics b ased on A rts and Sciences and cu rren t m a tte rs o f Public in terest, N ational and In te rn a tio n a l. He m ust be guided by the teacher to .g a th er m ateria ls from the reference b o o k s.

67

PART - II ; TAM IL

T R A N SL A T IO N ;

The S tudents are expected to tra n s la te th e English passage into ind iom atic and co rrec t T am il. T he tran s la tio n m ust be free and not verb a tim . T he teach er should explain th e S tudents the Synthetic differences existing betw een T am il and English.

B O O K S P R E S C R I B E D : F o r F i r s t Y e a r

P O E T R Y ;

(1) T irukk u ra l-A ra th u p p al-C h ap te rs 1 to 10 C hap ters(2) C ilappatikaram -M angala V azathuppadal.(3) K am ba R am ayanam -K isk in ta K an tam “ A rusel P adalam ”(4) A siyajyothi-“S itta r ta n K e tta D eva G ee th am ”

Poetical Selections published by S, V. U niversity , T irupa th i.

P R O S E :

(1) “A rivekku V irundu" by D r. N . Subba R edd iar.The S .I.S .S . W orks pub lish ing Society.1/140, B roadw ay, M adras-1 (T am il N adu)

(2) “ K a ttu ra i M an iga l” by P. Sourira ja , M .A .,Paari N ilayam , 4, B roadw ay, M adras-1 (Tam il N adu)

For Second Year

N O N -D E T A IL E D TEX TS :

(1) Ilakkiyam -K oorum Tam izhar-.V azhiryal” by D r. Ilakkuvanar, V alluvanar P ath ipakam P u tukko ta i, T am il N adu.

(2) “ Soviet M akkalodu” by N . D . S undara V adivelu,Published by M /s. V anath i P a th i Pakam ,Pandi Bazar, T. N agar, M adras.

G R A M M A R :N annool - E zhutti y a l.

P A R T I I M A R A T H I

S y l l a b u s f o r F i r s t Y e a r

The Syllabus fo r the F irst Y ear shall Consist o f Poetry, N o n - D ctailed T ext and T ran sla tio n (U nseen Passage).

1. Poetry .2. N o n -D e ta iled Text,3. T ran sla tio n (U nseen Passage) (F rom English to M arath i).

68

The Syllabus fo r th e Second Y ear shall Consist o f Prose. G ram m ar. Essay and T ransla tion .

1. P ro s e .2. G ram m ar3. Essay4. T ransla tion (From English to M arath i),

Books Prescribed for First Y ear

PO ETRY :

“ S uv ern an au k a” C om plied by V. R. D havie andV. V. S harvadhkar, P ublised by M /s. D eshm ukh and Co.,739, B udhw ar, P o o n a -4 1 1002,

The fo llow ing poets to be deleted ;

(1) G ovind (4) V. R. K an t(2) M adhava (5) In d ira(3) B S. M ard h ek ar ( 6) Padm a.

N O N -D E T A IL E D T E X T :

M E E (A bridged) by H ari N aray an A pte, Published by A ryabhushan Press, G okhele R oad , P oona-4 .

Books Prescribed fo r Second Year

PR O SE •

“ A kshar C h in tam an i” ed ited by. B him arao K u lkarn i,Published by M ah arasta S ah itya P arishad , Poona-30 .

The follow ing au tho rs to 'b e deleted :( t ) E. K . K arb e , (2) V. D . S avarkar (3) G . T . M adholkar.

G R A M M A R : F o l l o w i n g t o p i c s t o b e s t u d ie d .

1) V arna V ichar

2) Sabdanchya Ja ti

3) V ibhakti4) Kal A ni A rth

5) Sam as

B o o k R e c o m m e n d e d

M a ra th i V yakaran By P. N Jhoshi, Veenas Bobk Stall, Poona.

69

S yllabus fo r Second Y ear

The C ourse for the Second Language in K annada shall consist of two Papers,


The first year course shall consist o f Prose and Poetry only.

S y l l a b u s f o r S e c o n d y e a r

The second year coursft shall consist o f N o n -D eta iled Study, G ram m ar, C om position and T ransla tion .

B o o k s P r e s c r i b e d ;

F o r F i i s t Y e a r

PRO SE :

“ H em avatiya T iradalli M athu I ta ra P rab an d h ag a lu ” (Pages 126, Price: Rs. 2-25) By G o ru r R am asw am y ly an g ar; Publised by H em avathi P rakasana JVIandir, G o ru r PO 32, H arane D t. K arn a tak a .

P O E T R Y :

“ K avya G a n g o tri” -M ysore U niversity , M ysore-12. Publication N o. 44. The fo llow ing Selections' a re pTescribed from this Book Lesson Nos. 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 13, 14, 15, 17, 21, 22, and 26.

F o r S e c o n d Y e a r

N O N -D E T A IL E D T E X T,:

“ Jyo th i P a th a ” by U .K . S ubbarayachar, publised by M/s Suruchi P rakashana, Sarasw atipuram , M yspre, K a rn a ta k a S tate.

G R A M M A R :

“ K an n ad a K aip id i” (Price ; 'Rs. 7/—), Rublished by M ysore U niversity .

T h e f o l l o w i n g C h a p t e r s o n l y

1) Sandhi P rakarana .2) D esya Sabda P rakarana .3) Anya D esya P rakarana .

C O M PO SIT IO N :Oo any subject o f P. U. C. S tandard .

•TR A N SLA TIO N :Simple Passage not m ore th an ten lines.

70

P A R T -Il KANNADA

S y lla ^ b u s f o r F i r s t Y e a r

P aper 1 w ill consist o f questions on the prescribed p o rtio n of P oetry , D ram a, G ram m ar an d Poetics.

(A) PO E T R Y ;P oetry o f the type found in ‘K ab ita S angraho’ published by

U tk a l U niversity for LA. C ourse h a lf o f w hich shall be classical,

<B) D R A M A : O N E A CT PLA Y S

<C) G R A M M A R :Sandhi, Sam asa, S trip ra tyayam , K artruvachayam , K arm avachya-

P re ra n a n h - the above po rtions only.

(D ) PO ETIC S :

U pam a, U tpreksha , R upaka, A tisayokti, SleSha, D ru stan ta , A rth an ta ran y asa .

S y l l a b u s f o r S e c o n d Y e a r

Paper II will consist o f questions on Prose, N on*D etailed S tudy , G enera l Essays, G ram m ar and T ran s la tio n .

(A ) PR O SE :

Prose o f types found in ‘S ah itya P ravesa ' P art II published by the U tkal U niversity .

(B) N O N -D E T A IL E D :

One book o f sho rt stories and one book of N ovel.

(C) G E N E R A L ESSAYS :(D ) G R A M M A R :(E ) T R A N SL A T IO N ;

B O O K S P R E S C R IB E D

For First Year

PO ETRY - “ K avita S anchayana" Published by U tkal U niversity .

The follow ing poem s only.1. A ind ra ja lik ara L avanyabatinku R am acharita P radarsana .2. S rik rishnanka G osh tha Bahuda3. S ee tankara K usala Prasna

71

P A R T -II ORIYA

4, K aikeyecnka B arap ra rth an are -D asa ran k a-p ra tik riy a .5. Jaganna iha Jananafj. M u H ata B ahuda7. M alaya A vahana8, Sephali Prati

Sukanasanka U padesa

D R A M A ; A d h u n ik a K ank ika S angraha by G . M isra & S. M ahapaiVa

The follow ing lessons only :

1. KabulivaFa by Sri P. K ara2. iiih a sa ra r a n h a s a by Sri H. M ahaiev3. A m ru tay an a by Sri L. Das4. Y ugaya^i by Sri K . P a tnayak5. Tyagi by Sri U. D as

G R A M M A R : (R eference Books)

S arvasara V yakarana V yakarana D a rp a n a

PO ETIC S ; (R eference Bvjok)Alankara Chandnka


PRO SE; (1) G a d y a S a n c h a y a n a , published by U tkal U n iversity .

T he fo llow ing Lessons only :

(a) P a ten t M edicine lb ) B udha D eva(c) B hagavata Jh a ra(d) R aja V ikram a O Yogi

(2) P r a v a n d h a & P r a v a h in k a , E dited by Sri K sh etrava» i

N ayak, M .A ., E tc.

T he follow ing lessons only :

(a) M ohasro ta by Sri B. K. K ara(b) Bhagya by Sri M .M . Senapati(c) D a la .G o sh th i& S am p i adaya by Sri B. Ray(d> Sam aja & R astra by Sri M . M anasim ha(e) A n tarara Bala by Sri B. M ah ap a tra

N O N -D E T A lL E D : 1. G alpa P akhuda by Sri S. A charya & O thers2. D asakum arat^harita by Sr; S ridhara

M ahapatra

72

T he fo llow ing lessons only :

(a) A van tisundarinka A n dra ja lika V ivaha(b) Bandi R a jav ah an a(c) U p a h a ra V arm anka K ath a(d) A rth ap a lan k a K a th a(e) A pahara V arm anka K a th a

G R A M M A R : (Books fo r reference)

S arvasara V yakarana by S rid h ara D as & N . M ah ap a tra V yakarana D arp an a by Sri G o p in a th a R a th a

P A R T II S A N S K R I T

The aim s o f teach ing Sanskrit as second Language a t this stage is to incu lcate A nvayajnana and im bibe cu ltu ral values o f the Languages.am ong the students. H ence rep resen ta tiv e selections from Poetry and Prose o f classical and M odern Sanskrit is recom m ended. Teach ing o f g ram m ar should be lim ited to ihe m inim um requ ired to ach ieve th e above aim s. T he study o f dram a w hich is m ore technical,

left for degree classes, and a sim ple non-detailed text is included.

S y l l a b u s f o r f i r s t y e a r

a. P O E T R Y ;

(a) Selections from puranas like R am ayana and M ahabhara ta A pprox im ate ly 100 verses.

(b) S u b h a s i t a s :

Verses o f D idactic and cu ltu ra l value A pproxim ately 50 verses.

(c) Selection o f one C an to from K avyas like R aghuvam sa and K um arasam bhava-A pproxim ately lOQ verses,

2 . g r a m m a r :

(a) Declensions : A jan ta Sadharana Sabdas, Sri & Siri ; P ro n o u n s ; Y at, T vai, K im , A sm ad, and Y ushm ad ;H alan tas : Bhishak, M aru t, A tm an. R ajan . G unin ;M anas : and Vidvat,

(d) C on jugations. “ Set ” Parasm aipadr and A tm anepadi roo ts in present im perfect. P o ten tia l im parative and second fu tu re o f conju g a tio n s I, IV, VI and X and th e roo t “ As " o f II conjugation .

(c) C o m p o u n d s: Sim ple D vandva T a tpu rusha a n d BahuvrihiSam asas.

73

74

In declensions and con jugations, s iud ea ts should m em orise one or two basic sabdas and should be able to decline or co n ju g a te sim ilar ones on basis o f analogy ' They should also be able to identify and give declensions or con jugations o f sim ilar nouns and verbs occuring in th e prescribed texts. In com pounds, the sHme type o f a tta in m en t is expected in th e m a tte r o f bo th identificaiioiv and giving v igrahavakyas.

S y a K b u s f o r S o c o n d y e a r .

1. P R O S E : Tw o or m ore pieces from classical texts like V ikra-m ark ach a rita , B ho jachariia , H itopadesa etc. 40 pages crow n size or 30 pages dem m i size.

2- N O N -D E T A IL : A tex t o f easy and in teresting S anskrit Proseconsisting o f 60 pages crow n size or 50 pages dem rai size.

3. t r a n s l a t i o n : An unknow n p rose passage o f no t m ore th a n10 lines consisting a sim ple story in easy

’ ' style. T ran sla tio n should be only fromS ansk rit to E n g lish 'o r R egional Language.

T E X T BOOKS P R E SC R IB E D

p o e t r y ; 1.

■2.3.

PROSE ; (1)

for first year

V alm iki R am ayana, K ish k indakanda . C an to 30 TDescriptibn o f “ S ara t ” (85 Verses) K alid asa -K u m arasam b h av a-C an io V (86 varses) B h artru h ari N iti S ataka. The follo\<?ing p ad d h a tis only.

, (a) M u rk h a(b) Vidvat^ ,(c) M anasaw rya and(d) P aro p ak ara

(Total 51 Versus)Selections Publ shed by M /s. S. C hand & C om pany y \ i L td ., Sultan B azar, H yderabad .

for second year

V ikram arka C harita : 1 S tory From

o c a s '

T o 'th e erid o m itting verses 27. 31 to 36 and 38(V avilla R am asw am y S asiru lu , E dition o f f950 in Telugu Scrip t)

(2) Bana ; —K adam bari : S ukanasopadesa only.Selection^ j^published by S. C hand & Co. Pvt.,Lid Sulian Bazar, H yderabad.

N ON D E T A IL E D ; ““G hadrapeedacharitafiiu-*’ published by M /s.R. S. V adhyar and 'S ons, P ublishers and Book Sellers, p a lg h a t-67.8003.

PA R T II P E R S I A N

T here will be Two papers of 3 hours d u ra tio n each.

S y l l a b u s fo r , f i r s t y e ^ r

Trahslajtioji g ra m m a r and C om position

TRA’NSI,A Tlor!4::-rTransl|^tiQ n^froni,® etsianitQ U rd u /E n g lish /H in d i/ ¥elueu"^

GftATyjM AJ^: toJife ^tu)liedLdI. U se .o f ‘Izafa^T " Us&>pf Tehs?s_3. P ro v e fb s^ n d "Adjeptives4. i jd ip m s aijd'Pro-verbs

C O M P O S IT IO N ;

Sy] l^bus for second vea^_Prose and Poetry

1 P R O S E :2. PO ETRY ;

Books prescribed for f i r s t year ■

1. M ufidul qaw aed (only the topics w hich are to be studied)2. Amxlajif-Nanla' Sit-L'afzi (onl:?,50 Mq,sders)3. G ulistane - Sadi (C hap ter 8, first h a lf )

,for .second ycay-

1. PR O SE : “ Parse ” (OBaraye Ki’las'e D oom D abjstan),F rom ,page 1 .to JOp, »

2. POfeTRY , 1. D wane Sadi Shirazi (F irst five' gazkls^'fromR adif A l i f )

*2 ' diw afl^ "Hafiz Shirazi' (F irst 5 gazals from R ad if A lif)

Books a re available at (Chaxe Bo,ok Sellers, G ran t R oad. Balaram S tree t, B om bay-7,

75

T here shall be Tw o papers o f 3 hours d u ra tio n .,J h e firist p ap e r shall com prise quesiions on G ram m ar, T arnsla- tio n and ihe Second paper on Prose, P oe try and N o n -D e ta iled Text.

'T ISYLLABUS FO R F IR S T Y EA R

G ram m ar, T ran sla tio n and L etter W riting(a) G R A M M A R : The follow ing topics. '

- a

; J U ' l - i t / l - A ♦ ^ *

(b) T R A N S L A T IO N : F r ^ A rabic in to M other T ongue(c) L E T T E R -W R IT IN G :

S y l l a b u s f o r s e c o n d y e a r1. P R O S E :2. PO ETR Y -: ' I3. N O N -D E T A IL E D STU D Y :

T e x t B o o k s p r e s c r i b e d : F o r F i r s t y e a r

G R A M M A R : (Books R ecom m ended)

(1) ‘ T u ru f Q uw aid A ra b t ’ by M aiilabi A bdul K areem , L ecturer in A rabic , A nw arnl- U loom College, H yderabad.

(2) K itab-a'I-sarb |1 By M au lana A bdul R ehm an A m ratasari

(3) K iti^lj-al'N ahu , -| \ . ■

T R A N S L A T IO N : > M ir^aj-a l-A rab iyya-P arts ) a n d 11 availab le from H ussain Book D epo t, P a th a r G a tli, H yderabad.

f o r s e c o n d y e a r

P R O S E : 1- A l-Q uran S uratu l F atiha and from Suratu lfeel toSural-N as.

76

P A R T II A R A B I C

5. Lesson N o. 25 to Lesson 44 from a l-M uta laa tus Sau- di>a p a rts I & 11 (available from Hussani Book D ep o t, P a th a r G a tti and M ak tab N asha t T ham ina , M uzzaip Zahi M ark e i, H yderabad .

3. f i r s t tw enty lessons from al-Q iraatur-R ashida-p .art 1 by M auivi A bul Hasan al N advi (avjiilable froiji N adw a B ook D epo t. Lucknow).

PO ETR Y : A l-M utalaatus S aud iyd-parts 1 & II

H O N -D E T A IL E D T E X T :

•Qisasun N ^thiyyin-liJ '-A tfal-part I (available from N adaw a Book D epo t, Lucknow .

S Y L L A B U S F O R R U S S I A N

( U N D E R P A R T I I )

S y l la b u s f o r F i r s t Y e a r

|[. P b o n e t x c s a n d O r t h o g v a p l i y i

Sounds and L etters. Russian A lphabet. H ard and Soft Consen- ants. Expression of Softness in w ritten form . Voiced and v o ice le^ C onsonants. Syllables and A ccent. S tressed and unstressed Syllables. Vowels in unstressed position . S ib ilan ts a^nd represen ta tion of vowels afier I'hero. S o fc ^ n d H ard m ark? {S ijns) as separa tion m arks. Peculiarities of p ronouncia tion o f M odern R ussian Language. Assf- tn ila tion^of consonants. In to n a tio n . Logical stress. ^

I L G v a m m a ^

1. G eneral Absence o f A'rii'cles. Om ission o f the lin k verb in preser>» tense. Dash instead of a -Link Verb. A ffirm ative. In te r

rogative and E xclartiatory-sentences and th e ir in ton a tio n . p em o i|- « tra tive pan ic les. N egative partic les. E lem entary C on juctions in •the sentence. .Stem and Ending o f a w ord.,

I A2. The N oun G ender o f R ussian N ouns. G en d er Endings.

S ingu lar anb Plural N um bers. P repositional Case to denote the place o f A ction. P r^ o s i t io n s ‘ B ’ and ‘ i l A ’. A ccusative Case t-o denote the ob jec t o f A ction and D irec tion o f M ovem en’-t. I p a t ’ive case to denote the addresses o f A ction an d Age. In stru m en ta l case to deno te

77

the In strum en t of A ction. Genetive' case in N eeative sentences.Genfetive case to deno te D irecton o f M ovem enl.» ' t

3. The P ronoun . Personal, Possesive, D em onstra tive and Inter-rogStive P r o n o in l Iêcl^nsion o f Pronouns in S ingular and Plural. G enetive Case a fte r C di'd inal'N um erals.

4. The A djective. G ender E ndings o f A djectives. D eclensionof A djectives in S ingular and'PTur4i. ' '

5. The N um eral. C ard inal and ord inol N um erals. The N oun after cafd inal N um erals. "’■lJdclensi6n 6 fT )rd ina l N um erals.

78

6. The Verb. In fin jt^ ^ , ]âî,ap^ F u tu re Tense of theVerb. F irst C o n juga tion . M odels o f th e first C on jugation . Second C o n juga tion . M odels < f, the. ^Second C on juga tion Im perfective and perfective Aspects.^ M otion "Cêfbs w ithou t Prefixes, Im perative M ood.

7. T he A dverb. F o r m a t i o n o f A dverbs f r o m Adjective®

S y l l a b u s f o r S e c o n d Y e a r

I. G r a m m a r :

The Noun.. P repcsitional caSe to dfefaote the ob ject o f Thdu- ’ght. Preposition O ” {0)1, iDstrume'ntal case to deno te t*he Consented A ction an3 place^ 'or'A'ct'ion! *“nog” “ M ag” “ z'a” ' “ nepeg” G enetive case to deno te beiongirig i'rid place o f ac tio n . P repositions “ bkogo’ , Coze, Cokpyz; nocpeguf Haîp6the’^ 'G enetive case to denote the date S>stem o f N oun D eclensions. D eta iled U sage <^caês t ) denote the p lace, Aim, (M otive), C ause, T im e ofâction!' D ative case for Irnpersonal sentenc,es. V erbal nouns. ^

'l. Yhe A djective. jV djectives in_the C om parative and Superlative D egree. 5>hort form o f adjectives.

3. T he N um eral. D eclension o f C ard inal N u m e ra l! 'O rdinal N um erals deno ting dates ; Y ears, m onths, days.

4. T he V erb. Ver^js of'^Motion w ith Prefixed. P reô’s'itionsw ith verbs o f M otion . ’ Verbs' o f M otion and A s p e c t’ Conditional Subjanctive M ood. " ^

' ' I 1 *

5. T he P reposition . Use o f P repositions w ith p a rticu la r Cases.

6. The A dverb. The corripahive and Superlative D egree of A dverbs.

II . S y n t a x ;

S ubord inate clauses o f differeni types are to be given practically D irec t and Ind irect speech.

I I I . E x a m in a t io n . :

!. A t the end of t^ e 1st year there will'b,e H oyse E xam ination th a t will test l*he can d id a te ’s know ledge in R u^yaU jG rapirnar by the p rac tica l exercises covering the w hole o f the G ram m ar Syllabus and V ocabu la ty fo r the Jst year.

2, A t the end o f the 2nd year only, there will be public Exam in a tio n , consisting; o f tw o papers; Pape^ I wilf test th e can d id a te ’s know ledge in R ussian G rajijm ar, by ,puJtingJQ -i,5 iG eneral Q uestions and p rac tica l Exercises, C overing the w hole o f the G ram m ar Syllabus and practical Exercise. C overing the w hole o f the G ram m ar Syllabus a^^d V ocabafa iy fo r the 1st a n d '2nd yearl

PA PER II will test the can d id a te ’s ab ility to understandiR ussian speech and to express his th o u g h t in R ussian and will consist o f the sum m ary rep roduc tion o f a passage o f story (ab o u t 150 words) rea’d to the studen ts in R ussian.

T e x t Bt^'oks, f p r Two^ Y e a r ^ ^ ijte r p ie d ia te C o u r s e

f o r P a r t I I R u s s ia n/ 1 ’ 1 I i-

B O O K ^ : 1, L earn ing Russian in 4 V olum es, By N. Potapova.^ Published by Rrogcess Publishers, M oscow. (Only

vojuojffsil,.and 2 are te q u ired ,fo r In term ediate)

2. Russian Exercises by S, A. K havron ina and A. I Shirocfienskaya. Publishe’ff'by “ Progress Publishers, M oscow (E xerc ises’ correspond ing w ith the g ram m ar gine in Book 1 a'fe tt) be 'com pleted).

3. Joki,i. A necdotes aVd Srinrt S tories. Published by “ Progress Publishers, M oscow” .

F i r s t y e a r I n t e r m e d i a t e t

1 s t V o l u m e o f Bcok I and-up to and inclusive o f 5')th lesson in V o l u m e 2 o f Book I to be com oleted.

79

S e c o n d y e a r I n t e r m e d i a t e t

From 60th lesson u p to the end o f Volum e 2 o f Book I to be com pleted , l a add itio n to regu lar class read ing o f the book by N . P o tapova (Book I) exercises given in Book 2 w hich correspond to the G ram m ar given in the book by N. PotapoVa should be given for class w ork and hom e work.

In ad d itio n to the above, an a d d i t io n d te x t eiltitled “ Jokes, A necdotes and short slo ries ” (Book 3) should be com pleted in order to strengthen the s tu d en ts’ know ledge in Russian.

In th is book . P a rt I should be com pleted in I year and p a rt II in II year In te rm ed ia te .

L earn ing Russian - V olum es 1 and 2 are availab le a t M /s. V isalandra Publishing H ouse, E lu ru R oad , V ijayaw ada 2

( F rom th e academ ic year 1976-77 )

S Y L L A B U S F O R F I R S T Y E A RI * h o n e t ic s :

In tro d u c tio n to sounds and R ussian A lphabet, word stress, R eduction o f vowels, A ssim ilationj Soft and hard consonants, In tb n a tio n . t

.G r a m i n a r :

]. Nouns : G ender, N um bet. U se 'o f noUns (in b o th singularand p lural) in N om inatiye , .P repositional, A ccusative, D ative and GenetiVe cases.

2. pronouns Personal p ronouns, possesive pronouns>D em onstrative pronouns^, in te rro g a tiv e p ro noun's, Declension o f all p ronouns in all the

I cases ejccept In stru m en ta l case,

3. Adjeciives: G ender, N um ber. D eclension o f A djectives inall cases except In stru m en ta l. S h o rt form s of adjectives.

4. Adverbs : Use o f ^dvetbs.

5. Verbs ' P resent, past and fu tu re tense. Im pera tivem ood. U se o f Infinitives in sentences. A spect o f verbs. Reflexive verbs. Some verbs o f m oiion .

80

N u m era ls : C ard inal num bers from 1 to I,COO.O rd inal num bers from I to 30,

7. Use o f con jcc tion and conjunctive w ords 'C H T O ', 'K T O ’, •G D E ’, ’K O G D A ’, ’K A K ’, ’K O T O R V r, ‘E S IP , etc.

8. Sim ple im personal sentences and o th e r constrgc tions used in conversation .

3 o o k s p r e s c r i b e d ;

1. ‘R ussian’ by V. N. W agner and Y. ,0 O vsienko (Lessons I to 29).

2. 'R ussian in Exercises’ by S. K havron ina and A S h irochena- skaya (Pages 15 to 149, 178-200, 207 and 228-238).

*

S c h e m e o f E x a m i n a t i o n i

The exam ination will consist o f tw o w ritten papers.

Paper-I G ram m ar and U sage M axim um M arks— 75

S tu d en ts’ know ledge o f g ram m ar covered d u rin g the first y ear should be exam ined. T he paper sho'uld co n ta in bo th objective type as well as general questions.

P a p e r-II T ran sla tio n and com position M axim um M a rk s—75\

Q u e s t io n -1 : T ransla tion from R ussian to English 20

(A passage conta in ing approx im ate ly 15,sentences taken from the exercises fo r ij*ansla cion ia the prescribed books wil! be set for translation).

Quesiion~2: T ran sla tio n from English to R ussian ' 20

(A passage con ta in ing approx im ate ly ^10 sentences taken from th.e exercises for tran sla tio n in: the p r is c n b e d books wilt be set fot tra n sla tion).

Q u e f t io n - 3 : A sho rt com position o f 15 to 20 sentenceson a very simple every day topic, covered in the syllabus. 23

81

Eg. M y fam ily My sphool M y city In the shop H oliday.

Q uestion-4 : A short passage- taken from the p rescrib idbooks should be givcD and the stu d en ts asked to answ er 4 to 5 questions on. th is 'tex t.

(SyJtabus for the second year :

1 Revision o f grSniAiar covfered during the' first y e a f! '

2. U se o f nouns, p r9nouns and adjectives, in the'J4}stpumental case.

3. C om parative and superla tive degree of adjectives.

4. V arious verbs a f m otion w ith o r w ithou t prefixes.

5. O rd ina l and collective N um erals an(J the ir declension.

^6. The u je o / I ^ p e r s o n a j ^^entepces j,nd the cond itional sub junctive m ood. -

7. Sim ple and com pouna sentences, u se of “ K o to ry i” in sentences.

8. D irect=and‘ ind irec t speecK.

9. P artic ip le . U se of sho rt jpartic lp le . ^

10. A ctive and Passive.r '

11. U s^ o f Vei;bal adverbs.

Books prescribed :•I t '

1. ‘R ussian’ by V. N . W agner and Y. G. O vsienko (lessons 30 to 43, 45 i’andl gram m an p o rtio n fin;leSsons'i44, 46, 47 and 48 )

2'. ^Russian in Exercises’ - By S. ‘K havron lna and S. Shiro* clienskayaX pages -158-208, 27il4.27S3,! 276-303 j.

’A vailable a f M/s, V jsalandbra Piibltsliirig H ouse, E luru R oad V ijayaw ada-2 , and in the Bookseller's"‘shops in the Twin C ities. ^

B o o k s B c c o m m ^ b d e d j

S e l e ' c t e d sto ries 'fro m so m e 'o f the/ollovvinR books may be read for com prehension purposes.

1) H o t stone.

2) A a au tum n tale.

3) Jokes, anecdotes and sh o rt stories.

4) M ai chicks konkam i.

5) Any o th e r sim ilar books available in the m arket.

82

83

Scheme of Examination :

P ap e r-I G ram m ar and Usage M axim um m arks—75

Q uestions covering the w hole o f the g ram m ar s> llabus for ihe first and Second year should be set.

P a p e r- ll T ransla tion and com position M axim um m arks-75

Quesrion-1 : T ransla tion from R.ussian to English

(a) A passage contaiTiing 15 to 20 sentences taken from the exercises for transla tio nin the p rescribed tex t books should be set. 10

(b) A passage con ta in ing approx im ate ly 15 seotences o f unknow n tex t having know n vocabu lary and g ram m atica l item s shouldbe set. 10

Question-2-. T ran sla tio n from English to R ussian : 15

A pproxim ately 15 sentences taken from the prescribed books should be set. The papei- se tter m ay give a choice; eg. by setting 25 sentences and asking th e studen ts to -tran s la te any 15.

Question-3 \ A com position o f n o t lesg, th an 150 w ords 25on a given to p ic (choice to be given). The stu d en t should be encouraged to w rite the essay in his own language and no t rep roduce verbatim lea rn t essays. 'H ence th e topics should be as varied as possible

Q uestion-4 \ A sh o rt sto ry con ta in ing approx im ate ly 250 15w ords is given and the studen ts asked io answ er questions on th is text.

SY LLA B U S F.OR G E R M A N

( UNDER. PA R T II )

F IR S T Y EA R :V ocabulary , G ram m ar, and syntax of the first part o f the

prescribed tex t-book

SEC O N D Y EA R :

V ocabulary , G ram m ar, and syntax o f the second part o f the prescribed text-book.

The Exam inatioa w ill be Conducted in the follow ing M anner

T he usQ o f a d ic tionary will no t be p erm itted .

PA PER —^

C oinprehension of a G ern ian Text G ram m ar.

PAPER— IIT ransla tion o f an English T ext into G erm an G ram m ar.

VIVA V O C E :

. R eading and sum m arizing a p repared text.2. C onversa tion in G erm an abou t the tex t.3,. A nsw ering general questions.

T E X T -B O O K PR E SC R IB E D :S c h a lz - G r ie s b a c h : D eutsche Sprachlehre fuer A usiander

G rundstu fe I and II .

SYLLABUS IN FRENCH

- (. U N D E R PA R T 11 )

Syllabus -for. the Two. Ye^r Internc^ediate Course

g ra m m a r , T ext & P oetry B ook :C ourse de langue etc., C iv ilisation Franpaises Book 1 By G . M auger, P ub lisher : L ib ra iric H ache tte , Paris.

I'In th e first year o f th e I^ntermediate th e studen ts should study

from Lesson I to Lessons 31 (inclusive). i They should also study the 6 poem s on pages 204, 5, 6, stop ing a t D e Jeuner du M atin which i3 the last poem to be stud ied .

In the Second Y ear, they will do the rest o f the 'lessons and poem$ in the book as also the docum ents a t the ei)d o f the book.

84

The book is readily availab le in India froirf the following addresses :

In te rn a tio n a l Book House,Brigade R o ad -B an g a Io re -1 .A tm a Ram and Sons,K ashm ir G ate , Delhi.

S c h e m e o f E x a m in a t io n

i* a p e r I : Prose, Poetry and G ram m ar.

Part I-D u ra tio n 3 hours-M axim um M ar^s 75.(lessons 1 to 31 o f the prescribed te^ t and first six pofm^).

Applied gram m ar based upon graipm ar in troduced in the lessons. Q uestions based upon the lessons.

P ap ier I I : Prose, P oetry and G rafllm ar; p a rt II-D u rd tio n ^ l i o u r iM aximum M arks 75.

(Lessons 32 to 65—docum ents a t tlie end o f the booR and poems beginning w ith “ L ” A utom ne).

I

Applied gram m ai based upon gram m ar in tro d u ced in the lessons. Q uestion based upon th e lesson^ arid docurhents in the book.

T o ta l M arks 150

SY LLA B U S IN O P T IO N A L M A T H E M A T IC S

Tl^ere shall be tw o papery con ta in ing 10 questions, each out of w hich 6 questions are to be answ ered. AU questions should carry equal m arks. T he d u ra tio n o f the paper is 3 hours each.

S y l la b u s F o r F i r s t 'V 'ear

X l GEBRA : Sets are R e la tio n s.-S e ts-S e t opera tions C artesian p ro duct o f sets-relations-E quivatcn t relations-com position o f relations Functions-A ssociated set function-A Igebra o f reaf valiied funiitioris

‘M athem atical Induction . “ ‘

T heory o f Indices and logarithn^s.

Surds.

Com plex N um bers.T heory o f q u ad ra tic expression alrid cquations-casy problem s th ere on involving tw o variab les also.

^5

P r o g r e s s io n s : A rith m etic progressions, G eom etric Progression H arm onic progression and A rithem etic-G eom etric progression. Sums o f squares and cubes o f n a tu ra l num bers and problem s connected w ith them

T R IG O N O M E T R Y ;

T rigonom etric ra tio s - th e ir re la tions to one ano ther.R ad ian M easureG raphs o f sin X ’ Cos X and T an X fo r all values o f X.F o rm u lae fo r sin (A + B ), Cos (A + B ) and T a a (A + B ). C onversion fo rm ulae fo r sum s in to 'p ro d u c ts and vice-versa. S o lu tions o f triang les (involving logarithm s also).H eights and d istances in one and m o re planes.G enera l so lu tions o f tr ig o n o m etric equations includ ing graph ica l m ethods.

P roperties o f triang les : Expressions for th e rad io o f c ircu m -circle. in circle and th e ex-circles.Inverse trig o n o m etric functions.

C A L C U L U S ;Id ea o f a fu nc tion (M app ing )-lim it o f a function con tinu ity . (G raph ica l no tio n only).D ero va tive-D eriva tives 'o f a sum , p ro d u c t, q u o tien t, fu nc tion o f a function .

PU R E A N D A N A L Y T IC A L G E O M E T R Y :

(N ote : A C and idate shall be p e rm itted to use any m ethod(Pure geom etry . A nalytical geom etry . C alcu lus o r T rignom etry ) in answ ering questions in G eom etry .

C artesion-C o-ord inates : D istance betw een tw o po in ts co-ord inates o f a p o in t dividing the .lin e , jo in ing tw o po in ts in a given ra tio . In ternally and ex ternally . Change o f C o-ord inate axes, tran sla tio n and ro ta tio n .

A rea o f triang le .E quation of locus.S tandard form s o f equa tions o f stra ig h t lia e .

PU R E G E O M E T R Y :

A given segm entjcannot be divided in a given ra tio a t m ore than one po in t.A stra ig h t line d raw n para lle l to one side o f a triang le cuts the o ther tw o sides p ro p o rtio n a lly (converse also):

86

I f tw o triangles a re equiangu lar tlieir co rresponp ing sides arc p ro p o rtio n a l an d conversely.

Syllabus F o t Secoad Year

A L G EB R A : P erm uta tions and com binaiions w ithou t rep e titio n (inc lud iag c ircu la r perm u ta tions)

B inom ial theorem for positive in teg ra l index ^ ro o f by in d uc tion o r by any o ther m ethod-prob lem s co nnec ted w ith B inom ial co-eifeci- -ents S ta tem eat o f B inom ial theo rem /fo r ra tio n a l index-Sim ple app lic a tio n s of B inom ial th eo rem in ap p ro x im atio n s.

P artia l frac tions.E lem entary theory of m atrices. A lgebra m atrices. Inverse o f a m a trix -D e te rm in a tc -A d jo in t m atrix solu tion of a system o f linear equations (w ith th ree unknow n only including G auss-Jordan m ethod).

T R IG O N O M E T R Y : C om plex num bers.; A rgand’s m ethod o frep resen ta tion - De M oivere’s theorem - Its sim ple ap p lica tio n s’’ H yperbolic functions.

S '^A T IS T IC S : F requency d is trib u tio n .

G raph ical rep resen ta tio n -H is to g ram , etc M ean -M o d e-M ed ian -D isp e rs ib n ' S tandard D eviation.N otion, o f p robab ility ; D efin ition o f sam ple spaces-AdditioTi and M ultification theo rem s-P robab ility involv ing com binations-E asy problem s S tatem ents o f Binom ial d istrib u tio n .F ittin g o f a stra ig h t line to a given data.

a n a l y .t i c a l .g e o m e t r y ^

Pair o f s tra ig h t lines.E qua tian o f bisectors.C ircle.Equatiorrs’o f T angent, Normal., Chord. Pole and Polaf.-Pair o f tange'nts from a po in t.

. O rthogna! circles.R adical axis C oaxal circles.

}

C A L C U L IJS : Successive d ifferen tia tion-L eibnitz th io rern d ifferential o f a function a n d 'its a p p lic a tio n ‘to sm all erro rs. A pplications

B7

(cartesian sys em): S lope-equations o f tangent and norm al-lenglh of tangent, sub tangen t, norm al and 5ub-norm'al Angle b^etween two curves-R aie sim ple app lica tion M axim a and M inim a of explicit funcdons of a single variab le .

In tegra tion as the inverse o f d ifferenciation-S tandard forms.

M ethods of in teg ra tion (including the metlio'ds of subsfstifuHon and by p arts )

Text Bpoks Prescribed :

Text Books F’H nted in Telugu for In term ed ia te C ourse b'yTefugli A cadem y, H im ayatnagar, H yderabad-500029.

SY L L A B U S IN P H Y S IC S

F i r s t Y e a r S y l la b u s

I. In tro d u cto ry C h ap te r, W hkt is Science? W hat is Physics?

Physics is fundam ental and exact science o f n a tu ra l w orld,-it tries to answ er the how and why o f an event o r chain o f events. Scientific m ethod. (M ethod by w hich new Scientific discoveries are m'ade, the m ethod by which science advances) steps'irfscitfntific m ethod: Sensing problem s defining and delim iting Problem s, recognising assumptions', p roposing hypothesis, devising con tro lled experim ents fo r testing hypothesis, in te rp re tin g d a ta , draw ing inferences from dkta, m aking generalisations, applying princip les to new situ a tio n . V ario u s« tep s in scientific m ethod to be illu stra ted w ith-one o r t\vo exam ples d taw n ’ from pjiysics (Rever J JB. C o h a^ t’s bpok on understand ing science). T he role o f d eduction and inductioh in .advancem ent o f kncW ledge to be illustrated w ith exam ples fro h i physics. L im ita tions o f science, physics and o ther sciences of n a tu re . S h p tt b iographical sketches of* scientists. (These b iograph ica l sketches should be p rep a red carefully and m ade an in te resting reading. They shou ld bfe given a t the end o f the relevant C hap ter).

J. A U N IT S A N D M E A SU R E M E N T S :

M easurem ent of length, m ass, tim e-fundam entaf un its and derived units - C. G. S. and M . K. S. U nits - R ange o f u n its from sm allest to biggest un its in the fundam enta l q u a n titie s -S u b u n iis an d m ajo r un its ' to be expressed in pow ers o f ten.

T he ideas o f d im ensions and d im ensionality o f some physica{ qu an titie s - Exam ples : (1) A rea, (2) V olum e, (3) V elocity,(4) A cc e le ra t ion , (5) M om entum and (&) Force.

88

M easurem ent o f Length :

Principle o f vern io r for linear and circu lar scale-vernier callipers and its use. P rincip les o f the screw, screw guage and its use. Spherom eter-M easurem ent of rad ius of curvature.

M ethod o f weighing, a body correct to a m illigram using a physical bala'nce. (D esc rip tio n 'o f balance not necessary).

ri, D Y N A M IC S ;D isplacem ent, speedrV elocity-U niform and non un ifo rm ,velocity

ifm e curve - Its us6s. A cceleration — U niform and non uniform , derivation o f tee form ulae fo r uniform acceleration (I) v = u-l-at(2) S = ut + ^at^ (3) v2— u2 = 2as

M otion o f falling bod ies and accelera tion due to gravity and corresponding equations o f m otion :

- N ew ton’s Laws o f m otion. F irs t Law; concepet of Inertia and p rac tica l exam ple o f force. Types o f force: M om ent and second law: D erivation o f f= m a . U nits o f force N ew ton and D yne’ N ew ton 's universal law o f g rav ita tio n and g rav ita tio n a l constan t-varia tio of ‘g’.

M otion o f planets: K ep ler’s laws-esc'ape V elocity of projected bodies.

ThirdL aw of M otion.L aw o f conservation of m om entum -practical ap p lica tio n to Je t planes and ro ck e ts-tak e off velocity o f rockets.

W ork, pow er and energy and the ir units, and expression H. E. and K .E .-L aw o f conversation o f energy and its p ro o f in the case of freely fa lling body.

A ngular M otion;' A ngular -V elocity-U niform c ircu lar m o tio n - N arm al accelorationT D erivation o f fo rm ulacen trif e ta l and centrifugal forces-A pplications centrifugtil -pum ps- Banking o f railw ay track .

• Sim ple harm onic m otion and derivation o f form ulae fo r sim ple pendulum :

IIL S T A T I C S ;E<^uilibrium o f a body under tw o fo rces-V ecto rs and scalacsw jth

cjfam ples-C om position o f fo rce law o f para lleg ram forces. R esolution o f fo rce in to rec tan g u la r com ponents.

. 89

IV.. PR O PE R T JE S OF M A T T E R :

The th ree s ta te s o f m a tte r and th e ir d istinctive propertfes. E>eterniination o f S. T. by capilfery rise (for licjuid w etting ih e so lid) H yvae pum p - M C. leod gauge,

SO L ID S ;

Eliistadty-Bfehpavicrjr o f a wire wnder inCTeasing load- D efinttiori and ex p lan a iio a o f th e IVlodul o f e lasticity ‘Y ’ tvy stre tch ing .

V. H EA T A N D T H EK M O D -Y N A X IlC Sr

Q u an tity o f H eat: Sp. H eat and la ten t heats, (q u a lita tiv e lreaitment>- G dlorifie values o f fue la a n d foodsv

E xpansion o f so lids - R e la tio n betw een linear, surface, andi volum e co-effici'ents-D eterm ina4;ion,of co-efficient -of lin ea r expansion!

m achanical lever m ethod .

E xpansion o f liq u id s- A pparerrt and absofuter co-efficients' - D eterm in a tio n o f ap p a ren t co-efficient w ith specific g rav ity b o t t le -A n a m o - Fous expansion o f w ater ^nd its im portance in n a tu re . '

ExpanM on o f gases - Pressure an d vo lum e co-efScients - ch a rle s Law ' Experim ental d e te rm ina tion o f the co-efficients- Gas- therm om ete rs - A bsolute scale d e riv a tio n o f g as e q u a tie n .

C hanges o f s ta te - Law o f fu sio n - change o f m e lting p o in t witln pressure - Super cooHng - E vapora tion S a tu ra ted and u d sa tu ra te d vapours; - Law s o f vapours - F ac to rs affecting evapo ra tioa .

Boiling ' Cfiange o f boiHng p o in t- W ith Pressure - S uper healing . (Q ualita tive trea tm en t en ly .)

SY L L A B U S F O R 2 n d Y E A R

Surface Tension : Explanatierrf on m olecular th eo ry - Spread ing o f liquids - C ap ilarity and p rac t cai exam ples - P loughing, abso rp tio u of w ater by p lants.

V is c o s i ty t I ts Expranation.

G a s e s s Boyle’s Law; - and its verifica tion .

T herm odynam ics: C oncept of m echanical equ ivalen t o f hea t Is£ law o f therm odynam ics - Isotlie?m al and ad iabatic processes.

9 0

T r a n s m i s s i o n o f h e a t : C oriductioa:- D efim tion o f therm al conduction - H eat, C onduction M ethod .

Convection : E lem entary ideas.

VI. LTOHT :R efraction ; C ritical angle and its d e te rm in a tio n w ith prism .

R efraction th ro u g h a prism -D erivaiion o f the fo rm ula for

u = Sin ( A + D ) / 2 Sin A /2

C O N V EX A N D C O N C A V E M IR R O R S :

D erivation of re la tion betw een u , v and f Sign conven tion . M agnification. D eterm ination o f focal length o f concave and convex m irro rs

R E F R A C T IO N T H R O U G H L E N S E ^ ;I 'D erivation of the re la tion betw een u, v and f s ta tem en t o f the

fo rm ula fon f in te rm s o f u and .red il o f surfaces. Focal pow er o f a- lens. S tatem ent o f fo rm ula fo rF ocal length o f tw o th in lenses invcon-, tac t. D eterm ination o f F ocal length o f convex and concave lenses.

O PT IC A L IN S T R U M E N T S Sim ple m icroscope - R am sden’s eyepiece.

C om pound m icroscope fo rm ula fo r m agnify ing pow er (sta tem ent only). A stronom ical telescope and te rrestria l telescope (description, only). R eflecting telescope, and its ap p lica tion in A stronom y.

D ISPE R SIO N O F L IG H T :

Pure spectrum and a rrangem ent to p ro d u ce it, sp ec trp n ie te r and; d e te rm in a tio n o f U -K inds o f spectram ission and abso rp tio n spectra- FraunhofFer-lines-C ontinuous, lines, and band spectrsL. In fra red and u ltra v io let rays-their p roperties and uses.

V ELO CITY O F L IG H T :

F o cu lt’s m ethod-descrip tion only-W aves; wave p roperties, v = n R ipple tan k D em onsta tion . Sim ple m easurem ents, H erggen’s wav^e P rin rip le-E xp lanation o f reflection and re frac tion

V ll. S O U N P :

L ang itud ina l and transverse w aves-R esenance w ith exam ple^-Sta- tio n ary and progressive w aves-V elocity o f sound in a ir by resonance liietbod. C h arac te ris tics of m usical n o te .

91

VIII. M A G N E T IS M ;

M olecular th eo ry o f m agnetism -C ouple ac ting on a m agnet-D erivation o f the expression, Field a long the axial line o f bar m agnet; Field on th e eq u a to ria l line and th e ir d e riva tion D eflection m agneto- m eter-D escrip tion and p rincip le-C om parisen o f m agneiic m om ents in tan A and ta n B positions-V arification p f universe square Law,

IX. e l e c t r i c i t y : '

S ta tica l e lec tric ity -F ric tional e lectncity -T W O kinds o f charges- C onducto rs and in su la to rs-Induc tion -charg ing by induction-G old leaf e lec troscope-F arday’s experim ents-E lectric field and p o ten tia l- p rincip le o f condenser-C apacity-Effect o f d irec tion on capacity-U ses o f condenser.

nC U R R E N T E L E C T R IC IT Y :

Laplaces, low and un it o f cu rren t and cJiarge-T angen t gal sonom eter m easurem ent o f cu rren t m oving coil galvonom eter-O bm s L aw - U nits o f resistance’and p e ten tia l diffe^fence-Specific resistance-Hrinci- ples o f shun t-vo ltm eter and am m ete'r. V erification o f O hm ’s Law using constan t E .M .F .

' I

P rincip le o f W hetston’s net-M eter B ridge-M easurem ent'o f resistance.

P o ten tiom eter-C om parison o f E .M .F i’s o f two cells E L E C TR O - LYSIS-Laws and 'delerm ination o f elecirochem ical equivalen t o f copper and hydrogen .

H e a t in g E ffe c ts : Joules L aw -determ ination o f J-electri'c lightspow er cbnsum ptidn-kilo W att-hour.

I I

X. M O D E R N PH Y SICS : . -

(E lem entary trea tm en t o f th e fo ilow ing topics)

D ischarge o f electecity th ro u g h gases-C athods rays discovery of the electron.

I

Positive rays-p ro ten an d its mass X -R ays-C oolide tube pro'perties and uses. R ad io ac tiv ity -P ro p erties o f a, b an d r rays law o f R adio active d isp lacem ent-H alf life period indusced rad io -ac tiv ity -rad io isotopes.

E lem entary ideas o f the s tru c tu re o f a to m w ith special reference to H ydrogen a tom .

92

«» ^N uclear Fussion and Fusion-N uclear energy anb its uses. The

equivalence o f m ass and energy, e/ni by T hom son’s m etfiod.

L I S T O F t X P E R I M E N T S IN P H Y S I C S

F i r s t Y e a r

1. C alipers-m easurernenl o f length.1

2. Sciew gauge-m easurem ent o f lengili.

3. S pherom eter-R ad ius o f cu ravatu re , ,

4. B alance weiging to a m illigram .

5. Sim ple pendulum -deierm ination* of g.

6’. P a ra lle lo g ta in law o f forces and trtang le law.

7. Paralle l forces-study o f the laws

S. Y. by stre tch ing .

9. Study o f the re la tion betw een volum e and pressure of a gas.

10. Surface tension-cap illery size.11. A pparen t coefft o f expansion-S .P . gr. bottlcf

12. Sp. h t. o f solid m ethod o f m ixtures.

13. L aten t hea.t o f v a p o risa tio n .o f w ater.

S e c o n d Y e a r

1.. Concave m irro rs-de te rm lnation o f focal length.

2. C onvex m irro f -d e te rm in a tio n 'o f ‘f ’ by^parallex method,.

3. Focal leng th of.convex lens.4. j-D 'curve w ith a p r is m and ref. inde’x -p itf B ikh^d'.

5. S pec tro rae ter'-de te im ination o f angle o f prism .J “i t 1 I

6. Spectropaeter-detprm inatjon o£,ref. index-m in. derivation .

7.. D ete rm in a tio n o f V elocity o f sound-resonaace colum s. i

8. M app ing the com bined field o f a b'ar m agnet and the EaYth.N eu tra l po in ts.

9. D eflection m agnetom eter.(b) C om pression o f m agnetic m om ents.

10. T .G . M easurem ent o f cu rren t.,

11. S tudy o f O hm ’s law R -cot g raph .

12. M etre-b ridge-determ ination o f Sp. resistance,

13. Po ten tiom eter-C om parison o f E .M .F .’s

93

14. C opper V oltm eter-e. c. e. o f copper

]5, Jo u le ’s C a lo rm eter-dete rra ina tion o f *J’

P A R T 111 — C H E M I S T R Y

S y l l a b u s F o r F i r s t Y e a r

C hapt. J. C H E M IS T R Y -A N E X P E R IM E N T A L SC IE N C E ;

Types o f C hem ical reac tions - com bination , decoinposition , disp lacem ent and double decom position; Energy change in chem ical reactions; and M ass-energy re la tionsh ip .

C hapt. 2 ST R U C T U R E O F M A T T E R :

A tom s and moIecul.es-eailieT .views of the atom ; Law s o f chem ical com bination ; A tom ic masses and m olecular weights; M odern views on the s tru c tu re o f atom (electron , p ro to n and neu tron); A t o m i c njim ber; B ohr’s m odel o f hydrogen atom ; E lec tron ic c o n f i g u r a t i o n o f atom s-hydrogen, helium , carbon , n itrogen , oxygen, sodium , chi i- rine , po tassium , m agnesium , calcium , iron and alum inium ; and A to m ic o rb ita l m odel (s. p and d o rb ita ls) - shape and num ber of e lec tro ns in an o rb ita l.

C bap t. 3. H O W A N D W H Y ATOM S C O M B IN E ?

S tab le e lec tron ic configuration ; Low ering o f energy fo r stab ility .

(a) I o n i c B o n d in g s Ion ization p o ten tia l; E lectron affinity; F o rm ation o f ionic com pounds; Packing o f ions in crystals o f sodium ch lo ride and cesium chlo ride; and’ P roperties o f ionic solids.

i(b ) C o v a l e n t B o n d in g : Sharing o f e lectrons, e lec tron dot

form ulae o rb ita l overlap ; Bonds betw een atom s of^same elem ent, bonds betw een atom s o f 'd iffe ren t elem ents; E lec tro n eg ativ ity , ionic ch a rac te r o f covalen t bond; M ultip le bonds; Shapes m olecules hydrogen ch loride, w ater, am m onia, T nithane and carbon dioxide (Bond angles and bond lengths); ^nd P roperties o f covalpnt com pounds,

C hapt. 4. B EH A V IO U R O F G A S E S :

M easurab le p ro p erties o f gases; K in e tic m olecular theory o f gases; Pressure and gas volum e, tem p ara tu re .an d gas volum e, gas equation ; K inetic energy o f gas m olecules and gas pressiirc, tem p ara iu re and gas pressure; G ay Lussac’s law and A vogadro’s la\V of diffasioo: and M olecu la r w eight by vapour density m ethod (V ictor M eyer).

94

C hapt. 5. SO L U T IO N S ;

Types o f so lu tions-sa tu ra ted . u n sa tu ra ted and supersaturated*and their solubility ; H eat .chaoges accom panying so lu tions; Effect o f tem - p a ra tu re on so lubility ; M ethods o f expressing co n cen tra tion m olar and m olal so lutions; E lectro ly tes and non-electro ly tes; Ion ization ; and E lectro lysis.

C hap t. 6. C H E M IC A L E Q U A T IO N A N D C A L C U LA TIO N S :

F o rm u lae - em perical and m olecular; E quations - m elecular and ionic; and C alcu la tions based on equations.

C hap t. 7 W A TER A N D H Y D R O G E N P E R O X ID E ;

C om position o f w ater; D ipole n a tu re o f w ater; W ite r and hydrogen bon d j'H y d ra tes; H eavy w ater; H ydrogen perox ide-fo rm ation , oxid ising and reduc ing p roperties .

S y l la b u s P o r S e c o n d Y e a r

C hap t. 1. P E R IO D IC C L A S S IF IC A T IO N O F ELEM E N T S :

P eriod icity o f p roperties; L ong form o f th e period ic tab le; E lectro n ic configura tion o f a tom s and period ic tab le; Typical periods of elcm ents-elem ents o f periods 3 and 4; and a typical fa'mily o f eleme- n ts-e lem en ts 'o f 1 A g roup (alkali m etals).

C h ap t. 2. H A L O G E N S-G R O U P V ll-B E L E M E N T S :

E lec tron ic configuration ; Physical and chem ical chaiac teris tics; E xplanation p f th e above ch a rac te ris tic in term s o f a to m ic s tru c tu re ; and general m ethods o f p rep a ra tio n o f halogens, p rep a ra tio n and reac tio n s o f hydrogen halides.

C hap t. 3. O X Y G E N -S U L P H U R F A M IL V -G R O U P VI-B ELEM EN TS (O X Y G E N A N D SU L P H U R ON LY )

G enera l characteristics; R eactions o f oxides w ith w ater; O xidatio n process-oxidation and reduction (elec tron ic concept); Balancing- cx id a tio n -red u c tio n equations; and O zone-prepara tion and p roperties.

4

C hapt. 4. N IT R O G E N F A M IL Y -G R O U P V-B ELEM EN TS N IT R O G E N A N D PH O SPH O R O U S O NLY);

E lectron ic configuration; G eneral ch a rac teris tic s w ith particu la r reference to oxides, hydrides and halides; and O xidation sta tes of n itrogen in its oxides.

95

C hapt. 5, a c i d s A N D BASES :

D efinitions o f acids and bases; N a tu re o f hydrogen ion; H ydrogen ion concen ra tion and pH sc^le; Low ry-B ronsted theory and Lewis concept o f acids and bases; and H ydrolysis o f salts (qualita tive).

C h ap t. 6. T IM E A N D C H E M IC A L C H A N G E :

Slow and fasi reac tio n . R ate o r reac tio n fac to rs influncing the reaction ra'te tem p ara tu re , cd n cen tra tio n and cata lyst; and Law o f mass action collision theory (elem entery trea tm en t).

E q u i l i b r i u m ;

R eversible and irreversib le reactions; recognizing equ ilib rium dynam ic n a tu re , equ ilib rium sta te ; F acto rs affecting equilib rium ; Le- C h a te lie r’s p rinc ip le and its app lica tion to syntheses o f am m onia and form atioQ o f su lphur triox ide.

C hapt. 7, A L K A L IN E E A R T H M E T A L — G R O U P Il-A ELEM EN TS :

E lectron ic con figu ra tion ;’P hysica l'and C hem ical characteristics; and E xplanation of th e ch a rac teris tic s jn term s o f a to m ic stru c tu res .

C hap t. 8. M E T A L S ;

G enera l p rincip les o f m etaH urgy; E x trac tio n o f th e follow ing m etals from th e ir o res-copper, alum in ium m agnesium and iron alloys; and G eneral m etjiods o f fo rm a tio n , pr6 'perties; com pbsitioif and uses o f th e alloys o f coi>per. alum ini,um , m agnesium an d iron .

C hapt. 9. C H E M IST R Y O F C O R B O N C O M P O U N D S :

G eneral p ro p erties o f o rg an ic com pounds; G eo m etric s tru c tu re o f carbon co m p o u n d s-te trah ed ra l n a tu re o f carbon ; B onding in ca rbon com pounds and general m ethods o f p rep a ra tio n ' ‘o f m ethane, e thane, e thy lene.acety lene, m ethy l brdm ide, ethyl alcohol, chloroform , ethyl e ther, ace ta ldehyde an d acetone; and E lem entary ideas on the s truc tu re and p ro p e rtie s o f glucose, sucrose, fa ts and p ro teins.

P r a c t i c a l W o r k

f Y e a r

1. Study o f bunseri bu rner.

2. C onstruc tion o f wash bo ttle .

96

3. Types o f chem ical changes ;

(a) Burning o f m agnesium .

(b) A ction o f hea t on

Pb (N o2) or Cu (N o3)2 ZnFeC uso4 solu tion Fe and CuSo4 solu tion M g and CuSo4 so lu tion Cu and CuSo4 solu tion

(c) D ouble deco m p o sitio n -reactio n betw een m agnesium sulphate and barium ch loride.

4. Types of so lu tions and energy changes in solu tions.

5. L ab o u ra to ry te c h n iq u e s : ’S im ple m an ipu la tion o f decen ta tion , filtra iions, d istilla tion sublim ation an d crystallisation ,

t>. P rep ara tio n o fi) (a) CuSo4 ^ n d (b) FeSo4 C rystals.

ii) (a) Oxygen (b) H ydrogen (c) Sulphur dioxide and(d) C h lorine.

7. S tudy o f the reac tions o f ' j

(a) Silver, lead, m ercurous m ercury , copper, ferrous iron, ferric iron , a lum inium , zinc, m anganese, barium , qslcium , m agnesium , potassium and am m onium .

(b) A n tons-carbonate , b icarbonate , su lphide, su lph ite , th iosul p ha te , su lphate , n itr ite , n itra te , ace ta te , ch lo ride , brom ide, iod ide and phosphate .

8. Use o f a chem ical b a b n c e and the s tan d ard isa tio n of Tt ac tional weights.

i

9. D eterm in a tio n o f the loss o f weight on ignition.1

I I Y e a r

1. C hem ical equilib rium -L e»C hate lier’s principle(E xperim ent 16-R ao and A garw al), j

2. A study o f reac tio n ra tes (E xperim en t 14-C hem ical study)

3. A n in tro d u c tio n to o x ida tion and reduction (E xperim ent 20-C hem ical s tudy)

97

4 A study of th e properties o f acids aad bases.

5. D eterm ina tion o f the hydrogen ion concen tra tion o f so lu tions using ind icators.(E xperim ent 18 C hem ical study)

6. V olum etric analysis :

(a) C a lib ra tio n o t b u re tte an d .p ip e tte

(b) P repara tion o f s tan d ard sodium carbona te so lu tion and s tan d a rd isa tion of hydroclo ric acid

(c) i) P rep ara tio n o f O IN solution o f hydrocloric acid from hyd roch lo ric acid o f knew n sirengtlj

ii) S tandard isa tion o f sodium hydroxide so lu tion

(d) T itra tio n involving tw o acids w ith an alkali so lu tion as link.

(e) P rep ara tio n o f s tan d ard oxalic acid and s tan d ard isa tio n o f potassium p erm an g an ate

(f) T itra tio n o f ferrous am m oniun? su lpha te and oxalic acid using po tassium p erm angana te as link

7. System atic qualita tive-analysis o f a sim ple sa lt con ta in ing a cation and an an ion studies in th e first year.

8. R eactions o f

a) E thyl alcohol b) A ceta ldehyde c) A cetone an d d) glucose.

9. C rite ria o f pu rity o f o rgam c com pounds-bo iling p o in t and m elting point.

P A R T i l l - B O T A N Y


T H E O R Y

1. T H E PLA N T K IN G D O M A N D ITS C L A S S IF IC A T IO N ;

B road classification o f the p lan t kingdom w ith the follow ing'exam ples (a b rie f account o f th e ir s tru c tu re and rep ro d u c tio n to be given) C hlam ydom onas Spirogyra, Batracliospermiim, Rhizopus, jiiccio, Selagineila, Funarta, Pteris & Cycas, G eneral character's of d ico ts and m onocots w ith bean and m a iie and examples.-

2. A general account o f B acteria & Viruses.

98

II. E X T E R N A L M O R PH O L O G Y :

A b rie f accoun t o f the geaeral m orphology o f angosperm s-forrof of inflorescenes flow er, P o llina tion , F e rtilisa tio n , F o rm atio n o f F ru it a n d SeW deVelopm ent-iD ispersal of. f ru it ?i)d, seed-m odif^cation of Root & stem .

III, IN T E R N A L M O R PH O L O G Yr

1. S tru c tu re of a P lan t Cell : Cell wall, cy top lasm , Plastids and N ucleus : ou t lines o f M itosis and M eiosis (this should

' •'be dealt in a veiy e lem entary m anner and no-e jec tron micrO' scope s tru c tu res o f the cell and cell organelles need be given) S tru c tu re o f a p lan t cell-under.electn3n,in ici;oscopf, chloro- p'last’ an ti'M itochondria^ i’

•2. Elemfcntary descrip tion ^ fr Ghromospnijss, .^Nupleic Acids ■RNA‘&>DNA.

3. Celt type fo rm ing tissues; T issue system ; In te rn a l struc tu re of R oo t, Stem and L eaf (d ico t and m onocqt);O orm al Secondary ih ickening in d icot stem and root.

PR A C T IC A L

1. D raw ing sketches from p re p ire d slides o f plants m entioned in iiem I (I) o f the theory syllabus, and,identif^ing.i|ip ,n i.

2. Sketching and explaining^the m orpho log ical fe3,titrQ?,of:9ow£ring •plant organs m en tioned in item 11 o f the th eo ry syllabus.' * ! - /( . ' 't • I

3. M icroscopic study sk etch ing .•and .iidcn tificatipo <?f the plant tissues and th e ir anatom ical ch a rac te rs from prepared slides and own p rep a ra tio n s o f p la n ts m entioheddniy item IIK (\^ theory syllabus

Note: The C and idate has to subm it reco rd o f w ork done in the , I Y ear at the p rac tica l E xam ination .

^ I

S y l l a b u s f o r S e c o n d V eai*

T H E O R VI. T E X O N O M Y :

A system atic study o f the follow ing fam ilies: A nonanceae Cruel

99

ferae, Legum inaceae, M alvaceae C om positae . A pocynaceae, Solanaceae, L ab ia tae , Euphonbiaceae, and G ram inae .

II. PH Y S IO L O G Y :i

1. T he very elferaentiiry-•îscusîon of the functions-functions o f ihe constituen ts o f the liv ing cell, cell wall. C ytoplasm , Plasm a m em ran , P lastids & Nucleus.

)2: Soils and th e ir classification on the basis o f Physical

arialysis.)

3? (Vfineral tiu tr itio n -a a d essefttial elem ents in p lan t n u tritio n .

A bsorp tion o f sa lts by roo ts . .A n e lem entary discussion o f the ascent o f sap. T r^jjsp iration ;

'GoFbon assim iliation by the green p lan t: f^ptor?, influencing the sam e; a b rie f accoun t o f th e m ech an is iii 'p f p h o to synthesis.

6 f Sources'oF N itrogen -N itrogen .cyC le in natu re . ,t

7. R csp 'ra tio ii: F ac to rs influencing resp irasion -B rie f accounto f th e steps in the 'B r ^ k Vjown o f sugars in resp ira tion ; A erobic and A naerobic.

8. Enj^ytilfcs and V itam ines: An e lem entary discussion.

9. GerrSiWation: F acto rs in fluen ting germ ination : Dorn)an,cy

10. G row th - F ac to rs influencing grow th - auxins aod their importstncfe in agi-ioulture.

11. 'M ovem ents - G eneral a c c o u n ti-

III. E C O L O G Y :,( -

1. An e lem entary knowlet/gfc o f hyd5"ophytbs, ’ lAesophytes & X erophyets (M orphological and an a to m ica l adap ta tions)

2. H e te ro tro p h ic nu trâ tion P arasites. Saoronhvtes. Symsonts and Insectivorous plants!

100

IV. H ER E L IT Y ;

I , M endle 's laws o f Inh eritan ce w ith exam ples from p lan ts as well as an im als M ono and D ihybrid ra tio s.

2 Role o f p lan t b reed ing in crop im provem ent; Selection and hybridisati“oii (s'hould be deaU iri a very fel’em entary m anner)

V. E C O N O M IC BO TA N Y :

1. Botanical nam es & M orphology o f th e 'u sefu l pants in the follow ing ':

C ereals ; R ice, W heat.M illets : Sorghum Pennisetum .

>, Pulses : Red g rap i, b lack ,g ram .Oil Seeds : G round nut.F ib res ; C o tton .

.M edical P lants : D a tu ra , O cim um .

2. M ajo r crop diseases : Sm uts and Rusts; E xternal Sym pt9 m s: C o n tro l m easures (life h istories not required)

IPR A C T IC A L

1. T echnical descrip tion , sketch ing & Iden tifica tion o f Plants belonging to fam ilies included in theory syllabus a t 1. (N o te ; O nly p lan ts w ith large flow ers ^ a l l be given in -the Ejtami- nation)<

2. Sim ple experim ents in P lan t.Physio logy to cjemon^trat^ the fo llow ing : Osmosis, T tan sp ira tio n , P hotosynthesis. R espiration A erobic and A naerobic.

3. Ecological study o f a pond and dry land V egetation.

4. F ield w ork u n d e r 'tu i t io n /o r at least 3 days.

5. E conom ic p roducts : Iden tify ing th e p ro d u c ts , giving theB otanical nam e o f ih e p lan t and m orpho logy o f tjie >usefulp a rt, p reparing o f herb§riu ii\, ^Becimeans, w ith inflorescence, o f the p lan ts m entioned in V(i)

N O TE : T he can d id a te has to su b m it h is L ab o ra to ry Record o f II year, jhe ftjld no ie book , and herbarium .

101

102

TEX T BOOKS PR E SC R IB E D

Text books prescribed in T elugu by T clugu A cadem y for Inter- rttediat^ jcourse '(l elugu A cadem y, H im ayatnagar. ,H yderabad-2V ).

P A R T III-Z O O L O G Y

SY.LfcABUS F.OR JFIRST y E A R

T H E O R Y

“i 1-. f^Tbe t>5fsic princip les o f Zoology as exemplified^ by an elem entary study o f Phyla (G eneral ch aracters) oam ed below w ith classification based on these.

2. A detailed study of s tru c tu re , habits dnd life h isto ry of the nam ed types to g e th er w ith a' considera tion o f the fu n c tio h o f the various organs.

PR O TO ZO A

C^Et’lSk'tEkAfA

PL A T Y E H E L M IN T H E S

N E M A T H E L M iN T H E S

A'fJfSmLlDK

AflfTHROPODA5

M OLLUSCA

E C H IN O D E R M A T E

(j EM ERAL

AmoebU,’P{asmodium, Param o^cium .

H ydra;

T aenia.

W uchereria baacro fti (externa! charac- le r s and b r i t f life 'h isto ry ).

* IP heretim a o r M egascolex; vLeach (external C haracters only .)

^Cockroach," M o u th -p a rts o f A nopheles, -GOleX-and housefly. Role o f m osquitoes and files in the sp read o f hum an diseases.

E x ternal fea tu res and m an tle cavity of t 're sh W ater M assel atid -Pila.Starfish.

E lec tron jn ic ro g ra p h ic Jstruc tu fe o f an ^ninTal c e l l : m itosis.

103

PR A C TIC A L :

D esc rip iio n and exam ination ihe following types from p repared slides or specim ens.

A m oeba, P aram oecium , H ydra,

T aem ia: Ascaris.

P here lim a o r M egascolex T . S.

M ouih Parts o f Culex and A nopheles; and housefly (study ot p repared slides only). (.

S iudy o f ex ternal fea tu res o f ; D rS cun tu lu s and Leech.

D ISSE C T IO N ^

E a r th w o r m : External fea tu res :M ounting o f body setae;D issection o f digestive and nervous systems; E xposing the sperm athecae in siiu .

C o c k r o a c h : E x ternal featu res :M ounting o f m o u th parts; s'afivcry appara tus; leg o f cockroach.D issection o f d igeftivc and nervbiisjsystem .

SY L L A B U S FO R SE C O N D Y EA R

T H E O R Y :

PISCES: ; G eneral charapic^^ with exam ple

A M PH IB IA : F r o g : (except the sense organs)

R E PT IL IA ; D istinguishing fea tu re o f poisonous and non , poisonous sn'dkes.

AVES : G eneral ch a rac ters only.

M A M M A LIA : G eneral characters o f F ro to th eria ; M eta th e iia and EutheriaV

G E N E R A L : S tru c tu re o f Intestine'! Pancreas ovum' and sper- m atozoo. H isto logy as illu stra ted by ep ithelia l, m uscular, and nervous tissues; carttlege and bone.

E lem entary i^dpa o f the thcpry^ of o rgan ic Evolution; evidence of evolution; M endel’s laws'. P rincip les o f classification and Bin.omial N om encla tu re .

A brief descrip tion o f a selected Ecosystem as for exam ple land locked lake.

PR A C T IC A L

FR O G ; External fe a tu re s :

Bucra) cavity.

D issections o f digestive and u rinogenitof system .

D issection o f sp inal nerves on one side only (Spinal roo ts need no t ^ ,e x p o se d )-

A R T E R IA L SY STEM r Exposing the th ree m ain a rte ria l trunks, on one side only; exposing th e posterio r p a r t o f the a rteria l system show ing the fo rm atio n o f th e do§aI a o r ta (w ith its m ain branches) u p to its division in to iliacs (on one side only).

IVENOUS SYSTE?^! : Exposing th e th ree m ain veins en tering the

sinus venoses; exposing the hepatic p o rta l system ; exposing the renal p o rta l system.E xam ination o f dorsal and ven tra l ^eiAs o f the b ra in kept ready in a w atch glass (d issection) o f brain need not be done by the studen t), ' < •

SK ELETO N : E xam ination o f :

Skull (D orsal and ven tra l viens)P ac to ra l girdle.Pelvic girdle.

Bones o f fore lim b and h ind lim b.

V ertebral first, fo u rth , eigh th , n in th and urostyle (P rep ara tio n o f skeleton need not be done by-the student).

M icrosopic exam ina tion o f the p repared slides o f the following (from frog o f m am m al)

C ilia ted ep ithelium co lum nar ep ithelium ; qudm ous epithelium cartilag e ; T . S. o f bone; m am m alian blood; frog blood; s tria ted muscle; non -stra ited m uscle: card iac muscle; T. S. o f in testine; T, S. of Pancreas.

E xam ination o f C obra , Vipel", Sea Snake.

S tudents m ust p roduce a t the tim e o f practical exam ination a com plete record o f th e ir p rac tica l w ork duly certified . The records shall be sep ara te for th e I year and II year.

104

T E X T BOOKS - PRESCRIBED

T ext Books prescribed in td u g u for the In term ed ia le C ourse by Tclugu A kadem i, H im ayatnagar, H yderabad-29.

B O O K S F O R R E F E R E N C E :

i . R eference Books :

1. H egner and S tiles-T ex tbook o f C ollege Zoology*

2. S toro r-G enera l Zoology

3. Huxley H um an Physiology.

4 . F einexu-H um an Physiology

5. Best & T ay lor-T he living body

W eiZ'Science o f Biology

7. G raham lcer-Zoology for M edical S tudents8. B. S. C. S. Yellow, G reen an d Blue versions

9. F o u ndatiocs o f m odren biolot^y series - p ren tice hall pub lications.

Text B ooks:

a ) Parker & 8Kaiia-An elem entary-tex t book>of Z oology fo r Ind ian studen ts (L a test E d ition i

b) E kam baranatha lyer-Q utlines o f Zoologyc) V isw anath -Z oo lop ' fo r In terraed iiiie Students.

<iEOLOGY

I Year Intermediitte

T H E O R Y

The follow ing ■sufejecis w oul’d be covered “by th t% nd o f tirjit vear In te rm ed ia te . '

I. Physical G eology & S tru c tu ra l G eology.

II. C rysta llog raphy & M ineralogy.U I, Petrology.

105

IN T R O D U C T IO N :

T tG eology and its re la tionsh ip w ith o ther branches o f sciences

W hat is Geology? The im portance o f knowledge o f o ther branches o f science in geologicul studies. ^

1. PH Y SIC A L & ST R U C T U R A L jQ E Q L O G Y

I. a) PH Y SICA L G E O LO G Y :

1. E a rth and its position in soace, so lar system .2. E arth m easurem ents, size, d ensity 'and shape.

E X T E R N A L PRO CESSES A N D T H E ll^ EFFEC TS (E P IG E N E )

1. E verchanging E arth ; M echanical w e a th e r in g : Chemicalw eathering, agents o f w eathering , fac to rs contrt>lling vveathering-soil a? the final p rod tic t. ' '

2. R ivers and R iver ac tio n D evelppm ent o f river th rough norm al cycle o f erosion , 3 stages of rivei;s. G eological ^c tion o f rivers, Land form s p roduced , V -shaped Valleys, W aterfalls, ox-bow lake, delta , etc. e rosion , tran sp o rt and deposition .

3. G laciers & G lacia tion ; Snow, Neve, Ice, Snowline, G laciers, Types o fO la c ie rs , G eological a c tio a o f glacier^.-erosion, transp o rt, depositiort, L andform s, U -shaped Valley,' M ira in is, Kaoies Eskers, D rum lins.e tc .

4. Lakes-Form ation of* lakes : G eological action Lacustrine,deposits. (

5. O ceans-extent-J|]}^sica!.and chem ical ch arac ters o f sea w aters, oceanic zones, geological ac tion . M arine erosion , and deposition (shallow w ater and deep sea deposits).

1 6. W ind .and w ind <iction ; W ind as a G eological agent-w ind e rosion-T ransport and D eposition-Sand dunes. Loess. ’

IN T E R N A L PRO CESSES & T H E IR E F FE C T S (H Y PO G E N E )

1. E arth m ovem ents-E leva^iori and subsidence-la tera l m ovem ents,

2. V olcanoes : Causes and effects. D istribu tion ty p e s , volcanic products.

!06

3. E arth q u ak es-th e ir n a tu re , causes, effects; earth q u ak e belts.

4. In te rio r o f the E arth .

5. Age o f the E arth .

6. O rigin o f the E arth .

1. b) ST R U C T U R A L G E O LO G Y

Structu res in the rocks o f the E a rth 's Crust. Folds, Faults, Jo in ts and U nconform ities, P ard -m aunta ins, types, th e ir o r ig in jm p o rta n t O rogonic belts.

U. M iN E R O L O G Y A N D PE T R O LO G Y

II. a) M ineralogy :

1. IntrodCiction and definition o f crystal, crystal s tru c tu re ’, crystalline and am orphous sta tes, crystal elem ents, Jn terfac ia l a'figles and th e ir m easurem ent, law of constancy of In terfacial angles.

2. C rystal sym m etry.

3 C lassification o f crystals into seven system s w ith typical ejea- faiples. ^

^ J

4. In tro d u c tio n and subdivisions o f earths m ateria l. Definition o f a minepai and rrfck.

5. D efin ition and discussion on sm allest un its o f ea rth m ateria l, elem ents, com pounds, crystals, a tom ic s tru c tu re , ions, isotopes and chem ical form ulae,

6. Physical p ro p erties of m inerals. C olour, streak , lustre, form ,hardness, cleagage, specific grav ity , taste , o dour, feel, transparancy , fluorescene. '

7. A b rie f discussion abo u t th e 'b a lk com position o f e a r th ’s cru st and classification o f m inerals into eight divisions. R ock ' fo'rmin'g m inerals and E conom ic m inerals.

I*

8. D escrip tive rnineralogy ; S tudy o f the physical p roperties, chem ical com position, and occurance o f few im p o rtan t m em bers of the follow ing fam ilies :

1. S iliica m inerals.

2. Feldspars; O rthoclase , M icrocline, P lagioclase.

'10)

3. Feldspathoids; L eucite, N epheline.4. Pyroxenes: A ugite & H ypersthene.

5. A m phiboles; T rem olite & A ctino lite , H ornblende.

6. M uscovite & B io lite . ,

7. Olivine.

8. E p ido te .9. G arnet.

10. M iscellaneous m inerals: K yan ite , A patite , C alcitc , Tale, F luo rite , T opaz, C orundum , Beryl.

II. (b) PE T R O LO G Y

1. Introduction : P e tro logy as a b ranch o f G eology. P etro graphy aad petrogenesis; th ree m ajo r g roups o f rocks, Igneous, sed im entary and m etam pj-phic, th e ir general ch arac ters and m ode o f fo rm ation .

2. Igneous rocks : M agm a ^hd lava, in trusive an d extrusiveigneous rocks-b rief account o f the classification o f igneous rocks, p lu ton ic hypabyssal and volcanic rocks, th e ir tex tu res, pe trograph ic study of the follow ing rock types: G ran ite , p erid o tite , D unite,pegm atite . G ran ite , porphyries. Syenite, D io rite , G abbro , d o le rite , R hyolite , T rachyte, A ndesite Basalt.

3. Sed im en tary rocks : F o rm a tio n -of sedim entary rocks-W eathering tra n sp o rta tio n and deposition , tex tu res, structu res, and o ther ch arac ters exhibited by sedim entary rocks.- C lassification o f sed ittien tary rocks, p e tro g rap h ic study o f th e follow ing sed im entary rocks, breccia, conglom erate , sandstone, g rit, shale, lim estone,

4. Met amorophic rocks : M etam orph ism , agents o f m etaraor- phism , types o f m etam orpb iam , tex tures, s truc tu res and o ther charac. ters o f m etam orph ic rocks. P e tro g rap h ic study o f th e fo llow ing 'rock types. Slate, Schist, Gneiss, Q uartz ite , aad m arb le , C harnock ite , K-hondalite.

11 Y e a r I n t e r m e d i a t e

S tra tig rap h y , Palaeonto logy & E conom ic G eology.

1. a) P A L A E O N T O L O G Y :

I. In tro d u c tio n to P alaeonto logy and its re la tio n to o th e r b ran ches of G eology.

108

2 Fossil reco rd -D o cu m en ts 'o f e a rth ’s history, donditions, m ode o f p reservation o f fossils.

3. Uses of fossils.

4. M orpho log ical ch arac ters o f the fo llow ing-L am elli branches, G astropods and C ephalopods B ranchiopods and Echinoids, Trilobites, C orals,

I. b) ST R A T IG R A PH Y :

1. Definition and scope-W hat is stra tig raphy? Its rela tionsh ip to palaeonto logy .

2. Principles o f s tra tig rap h ic co rre la tion .

3. S tan d ard geological lim e scale and the co rrespond ing groups o f rocks in India.

)4. P hysiographic divisions o f Ind ia & their geological im plica

tions.

5. B rief descrip tion o f th^e follow ing stra tig raph ic .system s of In d ia in reg ard to th e ir succession, litho logy , geograph ic d is tribu tion and econom ic im portance.

1. A rchaean system o f South India.

2. C u d d ap ah system .

3. V indhyan,system .

4. G ondw ana system .

5. C re taceous system & D eccan Traps.*

6. Siw alik system.

1. c). E G O N O M IO G EO LO G Y :\

1. In tro d u c tio n : E conom ic G eo logy -study o f th e origin, occurren ce , d istribu tion and u^es o f econom ic, m inera l deposits-M etallife- rous m in era l deposits. O re, ore m inera l and gan g u e(w ith examples), T enor o f ores.,^r

2. F o rm ation o f M ineral d ep o sits-ftrc // outline.'(■

3. S tudy o f the Physical p roperties , chemica,! com position , occurrence and uses o f the follow ing econom ic m inerals ;

1C9

I. M ejallic : Ores o f iroD, m anganese, alum inum . C opper,chrom ium , gold, lead, zinc, beach sands,and rad ioactiv? m inerals.

2. N on-M eiallic : Asbestos, b arite , gypsum , s tea tite , co-ru n d u ir , kyanite, m ica, calcite , g rap h ite . Coal. O il, D iam ond. and o th e r precious stones

4 E conom ic M inera l D eposits o f A. P ,; O ccurrence, and distrib u tio n o f im portance m ineral deposits in A ndhra Pradesh.

5. & -ief account o f the raw m ateria ls requ ired for the follow ing industries ;

1. XTement

2. Ceram ics

3. R efrac to ries

4. G lass5. F ertilisers

6. B uilding stones,

6. G eology in the service o / M ankind ^;Some ideas o n 'ap p lied aspects o f geology^

i. W hat is app lied gpojogy ?

ii. E xp lora tion m ethods, b rie f accoun t o f princip les o f m agn e tic , seism ic g rav ity and e lec tric m ethods'.

iii. Im p o rtan ce o f m in era l industry in the developm ent of a country .

iv. G round W ater exp lo ra tion .

V. G eology in E ngineering.

(PH Y SIC A L & S T R U C T U R A L 'G E O L O G Y , M lN E R 'O L O G Y ScPET R O L O G Y )

1. M easurem ent o f in fe rfac ia l angle by co n tac t goniom eter. ' ' '

2. S tudy o f crystal elem ents.3. D em o n stra tiv e experim ents dealing w ith various physical p roper

ties o f m inerals.

4. Identification o f im p o rtan t rock fo rm ing m inera ls given under the T heory syllab’ds.

5. Use o f c linom eter com pass.

'110

6 D elerm in a tio n o f s trike and dip.

7. C om pletion o f ou tcrops.

8. T h ree po in t problem s.’

9. E lem entary G eological M apv 6 Nos.

10. D istingushing characters o f igneous, sed im entary and m etam or-phic rocks.

11. S tudy o f the follow ing im p o rtan t rocks

a) Igneous : G ran ite . Syenite, D io riie , G ab b ro , A norfhosite ,D olerite , R byolile , T rach>te, A ndesiie, B asalt, D un ite , Peri- do tite , P egm atite , G ran itep o rp h y ry & S yeh iie-P orphyry .

b) Sedim entary : C onglom erate , Breccia. Shqie, Sandstone,L im estone.

c) M e ta m o rp h ic : S la te , Schist. Gneiss, M arble, Q u artz ite ,C harnock ite , K hondalite , G ran u lite , A pplvibolite ,

P R A C T IC A L -II (D U R IN G II Y E A R )

(S tra tig rap h y ,P a laen to lo g y and Econom ic G eology)

1. S tudy o f the fo llow ing im’p o rtan t fossils : Pecten , C ard ite .T u rrite lla , M urex, A m m onite(A canthoceras), P roductus. Spi- rit> r,^T erebratu la-C idaris, M icraster-jC^alymene, Paradoxj^es- M on o g rap tu s , D ip lograp tijs.

2. Fossil draw ing w ith lab^ llin^ o f paf'ts.

i' <'3. Study o f the follow ing im p o rtan t econom ic m inerals : H e

m atite , M ^gnetjte , Psilom el^pe, Py^plusite, C h ro m iie , M olybdenite, Chalccjciie, Covelliie,. M alachite , A zurite , C halcopy- rite . G alena, Sphalerite , b a u x ite . ■ ,

P y rite , G rap h ite , C oruijdyni^ Beryl, /Jkjjat,ite^ F lu 9 ,rite. G ypsum , M agnesite, S tea tite , A sbestos-M ica, M onazite, llm en ite .

].v\

PART-lII HOME SCIENCE


ITEM : I PH Y SIO LO G Y

An elem entary study o f the s tru c tu re and functions o f the follow ing system s o f the hum an body ;

Skeletal system

M uscu lar system

R esp ira to ry system

C ircu la to ry and L ym phatic system

Diges’tive system

E xcretary system .

H Y G IE N E :

A IR : Its com position , im purities, v en tila tio n im portance o f fresh air.

‘W A TER : Its com position , sources', p o llu tio n , m ethods o f pu rify ing w ater in the h'ome*, ruraT and u rb an areas. Personal hygiene - Im p o rtan ce o f personal cleanliness, exercise, ^ood hab its, evil effects o f pan , tobacco , opium , alcohol.

< *S an ita tion and disposal o f refuse and sew agedry conservancy arid w ate r ca rriag e system . Use o f com posite p it and the’ir use fo r k itchen garden.

itE M : II TEXTILES AN D CLOTHING)

THEORY :

An elem entary study o f fib res-co tton , linen and w ool-theiridentification-physical and chem ical p ro p erties o f the fibres- m icroscopic appearance.

W ashing and finishing o f co tto n , linen and wollens. P repara tion , use and kinds o f s ta rch and blues. W ater-hard and soft,

112

rem oval o f hardness o f w aler, L aundry reagents-acids, alkalies, bleaches, so lvents, and absorben ts

S tain rem oval - rem oval of tu rm eric ^Haldi), pan ink, grease, b lood, pain t, tea and coffee.

P R A C T IC A L ;

W ashing and finishing o f co tton , linen and w oolen articles. Rem oval o f com m on stains as s ta ted in theory .

N eedle w ork-sam ples o f the follow ing have to be prepared and fixed in needle w ork reco rd . The follow ing ch ild ren ’s garm ents are included :

Jhang ia . K u rta (i.e. Telsla), frock and kniclter.C hild 's Body Block.

Basic stiches-tacking, runn ing , hem m ing, back stitches, top sw ing seam s-iun and fell seam french seam -flat seam .

O pening con tinuous w rap opening-open ing in c o n tin u a tio n of a seam , fixing gathers o r pleats in to a'batrd,-hem s, narro w hem , fao- ings, "bais binding.

Faslners-Press bu tto n s, hooks, tapes, b u tto n holes and fixing o f b u tto n s.

ITEM : 111 FO O D S A N D N U T R IT IO N

T H E O R Y :

D efinition o f nu tritio n -b asic food groups.N u tirien ts - C a rb o h y d ra te s , fats, p ro te in s, m inerals and v iiam ins. 1

Sources, functions and requ irem ents for the nu trien ts .

M e'thods o f cooking^B oiling, stream ing , stew ing, roastin g ,

fry ing and back ing th e ir advan tages and d isadvantages.

P reven tion of losses o f nu trien ts .

Purchase, sto rage and p reven tion o f wastage* o f foods. P reservation o f foods.

113

T 'R a C TICA LS :

Boiling : G reen leafy v eg e tab les-po ia toes and eggs.

S t e a m i n g s : R ice, custard , Idli.

Frying ; P ara thas, Puris, Sam osas, D osai.

Roasting : M eat, brinjHls, sweet po ta to es .

S te w in g I V egetables or m eat stew.

‘B a k in g : P lain cakes and b 'scu iis.t

P rep ara tio n o f b reakfast, lunch, tea and d inner selecting recei- pcs. Sele.cting th e above receipes w hich are applicab le for a p a ru - c u b r m eal. O th e r p rep a ra tio n s as lime rice, chapath ies, mixed vegetable curry , m eat ctirry, chutneys sam bar, salads, po ta toe . bonda, sam osas and o thers.

Preservation o f food -to m ato jam , lim e or m ixed vegetable pickles.

iITEM : IV H O M E M A N A G E M E N T :

j rD efinition o f (home m anagem en t-essen tia l qualities o f a good

hom e-m aker value o f p lann ing fo r good m anagem ent benefits o f a p lanned tim e tab le , division o f v/ork am ong fam ily m em bers.

! / tThe house-site, soil, loca lity etc. The p lan o f the houie-for

low and m iddle incom e groups, g rouping o f the room s, ven tila tion , lighting, san ita ry fittings and sto rage faciH ues.

Selection o f fu rn itu re , and furn ish ing , sim ple accessories ;aqd colour schem e.

Flow er arrangem ent.

T ab le laying fo r various occasion.

A dvan tagex if m odern appliances (labour and tim e saving appliances) gas, oil and elec tric stove, steam irons; sewing m achine with elegtric m eter, k itchen gadets like lem on queezer, peelers, g raters and slicers (M achanism o f the app liance is no t requ ired ).

H ouse-ho ld pests-m ethods o f e rad ica tio n , silver fish, cockroach- ers, reds, m osquitoes, flies, bed bugs, w hite an ts, ants.

114

115

, ITEM N o V - C h i l d D e v e l o p m e n t .

E xpectanM nother-d ie t and care during pregnancy, p repara tion for confinem ent,' choice and a rrangem en t o f room and necessary equ ipm ent, m atern ity homes.

. T he in fan t'p o s in a ta l care, feeding-advantages and disadvantages o f b reast and artific ia l feed ing-bottle feed ing -p repara tion and cqre, h ab it form Btion, ea ting , sleep ing ,to ile t, exercise, ba th ing and dressing of b ab 'e s and young ch ildren . C h ild ren’s c lo th ing-se lec tion and care.

Im p o rtan ce o f play selection o f toys and play equipm ent for age- groups fI-5 ydars). GeneVal princip les o f g row th and developm ent- physical in te lJec 'ual (L anguage) social and em otional deveiopmer)i. T he hered ity and env7Torm ental influences on the developm ent o f‘ children. Physical and psychological neec^s of young ch ild ren Com m on ailm ents in children-digestive troub les such as th rush , voitiitingscolic, d ia rrhoea , com m on cold, sore-eyes, measles, w hooping cough-h ea lth oro 'tectiori for children-child w elfare centres and clinics.

S y l l a b u s f o r II Y e a rI I

ITEM N o. I. P h y s i o l o g y : '

An elem entary study o f the s tru c tu re and functions of ihe following system s of the hum an body ;

I ^

N ervous system .

Sense organs-skin, eye, ear. nose and tongue.

F em ale rep ro d u c to ty system

D’uctles glands.

Infection M ethods o f transm ission o f diseases arid p rev en tion

*

D isinfection-M eihods of d isinfection , the ir du ty o f an iu- ' di’Oidual id ih ^ 'com m unity on m atters ' o f Health.

in fectious diseases-C auses,.sym ptom s, care o f pa tien t aAd prevention-T ypho id , C holera , D ia rrh o e a and D>sentry. tu b e rcu lo sis . Small pox, Chiken pox. M easles, Plague by con tac t and insect.

M alaria . W hooping cough. M umps and D Iphiheria,

F IR ST A ID :

Broad p rincip les o f first aid lo the injured- T riangu la r bandages and their use-app lication--fractu res wounds and the ir trea tm en ts. R oller bandage and its app lica tions. F irst aid irea tm en i-P o is io n s- hystecia, ep ikpsy , F ain try , Sunstroke, burns and scalJs, snake-bite, D rousing.

ITEM N o. II Textile and C lothing.

T H E O R Y :

A n e l e m e n t a r y s t udy o f f i b i e s s i lks , r a y o n a n d n y l o n - t h e i r i de n t i f i c a t i o ns , ph y s i ca l a n d c h e m i c a l p i o p e r i i e s o f i h e F i b r e s , m i c r o s c o p i c a p p e a r a n c e .

W ashing and finishing o f silk, nylon and rayon articles. P repara tio n and use of gum acacia for silks^ W eaves-difFerent typcs-plain. Tw ill sta in , m atting , selection of fibrics for household Im en and garm ent. C lo th ing for daily and occasional w ear acco rd ing lo th e seasons fo r ch ildren and adults.

D etergents-Soaps, different k inds of soaps and soap powders, soap jelly and its p rep a ra tio n , soap nuts (Reec nu ts and shikakai).

Sim ple m eth o d of dry cleaning.

E lem entary princip les o f dyeing;

PR A C T IC A L S :

W ashing and finishing o f silk , rayon and nylon articles.

D ry cleaning by use o f solvents and absrobents.

Simple dyeing,

N eedle w ork - M en d in g -p la in patch p rin t p a tch d a rn in g - cross way darn ing , hedge tea r darn ing , hole.

D ecora tive stiches - Faggo t stitches,- hem stitches, fea ther stitches, hearing , bone, stem stitch , sa tin stitch .

K n ittin g C asting on stitches, casting o f stitches, m aking o f a sm all ascarf an d ty ing tassels.

U se an d care o f sewing m achine.

P a tte rn and garm ent m ak in g -D ra ftin g and m aking o f sari p e ttic o a t (4 to 6 pannels), Bodies.

Block p a tte rn and ad ap ta tio n of th e sam e fo r a blouse and kham eez, ch u d d id a r pyjam a.

N O T E : A reco rd o f a ll laund ry p rac tica ls is to be m ain ta ined .

116

ITEM- No. I l l F o o d s a n d N u t r i t io n .

T H E O R Y ;

M aln u tritio n , deficiency diseases sym ptom s aod prevention .

B alanced diets vegetarian and non-vegetarian m enu p ladaing .

Special d iets-D iet fo r different age groups-C Iim ate and occupations. as affecting d ie ta ry in take.

D ie t d u rin g pregnancy and la ta tio n . Invalid diets.

Food m icrobiology harm fu l and useful b acteria , yeasts and m oulds.

PR A C T IC A L S :

P repara tion o f balanced d ie ts-V egetarian and noo-vegetarian m eals for a child o f 4-5 >eara an d an ad u l\. Receipes fo r invdjid d ie ts-E g g flip-w hey, po rridge (Sooji) vegetable or bone soup-bariey w ater-sago pudd ing w ith njilk,

P reparati m for special occasions-Fried rice. Polla, vegetable or m eat korm a, egg eu rry , c a r re t halw a.

ITEM No. IV H.O.ME M A N A G E M E N T A N D FA M ILY RELA TiO M S.

SO U R C ES O F FA M ILY IN C O M E :

B u d g e t m aking-incom c g roup betw een Rs. 200-500 per m onth m ain ta in ing acco u n is-T h rjft and econom y.

S upplem enii.ig ihe fanSily i.icom e-pou ltry , kitchen gdfden ta ilo ring eic.

M e t h o d s of s i iving-p. )s t office, b a n k s , n a t i o n a l s m a l l s a v i n g

s c h e m e s . " '•

H o w to o p e n a n a c c o u n t a n d w i t h d i a w a m o u n t s f r o m p a s t office

a n d ba n ks .

F u n c t i o n s , t ype s a n d behcf i t s o f t he - co - jp e l ^ a i i ve o r g a n i s a t i o n

a n d I n s u r a n c e .

A d v a n t a g e s a n d d i s a d v a n t a g e s oP c a sh a n ^ c r e d . t p u r c h i s e a a d

h i r e p u r c h a s e .

C l e a n i n g e i )u ipmcn t -mops , ^b rushe< : . b r o o m s .

H o u s e h o l d cleaning : Daily, .weekly a n d sprin cleaning.

P-ainiing, P.oljshing and VLunishing th e w ood, m a k in g fu rn i tu re p Tsh, vim sco u r in g m ix tu re

117

T h e a d v a n t a g e s a n d d i s a d v a n t a g e s o f u s i n g c o m m e r c i a l l y p r e p a - p a r e d a n d h o m e m a d e c l e a n i n g r egent s .

T y p e s o f m e t a l u sed in t h e h o m e - t h e ef fects o f m o i s t u r e , a i r ,f o o d s e t c . , on e a c h o f t h e m . T h e c a u se s o f t a r n i s j i , r u s t , v a rd i g r i s ,an d h o w to r e m o v e t h e m f r c m m e t a l l i c a r t i c l e s in c o m m o n use.

i r ! '

T h e c h o i c e c a r e a n d c l e a n i n g o f h o u s e - h o ld p o t t e r y , c h i n a a n d glass.

R em oval o f grease and ink sta ins from stone floors. C leaning ofoil lam ps and stoves

N. B ;- P racticals have to be carried ou t w herever necessary and a record o f the p rac tica ls is to be m ain ta in ed .

IT E M N o. V. F a m i ly R e la t i o n s :

D efin ition and im p o rtan ce o f familjr. The in te i- ic la tio n sh ip w ith in the fam ily-husband/w ife, p a ren t/ch ild . S ibling re lationsh ips, re la tionsh ip w ithin the la rger fam ily-in-law s and g ran d p aren ts Paren ta l a ttitu d es acceptance re jec tio n , overp ro tec tion , th e ir effects on child rearin g and child behdv iour - friendly , co operative, self- assured aggressive subm issive, over-dependent, ^etdsh, a tte n tio n - seeking etc.

R ela tionsh ip o f th e fam ily w ith ou tside sociaf ageiicies and the com unity (education , religiojas and / social) ce leb ra tio n o f festivals (re lig ious and tia tional), com m unity iservices fof th e famiJy-importaQ- ce o f fam ily p lan n in g and fam ily p lann ing clinics.

PR A C TIC A LS :t

Visits to m atern ity hom es, observation o f new born in fan t, child welfare centres,' nu rsery schools and balw adies.

P A R J ,111 : L .Q G I C .

S y l l a b u s F o r F i r s t Y e a r>

118

1. (a) The S tand p o in t o f Logic C om m onsense th in k in g andL ogical or scientific th ink ing . * ’

(b) D efin ition o f L o g ic -th e re la tio n o f Logic to o th e r sciences (Psychology and. E thics)- F orm al and in a te ria l Logic'.

-(c) p rac tica l Ujtility of L ogic (^ h w e ever possible Induin. Lpgical term s to jje in tro d u ced an,4 exglaiped)

2 . W ords akd t^rtas - co n ao ta tio n and d c n o ta tio a o f term s tlierr r^ a t io n

t

3. Pt'ppositions as ju d g em ep ts-ca teg o rlca l.an d cond itional p ro p o s itions - C lassificauon o f categorical p ropositions - E uler’s d iag ra- ip m aiic rep resen ta tion - d is tr ib u tio a o f termg.

t4 . Lo'gical difinitioTi an d lo g ica l diyision rules, faliacjcs<T oo n a rro w

and too -wide ’onlyj.

5. In ference - Immt'^diate and m ediate fdifFerence based on the m iddle terfn alone skou ld .be tau g h t) sv arth a and p a ra r th a (in general term s)

6 . C atergo rica l Syllogism -general rules o f syTlogism -determ ination o f valid argum ents in term s of general ru les-sy llog isiic fallacies.

1. M ixed a rg u m en ts-hypo the tica l and disjunctive syU ogism s-ru ies- valid argum ents-fallacies.

S. C om pound p ropositions ‘I f - then’ re la tio n hy p o th e tica l s ta te m ents sufficient, and necessary conjlitions as show n’ by sym bols •If P th en Q , " E i t h e r - o r f r o m as a lte rn a tiv e fo rm - T h e log ica l OT cau sa l link Ex.amples ce rta in ty anA probdbil4tj^(not m a th em atical), sym bolic log ic as a closed sy s tem -T ru lh rab*res - ‘ xpjlana- tio n o f th e fo llow iag sym bols. ''

p>q. (p and q)', p q <p o r q b u t no t bo th )

p -q (p is eq u iv a len t to q ) ; ' V*<? (P iniplies Of eotiais q)

' co n tra d ic tb ry sym bols yj p‘ * ’ ‘

S y llab u s 'F < » r S e c o n d Y e a r

I. T h e p to b lem o f induction - re la tio n betw een d eduction and in d u c tio n -o u tlin e o f scientific m|;.t|i^(J^

M ethods of enqu iiy such as in tu tio n , tenacity , au th o rity e tc ., as ponI;rasted w ith w jentific m ethod (pub |ic en qu /ry / open enquiry- e tc ..) (special reference, to ‘ 4m I n t r o d n c t i o n t o L o g i c a n d B<^nti/Glc t h i n k i n g by N agal and C(^hen.

31?

Z Methocfs fbll'owed in social sciences, physfcar aa<f EworogicaRsciences (Q uestionnaire , s ta tis tk sy case h istory etc)i.

3. Uivity o f nature^ U nifofm iry o f nat.ure-law o f c au sa tio » p ru ra lity of causes.

4. E num eration - sim plp-enuprteratlon and perfect et>umeration-

3. O bservatioD a n d expe^im em -'relative advan tages, re lev an t fanacies-

6. A nalogy - N a tu re of an o fo g x al arg u m en t - fts wea'fcness a'ndlvalue-

T. H ypothesh - Iis rrature" arncf fu n c tio n — reqm rernen ts o f a _good hypothesis - verificritioti arnd p ro ) f ~ cu rc al ex p erim en t,

8. Inductrve fa llae ies, ( h p->st hoch cpbo p ro p te r hoc, (2) begging:the question , (3J Hastjif generalisation (4-) Accidemt andfi (5> N on-S eq ,u itu r,

T e x t B o p k iv P rie sc r ib e -4 :

Books prinrted" in Tefugu Fo' the- rnterniectiate cii»rse-by T efu g a^k ad em i Hin»ayatnagarj, Hycterabad—29.

B o o k s f o r R e f e r e n c e

F. .‘’An introduction tc t Logic” b y Creighton and SrrTjrrt-^PartsI and If. I

2. “ E lem ents of Logic” by L a tta M acb ea th (published by MacmriUan!& C om pany),

?. “ E lem ents o f M odern L ogic" by M ellone.4. “ L og ic in P ractice’" b y L. S usan S tebbing (published by M eibuem

& C om pany).

5. “ Sciemifrc O u t-to o k ’ b y B ertrand Russel

SY L L A B U S 1! H IST O R Y

I n d ia n H i s t o r y

P A R T A ,

S Y L L A B U S F O R F i : i S T Y E A R

I . Ind ia (a) (i) G eog-aphicaf se tting in (he Context o f Asia-tnftc/-■ence o f geography on the course o f Irtdian Hrfatory.

ii) G eograohical d iv isions-eariy peoole’-rac ia l y e m e n ts ,(b) G eneral survey o f ^nurce m ateria l.

n . HaTBjrpaTi p a t t e r n of-c iv il isa lion its ex ten t an d autlioT-shlp a n d affinities.

i n , A ryaTis- 'O rrgln-A ryanifat lo 'n of I n d i a - V e d ic l i t e r a tu r e , Relt- jioTi, S ock '-y and Po li ty m tTie R ig v ed ic an d la te r Vedic p e r io d s S o c ie fy a n d ■Civilisation in t l i e epic age.

IV^ Religious u n rest-ilic reform movem’ents o f M ahav ira and •Ca-utamTi Budd'ha,

V . R ise of Magadlia-SaiiTiTnagas a-nd the N a n d a s .

VT. T he Ma-nr\-an em p ire -C h an d ra G u p ta , K au tilya and Megas-BindTJssaTfi, A s^ka, as Kin-g and B u d rh is t-H is monuTnents.

M-aaryati Po licy-D ecline oT the M auryan em pire.

VTT. >(a) P orelgn IrctiTsions - lu d o GreeTcs-; Den*ietrius an d M enander - Indo - Purtliians a n d iS a k a s , Kusi^anas-> K anrsiika.

tb ) Sunga‘ : Pushy a nit; a, B rahm aoical revival, Kaiivasand th e if overtkrow by tbe A ndhra W estern K sh atra - pas* '

V n i . (a5 T h e DaTcli tn - E arly p eo p les-sp read o f Jain ism and B uddhism -R ise and D ecline o f th e A ndhra S a tav ah a - n as-N ag arju n a ,

Rise o f Iksvakus, E arly pallavas - S alankayanas- K adam ba.

(b) S ou th )ndia-Sangam Age and “E arly T am il K ingiiom s E arly cholas, C b«ras an d Pandya-s.

(c) Ind ian C u ltu ra l expansion to South East Asia.

IX . Th« G upta E m oire - 1 ), Id ea Age o f th e G u p tas-F ah ien - V ak a iak a and V ishnukundins.

X, The H una Invasions and decline o f th e G upfa em pire P o litica l tu rm o ii-R ise o f the P u sh y ab h u iis -H arsh a -H is Career and ach iev em en t-H u an Ci.w ang,

X I. (a ) T he C halukyas o f B adam i-their expansions early Arab- invasio n s-ih e ir reverses-the rise o f E asie rn C halukyas of- Vcngi R a sb ita k u ts .

121

(b ) T he G rea t pa llavas-C ontribu tfon to a rts an d fe tters- Im peria l C holas - R elig ion , Society an d A d m in is tra tio n - Wes-tern G halukyas o f K alyani.

D ism em berm ent o f C hafukyan em pire-R ise o f tVie Paiidyas, H oysals, Y adavaa and the K akatiy ss the ir rivalries-society and cu ltu re M arcopok)’.

XITK Rise o f th e R ajp u t States- The k a rk o tas an d the B abm an- S hahis-G urjar P ra tibara& of K-anauj-Palas, Paranvaras, th e C h au h an s and th e Soan&.

XfV. (a)’ T he A rab fepikrde-M ohm ud o f Ghazni' and h is raids- M aham um ad o f G b o r’s inva&iorks-fi undatiori o f the Mu&lem SuU anate o f D elhi.

(b) T he Slave dyn^st'y-the K hiljis-A fauddin 's adm m istra live refo rm ^-M afik K afur.

(c) The T uglaka - adm in istra tive reform s-annexation o f S outhern pCingdoros; ''

XV. (a) T he rise o f th e Mu sun urri, the R e d d i,th e V efam a, th e V ijayanagara and th e Babmurty K.ingdoms-lhe G azapath is o f O rissa.

(b) The Bahnnfimy dnd Vijayan'agara s tn tg fte s Foreign visitors : N icolo de C o n ti, A bdur R azak, Paes a'nd' N uniz-the splendour c f V ijayanagara-^dvem arrd rise o f the P ortugese pow er-bfeab up of ihe Bahm uny K ingdom .

X V I. Decline o f the S u ltanate-lm pact o f Is!am on HiudU religion^, iiris and letters-successive M ongol invasions of India-the Sayyada- and the L odies-B abar and the’ first battJe o f p an ip a t, 152&,

S y l l b u s f o r H o d Y e a r

P A R T ‘B ’’ : 1526 t o 1955 .

XVH. T he fo u n d a tio p o f M oghul Em pire-Sur Inyorrognum '-Shef- sha’s ad m in is tra tio n A kbar-his social and religioils and adm inistra- uve rtfo rm s, Bhakti m o v em en t-L a te r M oghuls - Decline o f the M oghul power-R is? o f M ara tha power-Shivaji-A sb'^aparedan syU'om :)nd in stitu tion of Peshwas.

122

X V III. Advent of E uropeans the ir early settlements-East India C om pany-E arly , impact o f West on Indian society-propagaiion of Chris tianity-fall o f Portuguese power-Clive and- Dupliiix-Establishm en t of British power in Bengal-Anglo Mysore war-Anglo M ara tha Wars,

XIX Esiablishrnent of British supremacy (Political) Wellesley,Hastings-Dalhousie,

XX. The Pun jab-R ise o f Sikh pow er-R an ji t Singh. '

X XI. N orth W est F ron te r-R ussophob ia and first Anglo Afghan War.

X X II. The Revolt o f 18 5 7-N atu re -C auses-C ourse and consequences.

XXIII. A br ie f review o f East India C om pany’s rule in India- Constitu tional changes-adm inistrative organisa tion social re fo rm s- development o f Education, Econom ic degradation .

XXIV. India upder the crown 1858-1905-Foreign policy with reference to A fghan is than-B urm a and Tibet-policy towards Native states. C onsti tu tional developm ent-adm inis trative reforms, deveJop- m ent in respect o f A gricu lture I r r iga t ion public works, Public health Education and Local self-Government.

XXV. Indian Renaissance in the I9th cen tury-Relig ious 'and 'social reform m ovements-part played by R a ja ram a M ohan Roy-Dayananda Saraswathi, Ram akrishna, V ivekananda, Tagore , R ^nade. 'V idyasagai Veeresulingam Pantulu and V enka ta ra thnam Naidu.

XXVI. India under the Crown 1905-1935 - C onsfitu tional Deve lopm ent-A ci o f 1909-1919 and 1935 Developments in respect A dm inistra tion , Agriculture, irr iga tion , Industries T ra d e and C o m . merce, Education, Press, Local self G overnm ent.

XXVJI The N ational movement -O r ig in and growth o f Indian N ational Congress-period o f M odera te N ationalism 1885-1905 period o f M ilitant na tionalism 1905 to 1920. The G andh ian era, 1920-1947 origin and growth o f Muslim L eag u e -p ar t played by it.

XXVIII India during ![ W orld W ar-P o li t ica l and constitu tional developments between 1937 and 1947.

XXIX India since 1947-The constituent assembly and the fram ing o f the Indian constitu tion Indian Republic M ain features, Inte gration of Indian S ta tes-S ardar Patel’s contributiqn^-.Linguisti 'c reorganisa tion o f States . ^

XXX Foreign policy-^ancha S}aeela o f N ehru-C hina , Pakistan, India in the U N O

In ternal Policy-Five Year Plans-Econqmic devflop.mcnt, In d u strial and Educational Expanision-the balance sheet achievements and set bncks in adm inistra tive, social and cultural aspects o f life

123

W O R L D H I S T O R Y

S y l l a b u s f o r f i r s t Y e a r : P a r t ‘ A ’

I. i ) M an in the ancien t world.

b) F e rt i le c re s c e n t ;

i) Euphra tes and Tigris river valley civilisations Salient features. < *

ii) Sumerian Civilisation Sailent features, iif) Babylonian Civilisation Sailent features iv) Assyrian Civilisation Sailent. features.-

(c) N ile valley C ivilisation-society and relig ion ‘(d). Indus valley civiliSation-^-Sailent features(e) Agean and c re tan civilisations-Sailent fea tures(f) Ind ian civilisation-Sailent features(g) Age o f G reece-G eeks v * s u s ’persions-Legacy o f G reece ' '(h) R om an Civilisations-Jesus Christ and rise o f Chris tian ity ,

* begacy o f R om e ' ' '( i ) Chinese C ivilisation-Sailent features-fionfuciou's and Laotse

Vedic In d ia -M a h a v ira ahd the Budha(J) Persian Civilisation-Sailent fea tu res-Z ofoas te r

>• III. M ID D L E AGES : ’

(a) Rise and spread of Islam Teachings of Prophet M uhbad- C'aliphs o f Bagdad.

(b)- The Holy R om an empire*CharIes th e 'g rea t-R i’se o f papacy- cobflict between the 'popes and the em perors

(c) Rise, g row th and decay o f feudalism in E urope in middle ages

(d) Crusades' and iheir effects on Europe(e) C h ina under the M ings and M anchus.(ou t line history only)(f) Japan Religion and feudal Spciety(g) Expansion o f Ind ian culture in-Eastern Archipelago, Java,

Sum atra , Borneo, Burm a, and Sian.

S Y L L A B U S F O R S E C O N D Y E A R - P A R T - ‘ B ’

III M O D E R N :

(a) Renaissance-causes and e ffec ts -I ta lian Renaissence Reform ation in G erm any-C duntfe r-R eform ation

(b) Rise o f N a t io n -S ta te s in Europe-Brita in , France , Spain, Portugal, the N etherlands

(c) Age o f Reason : Industr ia l Revolution in England Enligh't- ehed de^potism in E urope

1-24

(d) The Am erican and French Revolutions(e) N ationalism ia Europe; unifications o f Italy and G erm any •

The Eastern question

( f ) T w entie th cen tury Revolutions; Russian Revolu tion N a t io nalist m ovem ent in China, D r. Sun Y a t Sen-Young China r o o v e m e n t - c o m m u n i^ in China

(g) A wakening in the near East-Young Turk-ifiovement influence of the west of Afghanistan, m odernisation o f Persia,

’ (la)' Awakening o f Japan-Meiji- R estora tion .

( j) African question ; F reedom m ovem ent in South Africa- Apartheid-Congo problem -Egyptian co u pde ta t and the founda tion o f the United A rab Kepublic. ^

(j) F irs t W orld war-its effects-League of N a t io n s jts achieve, m ents and, failufcs-Fascism in I ta ly . N azism in G erm any Second world war-its cffec ts-U .N .O . its achievements and L im ita tions. I

(k) N ationa lis t m ovem ent in the F a r East Ind ia 's s tuggle for freedom G andhian e ra N ehru epoch-awakening and es tabl ishment o f responsible G overnm enis ' in Burma-Ceylon, Indonesia and its effects.

'1 , 'T E X T BO O K S FR ESC R IBED

I0Books printed in Telugu for the In term eoia teC ours t by Teiugu

Akademi; H im ayatnagar , HydfcraBid-29,

Books For reference;*’

IN D IA N H IS T O R Y :

Lisf I

L Iswariprasad: Outlines o f Indian History,

, 2. R .C. M ajum dar: Advanced H istory of India, 3 vola.

’ 3. K .A . N ilak an ta Sastry: H istory of-India. 3 parts.

4. V.A. Smith; Students; History o f India (Revised Oxford'' University Press) ’ ~

List II

‘I. C am bridge Shorjer H is to ry ‘o f India.

2, y .A . Smith: Oxfor^ F^istory o f I^d ia . ,

3. If . 2 1. P /nikjcar: o f Itidian^Hisiory:

125

W O R LD H IST O R Y ;

List 1.

1. F. G . Pearcc an ‘Outline H istory o f Civilisation' (George H arrap & Co.)

2. Rene Sedilet : Bird’s Eye-view o f W orld History (T ransla ted by Gerrfid Hopkins and published by G eorge H arrap & Co.; 1951),

3. S. T. Iyengar and T. S.- R aghavan , world H istory in Outline(M acmillan). ,

List 11.

1. Dcvies •. An Ouiiine H istory o f the world.2. W ebster ; W orld History.3. H . G. Wells ; S hor t History o f the world.4. Jaw aharla i N eh ru : G limpses o f Worl'd History.

H IST O R Y O F C H IN A ;

1. Paul’ H. Clyde, The F a r East (The re levant th a p te rs . )

2. Vinacks, A History of th e F a r East in M o d ern Times (the r e lc /a n t chapters).

3. Owen and Eleaaor; Lattim ore , The M ak in g of M odern China A short History.

4. H. G. Gallic, China; C onfucian and Com m unist ,

PART—HI CIVICS

S y l l a b u s in Civics,

FOR 1st Y EA R C O U R SE ;

1. M eaning aims and scope o f Civics R ela tion with History, Economics. Ethics and Sociology. ^

2. Individual and society-M utual re la tionship-Association. Insti tu tions and Prim ary grpups w ith in society. The family and other associations or groups of religious polit ical and cu ltu fa l nature and their significance to M an Society.

3. The sta te ; I ts essential elements and Basic concepts, Sovereignty, La-# etc.

4. The m odern sta te : N a tion and N a t io n a l i ty -T h e need for International understanding in the p resen t.day world -.ThCi concept o f world state - Some sailent features like large size, N ationa l or m ultina tional na tu re ; -The place of individual in Socialism.

*5.‘ The individual in the m odern s ta te-L iberty 'dnd equality'.

126

6. Citizenship : M eaning-m odes o f acquiring cttirenship; rights and duties o f c itizeu-hindrgnces to good citizenship.

7. Political ideals : Dem ocracy and bccularism.

8. People’s Partic ipation in a ' M odren State-Political parties and public opinion.

9. S T R U C T U R E OF G O V E R N M E N T :

(a) un itary and federal .Go,vcrnme;its.

(b) The th ree organs and the ir in ter-re la tionsh ip :

i) Legislature - its fu n c t i jn s , U a i-cam era l b i-cam cral Legislatures.

ii) Executive-Us functipns,^nd types (P ar l iam entary and Presidential).

iii) Judiciary-its rolf.and>sig.nificai|ce.* Vfc 1

10. U nited N a t io n s ; A b r ie f study o f its .aims, s t ru c tu re a.nd role.

F O R II Y EAR C O U R C e t - 7

^ N P IA N A D M IN IS T R jVTIONj

t. A br ie f Outline o f the constitu tional developm ent iff Ind ia (H 58- 1947) emphasising^ the^cQnstitutional. developm ent mainly as a consequential development o f the iNatioiialist Ivlovement.

2. R eorgan isa t ion ,o f states in India : M erger and in teg ra t ion the “ Princily” states*formation of linguistic states.

C onstitu tion 6f India '; Sailent features;»^rittcn ''constinltion, Secular S tate Soverign D em ocra tic Republic; Fundam enta l Rights, D irective Principles, F edara t ion , ParliamenlTi'ryiSystem, M ethdds ot amendm ent.

4. Ind ian political System -insti tu tionaj.;■r Xi) S tructure and w orking o f the U nionG ovcrn m ent; Parliament

Executive, and All India Services such as .J .A tS^ j M.S..,:pic , and Defence Services; A br ie f study of the main functions o f the Home and ExicAiari-MTairs B epartm ents .

ii) S tructure and the w orking of the S ta 'e G ovfrnm en t, S tateLegislature Executive and S tate Services-A brief study o f the role of the D istr ic t 'au i’ho'riites in the-im plem enta tion of the S ta te Policies. ‘ ,-»j i

127

jij) S truc tu re and worlciDg o f IKS' Ju'dicjary; Supreme C ourt , H igh Court and Subord inate Courts.

r i« I- .,''1, j - r •• 1iv) StriKûre and workro|^ o f Iqca! government; Corpora tions,

M unicipalities. Panchayat R a j (Z illa ’Parisbad Paiicbayai Samitbi, and G ra m Pancbayat).

5. Ind ian Political Systcm-Iûnctiona't T

People’s participati&rpfn poIitJcaKactivities such as Exercise, of francbifec acquarinting-onêlf A?/itb tl)e c u r r e n t , issues o f the l^âtipn f o r cjtample. Land Reforms, N a tionalisation etc. A du it Suffrage and E lee tora l machinery . ’

6. National,inVegratioD ancf itfe'^JaramWift * eed today .

7. Planning for a Welfare state;fiFlit^'need for. a p lanned econom yin India-N ational Planning C om m ision , its a im s an d funo- i io n s -F iv e '^ ea r ^Plans’, ■'

T E X T BO O K S P R E S C R IB E D ■■

Books p r in ted in TeIugu” fo r the in te r m e d ia t e Course by Telugu Acadam i, H im ayatnagar , H y d e rab ad -29.> > f - a ' . Ti-i

. L I S T 'O ^ t E X T ' I^ O k ' 'k E F E A ‘Ei^CE

C i v i c s .

t.u S. -'N.'iSen“ ” An;, in trp^.uction to,.,Civics” Bookland^Lirnited,LH-; . Calcutta-6,

2. M. K.'SeI^r“ EIeInent»‘Qfi•,Ci,vjcs”3. N . C. D am Ie-“ Civics for Beginners

4. P. J. J a g i rd a r - “ Civics & Civics p roblem s”J 1 - I <•

5. Labri and B enera je -‘'In tro d u c t io n to Civics and Politics”i * )

I n d ia n A d m i n i s t r a t i o n . > j • t

f .■ '1. M . R . P a ia n d e t - ' I n d ia n A dm in is tra tion’' r(OAford Uuniveraity

Press).

2',' ‘C. N . S ingb- 'T -aad-m arks i n j n d i a a Constitu tionaf anc} J'Tational D evelopm ent’' Volume I (A tm aram & Sons, Delhi) ,

3. Setbi and M a h a ia n -^ C o n t i tu t io n a l History xjf Indya.

128

PART I I I -E C O N O M IC S


E L E M E N T S O F E C O N O M IC S,:

1. Scope and impcfrlance o f Economip study, p^spntjals o f an Eco- nom y-Econom jc goods and factor.s, capital^gpffds and consum ption goods, N ationa l tncom e, Incom c pe t.e rm ina tion , N ationa l W ealth.

2. Econom ic Systems-Features of ' free enterprise, socialistic and mixed economics.

3. C apital s tock and popula tion grow thstandard o f living and consum ption . Dem and for consum ptidn goods. Investm ent, Derived D em and for Investm ent goods. In te rdependence of p roductive processes-Growth‘‘E quiliM ium and'diniple aSalysis o f two sector econom y-Rate of profit a p d pric ing-A llocation of Investments and ra te o f growth.

4. C onsum ption and D em and-Law o f D em and, Elasticity o f D em and.

5. P rod u c t io n : Organisation,"9 f society foF^j)roduction-Specialisa- l ion and division o f labour. Form s o f industr ia l and busiiless o rganisa tion . Scale o f produc tion . Law o f y a r iab le p roport ions . Short-run and long-run supply curves.

6. Theory o f m arke t p rice-pric ing o f goods under com peti t ion andm onopoly . '

ISyllabus for Second Year

O I ' >

E C O N O M IC D EV EV O PM EN X Q F l l^D IA •

1. Features o f developed and u n ie rd e ’\}eloped'EcoD‘6'^riics,‘'ccndltioris m India ^ t- the t im e of.lndependenqe^ g row th from 19.5;1 to present day. D is tr ibu tion o f N ational Incom e by percentage o f popu lation. D is t r ibu tion 'd f - ' iJb rsona l incdfne, Industr ia l W ealth and Land, C oncen tra t ion of Econom ic Power and C on tinu ing poverty.

1 1 t - f i2. Basic-Features o f the Indian Economy-Organised and unorganised

sectors; Small-scalef and la rge-scalc -ibdustr ics pa t te rn of 'o w n e r ship of industr ia l establishments; Public and P rivate Sectors- R ole o f A gricu ltu re and its organiSa’iion. Size o f hblbfrigs tenure and pa tte rn o f ownership; land utilisation and cropping pattern , techniques o f farming in rela'tidn' to size' o f Hclcfings, sources o f A gricu ltura l finance and th d r ' jn ad eq u acy . .

Y29

3. Basic causes o f p6vcT"ty'&nd ifia l-distribution-Economic and non economic factors. Lack o f capital accum ulation in re la tion to population prcssure-lhdia’s popula tion growth.

4. Economic planning-Need and pre-i"equi3itics; m ain !ca'.urcs of Ind ia ’s Five-Year Plans-Rate o f invesiment-Aggregative and Secto ra l rates of'investmfent T rends in industria l outpixt and cgpa- city-Heavy Indti’st^ies, Inadequate p lough-back ratio; Industrial policy? Trends in A gricultural-output; A gricultural Policy, food problem and shortages in suoply o f consum er goods, inflation. Balanced Regional pevelppn^ent,

5. Balanced allocation o f investment and s tra tegy for In d ia ’s Econom ic D evelopment;Perspective Planning.

> . t i- ’T E X T -B O O K S P R E SC R IB E D■j 1

* r ^Books prin ted in Telugu for the In te rm edia te Course by Telugu

Akadem i, H im ayatnagar; Hyderabad-29,i f j ’

BCrOKS F O R R E F E R E N C E1

1. / . R. H i c k s - ‘Social F ram ew ork”

2. Joan R o b in so n -“ In tro d u c t io n to T heory o f E m p loym en t”j * f

3. Joan Robinson- “ Exercises in Econom ic Analysis”

4. “ Economics o f D evelopm cnt” -O sjnan ia U nivers ity (Forih coming)

4A. Stonier and H ague-E conom ic Theory.

5. A lak G hosh-Ind ian Economy-its n a tu rc 'a n d problems.

6. D a t t and S undaram -“ Ia.dian E co n o m y ”

7. V. V. B hat-“ H undred years o f Econdriiic D ev tlbpfnen t”

SY LLA BU S IN GEOGRAPHY

S y lla b u s For F ir s t Y ea r

Paper [-(General, Physical and Social G eography)

A. G E N E R A L G E O G R A P H Y ;

1, T he 5c0pc. and con ten t o f geography

2. G eography in relgtjoA to pbysiciCl-and social sciences.

n36

3. M ajo r b ranches o f Geography an application o f Geographical knowledge to hum an problems.

131

t4, Progress o f geographical ideas and knowledge through the

ages-ancient, medieval and m odern .

B. P H Y SIC A L G E O G R A P H Y :

1. Solar s y s te m and position o f the ea r th ro ta t ion and revolution the ir efFecis, N etw ork o f Longitude and Latitude-their significance,

2. D is tribution o f land and water. The principle types o f rocks M ajo r land forms (M ountains, (51ateau and plains) and their world d is tr ibu tion . Agents of D enudation (R unning water, glaciers, wind)

3. C lim ate-w orld d is tr ibu tion o f tem pera tu re , pressure, rain fall and "winds (P lanetary seasonal and 'cyclonic) '

4. The Ocean, D istr ibu tion o f surface tem p afa tu re and Salinity Waves, surface curren ts and tides,

5. N a tu ra l regions o f the world-A simple scheme o f their classification s tudy o f th e following na tu ra l regions expressing clearly the resources o f each region and the relationship between physical and cultura l features

I

i. Epuatoria l region

ii. M edite rranean Region

iii. Desert region

iv. T em para te grasslapds

V. M onsopn climatc

SO C IA L G E O G R A P H Y :

1. Origin and unity of ra« s -G eo g rap h ica ] pa ttern o f the mfgra l ion and distribution o f races

2. The changing soc ie ty o f m a n k in d and stages o f cultural deVtloDznent

3. Primitive occupations-past present d is tribution o f prim itive coramunicities-Primitive house types and seiilmenls

4. C hanging p a t te rn hum an occupations - rise o f u rban society types of ru ra l and urban settlements

5. Rise of Jndustrial Society-changing pa t te rn o f hum an o c c u pations - M anufacturing (W esiern E urop t) C om m ercia l and p lan ta tion agricu ltu re . M odern phase of urbanisation-rise of large cities-its social and econom ic apsects-city region-rela- t ionship (with specific examples); world population; Factors influencing g row th and d is ir ibm ion

SY L L A B U S F O R S E C O N D Y E A R

(E C O N O M IC G E O G R A P H Y O F T H E W O R L D A N D IN D IA )

A. E C O N O M IC G E O G R A P H Y O F T H E W O R L D

1. Resources and their conservation

2. M ajor resources and their worlci p roduction , d istribulion,and t rade i

a. -Agriealtural resources: Rice and W heat, Coffee,C o t t r n and Rubber

b . M ineral resources: Coal I ron-ore and Petroleum

c. Fores t resources: T im bert

3. D istr ibu tion and character- of m ajor m anufac tu r ing region ofthe world '

i }4. Im portan t sea routes o f the world-Suez and the P anam a

chanals, In ternationa! Trade, its-'changing pa tte rn

B. E C O N O M IC G E O G R A P H Y O F IN D IA :

1. The topography , climate and vegetation of Ind ia-M ajor N a tu ra l regions o f India-Inter re la t ions between physical fac to ts and economic development in India

2. D istr ibu tion p a t te rn of resources of Indi^-principal agricultural, Mineral, forest and power resources the ir pa t te rn of development and regional variations.

132

3. M anufacturing regions o f India-their g row th and charac ter A brief study o f ihe d istr ibu tion and localisation factors o f ihe following industries: Iron and Steel Fertilizer, Sugar, Ju ie C o tto n and PelroJcum. refinery

4. Population growth and d is tr ibu tion-food problem o f India Urbaniza tion and growth o f large cities

5. Patte rn of T ransport dcv^ lopm ent-re la tionsh ip wilh urban and industrial growth

6. Power and Multipurpose p r o j e c t s - th e ir impact on area developments-power projects M achkund (H ydel)and Kothagndam (Therm al; M ultipurpose N agarjunasagar projcct and Damo- dar Valley co rpora t ion

7. Principal exports and in ipons o f Ind iaInternational irade o f l n d i a the im portance o f India Ocean in the In ternal trade

P R A O T IC A L

1. M ap scales-representation o f re l ie f -D raw irg o f con to u r-co n tour forms and. relief sections. Isohyets and Isotherms conventional signs and symbols of one inch survey o f India toposheel

2. Elements o f map setting, measuring and reading.

(a) Simple t rea tm en t o f average, m ed ium and mode, percentage and Fr.eqpency distribution.

(b) Simple d is tribution maps and cartogram s.

4. Use of the following in s trum en ts ;

i) Magnesic compass.ii) M ap measurer

(Qpispmjter) .iii) P roport iona l Divider.

1 j '5. Study and use of J he following weather ins trum ents :

i) Rain gauge, ii) -M ax im u m and M inimum Therm om eter. ' iii) West and .d ry bulb therm oraeter. iv) WindvanS

6. A series o f world maps with a brief explanatory nole on each .map showing :M ajo r natura l region.D istribulion of resources : M ineral, forest and agriculture . '

133

Principal m anufacturing regions and m ajo r towns.The num ber o f maps should not be less than 15.

T E X T -B O O K S PRESCRlBECi

Books prin ted in Telugu for the in term edia te Course by Telugu Akademi, H im ayatnagar, Hyderabad-29-

BOOKS R E C O M M E N D E D F O R R E F E R E N C E :

J34

1. Philip Lake : Physical Geography.

2. N, K . H orrocks ; Physical G eography A Climatology

3. D asgupta , K ap p o r : Principles of Physical basis ofGeography.

4. R .N . Dubey ; Physical basis o f Geography.

5. Lebon ; In tro d u c t io n of.'human Geography.

6. Pretaum Singh and ; M em oria ■

Principles o f H um an G eography.

7. S.E. Bose : M odern Econom ic Geography.

8. V.S. G ananad liam : Econom ic G eography o f India.

9. R ,N . Dubey : Econom ic G eography of Ind ia .

10. M od. Inam ul : P ra t t ic a l Geography.

11. R.N. Dubey ; M aps, '

12. Sham Sunder Bhatia': Elem entry M ap work.

S O C IO L O G Y

1 s t y c a r I n t e r m e d i a t e C o u r s e .

I - E L E M E N T S O F SO CIO LO G Y .

1. Sociology - Definition; N a tu re and Scope-Uses o f Sociology Relation of Sociology w ith other social scieiices Viz , Economics, History, Political Science and Psychology-Sociology, Social Aftihropology and Social w ork and the ir in te r - re la tions.

2. Social Processes; C om petit ion , C o-opera tion , Assimilation, A ccom m odatioa , A dap ta t ion , Conflict and Wai".

*• '3. Individual & Socie ty -Persona li ty -H ered ity 'a t id Environm ent

Socialization.

4 . Social Croujis - Primary G roups, Secondary G roups.

5. Social InstitutroDS-Family, Econom y, Religion an,d; Polity.

6. Social Change, Processes and .Fac to rs ; Biological Techno lo gical and CuUural.

BOOKS R E C O M M E N D E D :

1. P.S. G isbcrt - Fundam enta ls o f Sociology.

2. Ely. Chenoy-Sociological Perspective.

3. Alvin Bertrand-Basic Sociology.

4. Macivei & Page:- Society (C hap ter on Social change only)

I I y e a r I n t e r m e d i a t e C o u r s t ; :

IN D IA N SO C IA L PROBLEM S ;

I. Indian Society Caste, Jo in t Family, M arr iage Patterns.Hinduism, and Islam in In d ia . ^

II. Social Deviance-juvenile Delinquency, Vagrancy T ru a n c y - Crimc,

IJI. C om m unity Problems - Devadasi system, P ro s t i tu t io n - Poverty. UnempioyiubDt, Beggary, C orru p t io n -

IV, G ro u p & Inter g roup problems. Alcoholism, Linguism,-Regionalism, Casteism", C om m unhlism and U ntochab ili ty

V. Social Disorganisation - Meaning, Definition & N a tu reSocial Disorganization & Social Health in India.

I

BOOKS R E C O M M E N D E D ;

1. R..M K apadia - M arriage & F a m i l y I n ^ i a .

2. C.B- M am oria - Social Disorganization in India.

3. G .R . Miidan - Indian Social problems.Vols. I & 114. Social Welfare - Govt, of India Publication.

P a r t III C O M M E R C E

Siyllbns f o r F i r s t Y e a r

Part A ELE M E N T S O F C O M M E R C E .

1. Scope o f terms like Commerce, trade and industry.

135

2. -T ypes o f business houses-distinguishing features organisationadvantages and disadvantages o f sole trader , partnership , jo in t stock com pany a n d co-operative enterprises.

3. Incorpora tion o f jo in t s tock companies - docume'nts used- com m encem ent o f business by public limited companies- ]egaJ formalities-private and public limited cotnpanies-capita! s tructure-shares and debertures-Me'etitigs and Resolutions.

4. O rganisation o f hom e trade-Functions o f wholesalers and Retainers-M ultiple shops - D ep a r tm en ta l stores-Mail o rder business and consumers co-operative societies.

Part B - B O O K -K E E P IN G A N D A C C O U N T A N C Y

1. Theory of Double Entry Book-Keeping.

2 Jou raa iisa t ion and Ledger Posting.

3. Sub divisions of Journal, Uses.

4. Cash-Book Single, D ouble and Three co lum n cash books- Analytical pe tty cash Book, Bank R econcilia tion S ta tem ent

5. Journal p roper and its uses.6. Trail BaJance-Errors disclosed and n a t disclosed by a T ra il

Balance.

7. T rade and A ccom m odation Bills transactions.

8. F inal A ccount o f a-sole trade .

S y l l a b u s F o r t h e S e c o n 4 Y e a r

P ar t A~ELEMESiTS O F C O M M E R C E

1. Elements o f Advertising-Iroportance o f advertising-Media.

2. Foreign t rade-P rocedure for im port and export - D ocum ents used in Foreign T rade -Customs and excise duties. Bonded warehouses.

3. ‘Office O rgan isa tion-M odern Office appliances. Filing andIndexing

4. Insurance-orinciples of Insu;ance. Topes of life and m arine Insurance Policies

5. Fundam enta l na tions of money and banking-Types o f Banks Functions of m oney-F unciions and Scrvicss of commercial Bank-Balance sheet o f a Commercial Bank.

6. Insturem ents o f Credit'-Gheques- Promissory notes and Bills o f Exchange.

136

P art B -B O O K -K E E P IN G A N D A C C O U N T A N C Y

1. Errors and their rectif ication- Rectification th rough a suspense Account.

2. A ccount currcn t - Average due elate,

3. Consignments and jo in t Ventures.

4. Partnersh ip A ccoun ts-F luc tua ting and Fixed capitals-Final A ccoun ts -A d m iss io n -R e i i r tm en t-D ea th -D isso iu t io n ,

T E X T BOOKS - PRESCRIBED

Books Printed in Telugu for the In te rm ed ia te C ourse by Telugu A kadem i, H im ayat N agar, H yderabad-29 .

BOOKS R E C O M M E N D E D A N D F O R R E F E R E N C E

1. Genera l Commercial Knowledge: Professer V. V. Rama- nandham .

2. First steps in D o u b le -E n try Book Keeping-J. R. Batliboi.

3. Principle and prac tice o f C om m erce : Stephenson.

4. Elements o f Com m erce and Business M ethods Bhal and Dhongde.

5. Book Keeping and Accoiinl^f Part 1 and II : Jai N arayan Vyas. • »> J ( w < ^

6. Book Keeping and Accounts: Rup Ram G up ta .

PA RT I l l -O P T IO N A L S A N S K R IT 1.1 •< -' )

The aim of the course i< to in troduce the S tudents to an in len- sive study o f the Language and L iterary criticism.

' ‘ 1 .Hl> 1 I U,< <j i [.Syllabus for First Year

‘ I i'A. Poetry : ' A bout 200 Slok>s from Kavya.B. D ta m a : D ram a o f bhasa o r 'HaVsha.'

SYLLABUS FO R SE C O N D Y E A R

A. Prose : A bout-50 p a g e s ‘of crown size f ro m i te;<t-nota b o v e 'th e 's ta n d a rd of D asakum ara Charita .

B. A lankaras ; U p a m a / Rupaka, Parinam a, O tpreksha,

137

A rthan ta ranyasa , Sfesha, V irodhabhas^ Anan- vaya, Yamaka" and Anuprasa from Chandra- !oka o fjayadeva .

C. G ram m ar : Sandhi and K arak a P rakaranas on the basis of Laghu S idhanta KaumXidi.

In .papcr I .and p r 9se p a i t o f Paper II s tudents should be requi'ced to answer a t least T W O essay questions each based cm the contents o f the Texts. Questions on criticism sh6uid also bfe based o n 'th e text.

List o f Sanskrit books for the -use in the p rep a ra t io n o f Text Books for the In te rm edia te Course,

L IS T I

I. P O E T R Y I. R a^huvansa C an to II . (2) K um arasam bhavaC an to (V). (3) M adhura Vijaya.

2'. D ram a ; l . 'P r a t i m a 2 . S-wapnavasavadatta, 3. N agananda4. Ratnavali.

3 . P R O S E « r 'D a iakum arachari ta 2. K adam bar i Sangrgha.\

4. A iankaras ; 1. C h an d ra jo k a - ^ th Chapter .

5. G R A M M A R .: "Laghusiddhanta -Kaumudi for reference only.

L I S T II

L i s t o f B o o k s f o r t h e u s e o f T e a c h e r s o f I n t e r m e d i a t e

Following Books besides the books m entioned in L is t- l

(1) A pte’s Sanskrit-English D ictionary .(2) A pte’s Guide to Sanskrit Composition.

(3) Kale 's Higher Sanskrit G ram m ar,

LIST O F BOOKS PR ESC R IB E D F O R ST U D Y

F O R F IR S T Y E A RA. PO ETRY ; K u in a rasam bhavam u-C an to V only.

B, D R A M A ; Sw apnavadatta o f Bhasa.


A. P R O S E ; iCadambari Sangraha. Pages 1 to 62 only Till theend o f A choda Sarovarnana .

B. A iankaras : C handra !oka-5 th C hap ter .

C. G ram m ar : Prescribed topics on the basis o f Laghu SidhantaICaumudi.

J38

\39'I

Parsian as optional subject will have two papers of 3 hours du ra tion each

S y l l a b u s F o r F i r s t y e a r

1. O utline History of Persian Literature: Samanid and Gaznaviperiods.

2. T rans la t ion ; F rom Persian into U rdu/Eng lish /H ind i/T e lugu .3. G ra m m a r ; The following topics to be studied.

a. Idioms and Proverbs, ^b. Figures o f Speech; Sanailafzi.

S y l l a b u s f o r s e c o n d y e a r

1. , P r o s e ; ^ ( A detailed study Of the prescribed text is expected.Textual questions will also include question on reproduct io n from the text or texts o f simple persian translation and explanation of tines ajid 'passages from the texts and annotaLions.)

2. Poetry :T E X T BOOKS PR ESC R IB ED

F o r f i r s t y e a r ^(1) Outline H istory of^persian L ite ra tu re ;

B o o k s r e c o m m e n d e d :

1. T ariqe A dabiyate Iran: By Razia Zada Sljafaq (U rdu Translation)2. Sherul Ajam (VoI-1-2) By Shibali N om ani (English)3. Persian L i te ra tu re By Prof. Levy. ^

(2) T ransla tion and G ram m ar Book recom m ended.Sirajul B alaghat, p a r t II By Dr. Q. Kalecmjillah. i

F o r s e c o n d y e a r

PR O SE : Selection G houre Farsi (N ew Edition -%Waiz KasbfiAnwari S ah )-C h ap te r IP. (First.iliree Hiljayat)Sada t AL'Hhan-SjrajLil Elalaghat pa j^m -e-w o .

^ ^ ^ E T R Y ' : Hifiz ^hirazid^First ten gh'azals. ‘ 'UrfljShirazi Qasida, Bar WasfilKashipir. iqbal Saquanam a.A shraf G u la i t i Jnar4^abe'5^(/skrutiyat. parveen iatasani Ftohc Azad‘.

All the books are available tellers. BalaramStreet, G ran t R oad , B om bay-/. ^

P A R T - II I PERSIAN

There shall b : two papers o f • hour^ dura tion each, ^1 lie first paper shall comprise questions on gram m ar, irHnsla-

n'on precis writing and composition and the second paper ' on prose, poetry, and non-detail 'ed'sfUdy^^f-* ”

S y l l a b u s f o r u r s t y e a r

y i 'r> ’ - .y

b ' p b j r - ) ’P ; d i i / ‘ - r

■ r " , , ; ' ' . ■ : : ' ' . . m > P r - - - W ' - r

. « U V ' ; ' - 0

2 TR A N SLA TI - "t^rom“ ‘A?a1jic' in to .'U rd ti ‘8 r ’ English and vice-versa').

3. P R E C jS -W R lT JN G — of seen p a s s a g e s ' ‘ * **”'I 4j ' C ok l^ O S JT l 'O 'N ) ^ ^ ' SP''* ' '

' I tf . / l i f f ' l j , f l i L I \ f / ) •■ t r ' '■

S y l t a b u s f o r s e c o n d y e a r J '* v B ^ ’ U ir. f ~ . v / . f1. Prose*^ ■< r I ' I , O b ' rij, iP '2. PoeffV;'^J' ■’'J viij >i ‘ .er; i M i - ?3. N o n -b c ta i led Study

BOOKS PRESCRIBED ' < ■««'*Fi^r f i r s r y e a r , , ‘ 'i [:( i ■)■>

I .. i_G’iÂMM‘AR'>i^\Byoks êc'ommeri'ded)''(1) "Al-Nahv-^lJw'ad'ch;'A'l- Ibti'cfa’ia — 3 parts,(2) Kitab-iî-Sarf aj^d JfCiiabja^l-JjJabVj,,bjj Mou^^.j/Syljduf

R ahm an. A(prits^ri. ^(3) A r a t ’i ^ a - ^ u l f f m by Mou(vi_Â_{>dus ^ a t ta r—4 parts

2. T R A N S L A B o o k , recoipniencjed for excercisej.M uallin-al-insha— P ar t I by ,M aulanâ jôhd Rabe and

, M aylana i^bÛjl ; ^ a j i d N adav i-ava ila^ le ,from Nudwa Book D epot, 'Lucknow.

140

P A R T - ^ l U . O P T S O N A i . A R A B I C

F o r S e c o n d Y e a r ;

1. PROSE I f - ^ l - C J u f a n - F t r q m ,Surat A^-Zuha 'to Surat AV H um aza. ^

(2) M ukhab-alrM ulahi— Available fi<om Rahai ^ Jslaskan, Mustaidpui;a^^.Hydcrâ]batl

, 2 P O E T R Y : Selection from A rab ic .P o e tfy fo r (n te rm ed iau1 , avatlabl?tfri im‘'lsl#mia.BqQk Depot, K urnool

3. N G N -D E T A IL E D T E X T : K hatairf-al-Zikra—Availablefi'om R abat Masltam MuStaidpuca, H yderabad)

..»/ou I, 0> j4>ARJ I U ^ ,q !? f IO N ^ J j„ T E ; .U G y i,

.i,nS y l l a b u s f o r f i r s t y e a r :

(a) POETRYi;y 'Gl§ssica^ ; ;T ^r^{prôu t] 'passages conlainins300 verses from three o r fou r works written by differeni authors v

(b) Li ves and works o f the Poets whose portions are.prescrrbeti

(c) I Classical Prose 'jpont^jningf^bout 5Qfpês, <•

(d) Figures of speech. In addition to those stuiieTd in - t i le Second Language, the following m ay be studied ; t1, 3am asoktij^^^ .^ Apr^?th}iJ^^^rasfvmg^, D.e^paka.4. A pahnuti, 5. N idarsana , 6. Sandeha, 7. Kavya- linga, 8. Parinam a, 9. Sahokti. 10. Smritni.

/ •. * *(e) An elementary know ledge 'of Rasas, G unas (Prasada, Oja * and MadhtirayS)<S^d'^tlfe’'Riti^'(Vatdal-bhi’, ‘Panchali, and

G oudi). '

(f)' All-the m'etrcs’oocirpri.ngUn'tH6 p r e S o F - i ^ e d *, \ f t '1

S y 5 1a > u s.fo r.^ s e c o n d ^ y e ^ a r ,

â) M odern Poetry; Selections or one independeiit.po^m'CorJ. ta in ing about 100 verses.

(b) D ram a : A fuIHfcHglhlclVaml^^ transla tion or a original d ram a of the classical type.

(c) D ram ’atur'^V f ‘'Witl?*?^f^r^ncc^b^t(ie &/amji*'^tu3ied ^

(1) Kinds of Rupakas and their characteristics features with.^B3c;al,j;^5êngf

(2) U p a -R u p a k a s : The four kinds of Nayakas, th e ih e m t and three varieties-iSu^hjiartha-suchikas. ‘1

U l

(d) M odern Prose : C on ta in ing about 100 pages..

(e) p lem cnis of language :

(i)’ ’t 'he origin inean?ng o f the word Tenugu, Telugu and A ndhram u ' ‘ ’

(ii') B road classificaKibn'of Language^.

(iii^ D ravidtan famify oVlanguages and the p lace o f Telugu in 'then i . "tf .

(iv) CoDstjiuctior/^f ^enfences' and order of words in a

• i , i ^(■ ) Cbanges,i.that lelte'r undfcrgo when' T a tsam a Word

becom e Tadbhava,

(f) G ram m ar; A cchiia-iind’f 'a fsam a P rakaranas from Bala- vyakarana .

q T E X T -B O O k S PRES(jRIBEt)>

F o r f i r s t y e a r :

P O E T R Y :

‘Poetry T ex t-ffook’ J 'published'^^jy ' 'Osmania University, ^ ydefabad -7 .

PRO SE :

Pro'lse f e i t - 'p S o k published by O sm ania 'U niversity , Hyderabad-7.i-j± ' j i

142

l^>r 'secon i^ y e ^ r

P O E T R Y :. 1

Poetry TextjBopk publis^ei^jay-jQsmani^ U u jx en i ty , H yd-/ . P R O S E : t >

Pros? Text-B floJc 'publish^ by O sm ania .Ujiiversity, Hyd-7. D R A M A :

“ Y agnaphala N a ta k a m ” pub lishe 'd ’’by Xiidhra*'Umversify, Waltair, A. P. ■* ' ' '

, P A R T III-rU RD Uj > "> I

There shall be* two J)ap?rs aad jhe public exam ination will be held at the end o f the Second Yc^r.

S^llat>ifs^ ^ o r F i r s t V e a r

On Prose, Poetry and G ram m er.

1. Syllabus for Prose :The following Prose Texts a re recom m ended for Prose ;

I T he following eisays from M iqualath-e-H ali Volume I by Hali

1) Syed A hmed K han au r Unkcy Kaam, 2) Z am ana , 3) M udda- yan-Tahzile Ki Bad Amalivam. 4) Badgumani, 5) M izah,6. A iam -e-Tatceim ainaik Safar Ki Kaifia th , 7) Akber Navase au r us,key Fara>z, 8) M au th K fy 'Y a k h c e a Say H am ein K ava Sabad le ina Chahiyae, 9) D unya Ki Kal Him say C halth iha i Y a A m a\ Sey, 10) H am Jeeihey Hain ya M argia, 11) Hasap- O'Nasah, 12) T e ja ra ih Ka Asar 11m aur Aqleq per, l3 )T a r i - jumaD-c-Hali.

(2) Chand Han Asar.

II Poetry :Bang-e-D ira-Part 1 only.

III G ram m er :

Sarfo-o-N ahu (Abridged) by Dr. Abdul H aq .

Syllabus for second year

On Novel, D ram a aad H istory o f U rd u L itera ture .

1. Novel : Eirdause-Berin by Sharar.2. D ram a : K heti by M oham m ed Mujeeb.3. H isto ty o f L ite ra tu re : The following pgrtions only.

Poetry :

1. D ekhni Period : M oham m ed Quli, Vajhi, N asra t i 'G haw asi , Wafi and Siraj

2. D elhi School : Sawda. M ir, D ard , M ir Hasan, Ghalib ,Zanq, M om in and Dagh

3. Lucknow School : Atjsh, N a s ik a , , Daya ShaBker,* Naseem and /Vnees.

4. M o d e rn Peripd : Hali, Iqbal, Jp.sh, Firq.

Prose ;

1. D eghni Period : Sabras^ by Wajhi.2. F o r t W illiam Collegq Mir Ayinan,

3. L e tters o f Ghalib and Fasana-e-Ajaib by Sarooq.

4. Age o f Sir Syed Sir Syed. Azad, Hali, Shibli and Nazier Ahmed.

143

5. Sarshar Ruswa and Sharar.

,6. Modet;ii Perii\df I'

1. Essay : Abdul Haq and Rashced Afimed.2. Novel : Premchand3. Qrgm a Imtiyaz Ali T a jsd M uj/eb .

i 4. .Short S'or.y,:* Prem chand, ^I ‘ i.

P ^ R r —lH - - ( O P T I O N ^ L . H jN D l)

“ S y l l a b u s - f d r i F i r . s f Y ? ,a r

P R O S E : 20qPages .N O N -D E T A IL E D p r o s e ; Collection of short sloric'x of. 150 pages.* PO ETRY ; Ancicnt Poetry — 300 lines.

M odern Poetry — 400 lines,(Selection Verse)

G E N E R A L ESSAY :

S y l l a b u s f o r S c c o n d Y e a r

D RA M A ; One fuJl d ram a or a collection of 6 one act plays of 150 pages

N O N -D E T A IL E D STU Q Y ; A s h o r t novel or biography of 200 pages.

PO ETR Y : M odern f ’oetry— ft.iindiiig verse-^400 lines.

A P P L IE D G R A M M A R : Textual Gr'aitirhar.

PR O SO D Y ; 16 Metros

R H E T O R IC S : 16 Alankaras. ' *

,:-H={l) Metres,-; Indravajra ,-Upendr.avajra , Vansastha, Sikharini Sardulavikrid ita , Bhujangtipr^y^t, Dfu-

tavilam bit. D oha , Roisi, Chhappay,, Geeiika,K andalika C hahappay , Sava,i'ya, M andakran ta .

(2) A lankaras : U paina ' Rup.ika, U tpreksha , Vyjtlirek, A nanvaya,Pra teep . A tisayokti ,A rtliantranyas A^Jahnuti, Slesh, D rish tan t , -Deepak. 'hilya- yogiia, V irodhabhas, Y am ak , Anupras (excluding the V aria t ions '

BOOKS PRfeSCRltiED

F o r f i r s t y e a r

PROSE "G A D Y A R A T N A V A L I” R 'amnarayanalal and sonsAllahabad.

144

N O N -D E T A IL E D T E X T ; (Short Stories) “ K A H A N I VIVJTHA"Rajkama'l Prakasah, N ew -D elh i-6.

POETRY : “ P ad y a ra tn ak a r” published by M/s. DakshinaBhafatha Hindi P rachar Sabha, M ADRAS-17.T he following lessons only

1 IAncienty Poetry:

1) K ab ir K e Dohe. (2) ' Surdas Ke Pada.3) Tu^sidas-Ram Ka Van-garoan. (4) Bihar,i-Ke

Dohc.

Modern Poetry;

1) I\Jlakhi(nlat Chaturvedi'-^ Veer Puja.

2) N ira la U dbhodhan . ; * j . iiui.i3) Paijt J Y a h D h a r te e K itna deti Hai.

4)^ D inkar : Ardhanareeswa^.

5) Ran> K u m a r Varma:* Sadhana Ke swar.

6) Rj^pgey Raghay - ,M ai,y i^m maoav.

7) 'Nare^h l^ u in a r iM eh ta . , K jra a Dheuyen.

8) Naresh Kujjj^r ^ e h ta ^ t,Chara jyeti . . ' nf1 i. O ' . I L

G E N E R A L ESSAY : Adarsha N ibandh—(Reference Book) VinodPustak M andir , A g r ^ -r<-1 <

‘F'a'R SEC O N D ^ 'E ‘AR ‘... V I

DRAVfX: “ S A T R A N G ' ' 'H in a i P¥acliar‘Sabha,^PIVderabad.

NON-DET^ÎL’ED’. (Noval) Sal3aV,i,Ypubfislie3''by Balashowri Reddy, Jyoti Mikeân, 25l'Vadiv.e?up uram, Madras-35.

-i; J aO'P O E T R Y - “ P a d y a ra tn ak a r” published by M s D akshina Bharaia

Hindi t»rachar Sabha, MADJ^'a 'S-*!?.

The following lessons b'rtly’:*1 s. ■ r ■

M O D E R N ÔETjRY.;

. >i ‘ '1 IJ) -^Pavan Dut.

i) Gpp.ta -,Urmila,K.a Vif^^ha.3) G upta - K ah Mukti.. JJbala. Kisliye. Thughe

my ,pavu.

145

4) P rasad—Sraddba.

5) M ahadev i— Prateeksha.

6) M ahadevi — Nisa Ko D ho D e ta Riikesh.

7) Pant— Mourja - N im antran .

8) D in ak a r Parasur&m Ki Prateeksha.

9) Bachan - Pyala

10) Bachan - A tm a Parichaya.

G R A M M E R : (Reference book only) Vyk^rana Pradeep.

P R O S O D Y & R H E T O R I C S : (Reference book only)K.avya Pradeep. Ram, ,B ahorishukla .

I ^ R T - lI I O P T IO N A L T A M IL

S y l l a b u s F o r F i r s t y e a r . *

P O E T R Y ; L Ancient (SangamT poetry. A bout 300 lines.

t^ O T ^ ; N o t less than 10 chapters of T irukkura l m ust find a place always.

2. MeJiievdl poetry ; A bout -300 lines.

3. Modefn'^po^try, A bout 300 lines.

PR O SE : Two tfext Books each cohtainiffg abou t 200 pages of chaste and literary Tamil.

S y l l a b u s F o r S e c o n d Y e a t ‘ '

G r a m m a r ; i n con tlt ioa iion o f the G ram m ar studying under Subject, U S «cond Language the Syllabus is to be prescribed. N annool m ay serve as text book . The

t s tuden t must know abqu t the form ation o f words.th e gram m atical division o f words and the construction o f Sentences

D R A M A : The book must be iji. verse fo rm .

G E N E R A L C O M P O S IT IO N . •

B o o k s P r e s c r i b e d f o r F i r s t y e a r .

PO E T R Y : 1. Ancient (Sangarh) poe try - portions prescribed-p u ran a nuru-Stanzas 45 to 54, T irukku iaf poru tpa l t t o 10 chapters, K urunthogki—Firs t fifteen Stanza'* including K adavul-V szhthu .

2. Medieval pjelry-portions. prescribed, periyapuranam E n a th in a y a ra r puranam .

146

3. M odern pos try - portion prescribed — M urugan Arulvetal (A tupadaiveedu onlyl.

All the above poetical selections text book can be had from Sri V enkateswara University, T irnpath i.

PROSE : 1. Arivural Kôththu. B y M ara im ala i Adigal, publishedby Saiva S iddhanta pubJishing Society, 1-40, Broadway- M a d ra s -1.

2. Tamizh Inbam by Prof. Setha Piliai, published by Saiva S iddhanta Publishing Society, 1-40, Broadway M adras-1 .

147

FOR SECOND YEAR.

G R A M M A R

D R A M A

1)3)5)7)9)

N annool— paihavial and the following Suiram s :

2) Idukuri K aranam ,lyarchol, Thirichol, Sayabavan K aruvi, 4)Seyda Seyginra, 6)Vetrumai V inai panbu, 8)

poru l Muda! Arinum, I ru th m a i Arpanul, M u rru Echams,

Vetrvxnai Vinai Sarizai, 10) palvagai panpum . f

“ P IS IR A N T H A IV A R ” by Bharati Dasan, Parini- layam , 59 'lf‘Brcfad'wâ'y, M adras.

P A R T - l I I ((M ARATHI)

S Y L LA B U S E O R F IR S T

1. Poetry.

2. "Nbri-Detailed Text

prosody : T he following m atres to be studied :

1. Indravajrd •'*

2. Upendrava>jra ^

3. V asan ta l i lak a ’ **

4. Malini

5. Prithvi6. > Sarfiulavikridit

7. Bhujangapcayat

8. D inî

9. Arya

10. C h andrakan t

11. Ovi

12. N ava Vadhu

S y l l a b u s f o r s e c o n d y e a r

1. Prose.

2. Essay.

3. G ram m ar ; The following top ics to be studied.

1. Varna V ichar

2. Sabda Vichar

3. Sabdanche Vyakaran

4. Sainas

5. Vakya P rithakaran

6. Prayog

4. Epitom isation : ,

BOOKS P R E SC R IB E DI


1. P o e t r y : ‘Sahitya K alash” compiled )5y V.R. Dhavle and V.D.K u lk am i. Published by M aharas tra Sahitya Parishad,PooTia. , ,■' t •

2. P r o s o d y : (Recom m ended)

M ara th i Vyakaran by P .N . Joshi. Published by Vecnus Book Stall, Poona.

3> N o n - O e t a i l e d T e x t : “ B havubandaki”

by K.P. Lhadilkar, published by Navakal Press. Bombay.


Prose : Sahitya Prasad Com plied by Sri'K'. V*."Savalapurkar,S. M . K ulkarn i an d B him rao Ktilkarni. Published by M ah a ra s tra Sahitya Parishad, Poona.

M8

G r a m m a r : (Book Rccotnoiended)

‘‘M ara th i Vyakaran” by P. N. Joshi. Published by Veenus Book Stall, Koona.

PA R T III O P T IO N A L K A N N A D A

T here shall be iwo papers in the op tiaaa l K A N N A D A .

BOOKS PRESCRIBED

149

P R O S E :

D R A M A


“ A D B H U T E R A M A Y A N A ” by M uddana . Edited by P ro f S. V. Param esw ara Bhatt, Published by Sarada M andir, R am ayyar Street, Mysore.

‘ G O K U L A N IR G A M A N A ” by Sri P. T Narasimha- char. Published by. Kavyalaya Publications, Jayaaagar Mysore.

G R A M M A R : K.annada Kaip id i Vol. I, Part I.

The following portions ;

1) Sandhi, 2) Samas, 3) Vibhakti, 4) Linga. 5) Vacha- na, 6) A khyatag, 7) Tats,ama and 8) Fadbhava.


PO ETR Y ; 1) *‘D H \R M A M R 1 T A S A N G R A H ” by NayasenaEdited by Prof. D. J. Gow da, Published by G. K. & Brothers, Basavana G udi, Bangalore.

2) “ R A M A D H A N Y A C H A R IT R E ” by Kanakadasa Edited by Prof. D . J. J ao a re G ow da. Published by R ajya Samiti, R av ind ra Kalakshetra , Bangalore.

PR O SO D Y : K an n ad a K a ip id i-V o l. 'I , Part-II ,

The following M atres only :

l)U tpa ia , 2) Ghampaka', 3) SarduJa, 4) Mattebha.S) S ragdhara, 6) M ahasragdhara , 7) Shatpadi.8) Ragade and 9) Sangathya.

SYLLABUS IN O R U

(U N D E R PART 111)

T)l*re will be iwo papers o f three hours dura t ion tacfe^

P o e t r y a n d .D r a m a

P O E T R Y ;1) 1,600 lines of poetry ha lf o f which shall be ihose wri

tten by old poets.2) A criticai siudy o( \he iiyes o f poets and their woiks.

D R A M A :!) A full length classical d i a j r a written either by Aswini

K u jna r G hosh or G odavarish M isra .2) A critical study o f d ram atu rgy with particu lar refere

nce to th e D ra m a Studied.3) All types o f chaadas to be s tud ied with examples.

S y l l a b u s f o r s e c o n d y e a r , : /. /

> P r o s e a n d ( j 'ra in 'm a ^

P R O S E :

1) Two hundred pagesrof prf'^e, bo th classical and modern.2) S tudy o f a suitab le book on l i te ra ry criticism.

G R A M M A R :, J) Advanced g ram m ar e ver and above what is prescribed

under p a r t 11 including a s tudy o f elements of language-

2) A lankaras ; Vyatirek.a, Paririama, A pahnuti , Kavya-. Ijnga, Vish^ma, V iroJhabhasha , Parikara,

Deepaka, P ra t ibas tupam a , D rush tan lha .

3) Kavya .Lakslhanas.

N b t e ■:/ f

The text books prescribed for s tudents o f the Utkal University for the Degree courses in Oriya u n d e r ‘general s tudy m ay, be adop ted for selecting suitable lessons and poems to be in ,agreem ent w,ith the .details furnished above, for study under p a r t I I I ‘O ptional <5riya’

i 'TEX T -B O O K P R E SC R IB E D

f o r F i r s t Y e a rL

1. P o e t r y : fa) M ad h u ra M angala by B hak tacharan Das,(b) Pranaya Ball^iri by G angadhar Meher.

2. C r i t i c a l s t n d y o f t h e V ives o f P o e t s :Pancha Pradeep by S ridhar Das

3. Dra*i6a M ukunda Deva by G odavari Mishra,

150

Syllabus for f i r s t y e a r ;

4. C r i t i c a l s t u d y o f d r a m a i n r g y :N atak -o -N a tyakar-by N arayana M ahapatra .

5. C h a n d a s & A l a a k a r : Â lankar Tarangini by l(.ulamani Das.


1. P r o s e : ‘Prabandha Sanchayana’ published by Friends publisher, Binod Vihari, C u iiack -2 , Orissa S late .

I2. L i t e r a r y C r i t i c i s m :

‘ ‘D rusti-o-Sruti’ by Dr. K .G .M ishra a v a i ta b k at DasBrothers, Binod Vihari, C u t t a c k - 2.

3. G r a m m a r : ‘Vyakaran Pryvesli’ by f o d h a n a t h Fôy.4. A l a n k a r a s s ‘A lankar C h an d r ik a ' by Pandit A nan ta Tripath i

Sarixia.. ,

5. K a v y a l a k s h n a :

“ A lochana M ala” by Dr. K.. C. Mishra.

P A R T i l f - E N G L lS H (O PT IO N A L )

There shall be two papers 1ti English (Optional) in tU ein tertnedi- a te Course.

Prose and Non-detailed, (For 1st Year)D ram a and Poetry. (For 2nd YearJ' ' ‘ '

The following text books have been prcscribe'd^for tKe' two year In te rm edia te course in English (Optional) : <

F o r 1s t Y e a r :

1. Prose :-“ Coverlcy 'Papers” Ky Addison.2. Non-detailed;-* Vicar o f Wakefield’ by (Goldsmith)

F o r 2n d Y e a r :

1. D ram a ; - “ Jwlius Ceasar,” by^^^âjêspâjre.2, Poeiry:-“ S‘ofirab and Ru8tum’"by M athew Arnold.

■i ‘ ■ 1

k a r n A t i c M U srC 'v ’F o r f i r s t y e a r :

^ - T h e o r y

I. Fundam ental Technical Terms ;N ada , .S ru ti . Swara, Swarasthuna, S ih ^ y ir^ ,o o rc h a n a , Tala. Aksharakala , Trikala . ,

151

2. The Scheme o f 72 M clakartas.

3. A knowledge o f the lakshanas o f the following Ragas : M ayam alavagoula, M ohana , Hiimsadbvani, Kalyani", Suddha Saveri, M adayam avaii .

4. Sap ta Talas and their constituents Angas.

5. \ knowledge o f the lakshnas o f the following musicnl forms; G ita , L akshna G ita , Jaliswara, Swarajaii.

6. A n .oulline knowledge o f the Jifc and con tribu tion o f the fo llowing composers :

T a l lap ak a A nnam acharya, Purandaradas , Bhadrachala, R amadas, M arayana T irtha , T hyagara ja .

1. A n outline knowledge o f Ind ian N o ta tion ,

8. Fo lk Music and its C haracteristics .

B - P r a c - i c a l ,

Prelim inaty Swara Exercises ;Swaravalis, J a m a Swaras, D a tu Swaras, Hechchusihayi Swaras. I

2. S ap ta T a la A lankaras in 2 degrees of speed.

3.. Six Geetas.

4. One Swarajati.

5. Three T an a Varnas.6. Two D ivyanam a K ir tan as

F o r s e c o n d y e a r ;A - T h e o r y

I. Fundcm enta l Technical Terms :

P u rv an g a .U tta ran g a Suddha Swaras, V ik r i ta Swaras, Vadi, Samvadi, AAuvacii; Vivadi, D h a tu , M atu , U pper Partical, Tones, H arm onics Pitch, Intensity, Timbre.. ^

1. Raga, the soul o f Indian &insic, DeSnition o f Raga; its Lakshanas; Systems o f Raga Classification in General; Janaka Ragas and Janya Ragas, Classification o f ianya- Ragas in to Sam poorna , Varja, Vakra,’ Uflanga and Bha- shanga in detail.

152 .

3. Aknowledge o f Ihc Lakshnas o f live following Ragas :Todi. Bhairavi K am boji. Bilahari, Dhanyasi, Shankara- bha ranam , Paniuvarali, K edaragoula , Saveri. Khamas.

4, The names o f the Tala D asa Pranas :

A detailed knowledge o f Kala, M arj ja ,‘Kriya, Anga, G ra- ha and Ja i t i Pranas; the Scheme of 35 Talas; C hapu Tala and its varieties.

5. Lakshanas o f the following Musi(jaj Form s :Varna, K irtana , K ri t i , Ragamalika.

b. An outline knowledge of Uie life and contr ibu tion o f following Composers :Jayadeva, K shetrayya, M uihusw am y D ikshitan , Syaroa Sastry, Swali T iruna l , Patnara Subrahm anya Iyer, Subba- raya Sastry and V ina K uppaie r .

7. A knowledge of the N o ta t ion ; Ability to rep roduce iji'No- tation. C om positions learnt.

8. Classification o f musical instrum ents in to T a ta , Swshira, A vanadha and G hana Vadyas, X bil i ty 'to draW the d iagrams o f Veena^Violin, T am bura , Flute, Nagaswaram* and M ridangam : An outline knowledge o f t h e coDStruc^ioo and parts o f the above m eniibned mus'ical instruments. '

9 Varitics of concerts and 'perfo rm ers fegurmg in them' Music concerts, loanee recita l, Kalalcshepa (M otha Ganam*) and Bhajan : A ccbm panrm ents used in them.

f r < P r a c t ic a l •

1. One Swarajati.2. One Tana Varna.3. Two A la Tala Varnas.4. Sixteen Krit es.

(The Krities shall be one in each of the ragas prescribed in Theoryl.

5. One Rpgainalika.Ability to sing from sight any passage ^'Ven ,in j jotation ia any o f the ragas prescrjbed in Theory. ^The Krities shall be one in each of the._^ag|is, prescribed in Theory.

153

R a n — III F IN E -A R T S

D r a w i n g a n d P a i n t i n g

S y |1 a b n s f o r f i r s t y e a r :

,There will be Two practi^al^. Two class wonk reqords, and O N E theory paper.

Theory : 1. Elementary Analysis o f Design, Drawing, p rin ting and Sculpture.

2. D etailed study o f Prehistoric aris in India.^ J . ^

Practicals : I. Object drawing (In pehcil or crayon.)Ja r , Lata , Gcglct etc.

2, Design, (on w ater colour) Embroidary, Textile Printing, Designs for Corjjet etc- ^

N ote ,: iSize o f ' th e IJra^wipgs for practicals should not be less than 20 cm x.25 c m . .

S c h e m e ,of E x a m i n a t i o i ^ :

T itle o f the Pajser ‘D ura tion(a). Theory Paper (W ritten) 2^ hours.(b) Object D raw ing (In pencil or crayon) , 2 hours.(c) p e s ig n (V^ater’Colour)^ 2 hours.

154

rS y l l a b n s t o r s e c o n d y e a r :

1

.<1

,T here shall be T W O practica l.papers , TW O class work records and O N p theory paper. ,Theory : Indus valley Civilization, Early 'feudhist Art and le t te r

Bu<Aist’Art'.

Practicals ; I. N a tu re Drayvjpg_(in w ater colours) available flowers and leaves as per the season,

2. Still life (In water colour or Crayon)

N ote : Size of the Drawings for the practicals should not be less than 20 cm x 25 cm.

S c h e m e o f E x a m i n a t i o n < ^

Title o f Paper D tira tion(a) Theory (W rit ten ) ' , 2 i hours,(b) N a tu re Drart'ing (W ater colours) '3 ho]ir».(c) Sffll Life (W ater coFoiur o f C rayon)’ > hours,

11

P a r t - I l l F IN E A R T S

S C U L P T U R E

S y l l a b u s f o r f i r s t y e a r :

T h ere vJilV ije ‘iwo’ prsfciicals. ' tw o ' class work records’and ‘one’ Theory paper.

'T heory ; E lem eniary X'nalysis of 'Design, E^rawing, Painting and Sculpture. * '

K’raciicals :1, Object drawing (in clay) vegetables, fruits elc,2. Relief workv(in cTay) RloraLdesigns on panel.

S c h e m e o f E x a m i n a t i d n ' i '

T it le pa^er ’ Dura'tiona) Theory paper (W ritten) ^ V/Q.' Hours.Jb) Object drawing (vegetables, frm ts etc

with clay) 2 'hours,c) Relief work (irt clay) Fh^ral^”

designs on panel.) “2 ho firs., r

S y l l a b u s f o r s e c o n d y e a r :

There jviy be ‘tw o’ p ra c t ic g ls , ‘tw o’ cla^s work recor'ds.and 'one' theory paper.

Theory ; Indus ValleyCi.vilizationj. Eaily.jBjidhi^t a j t and latter Budhist art. * ,

P r a c t i c a l ;1. Relief work (one cta^J F low ers on panel Leaves etc.2. (Sculpture in round in clay).

Birds, A nim als arid 'Toys from Models*. '

N o t e ; Size o f the be lie f for thejpr^cticals should ,not be less th a n ,20 cm x 2 \ cm. / ,

S c h e m e o£ E x a m i n a t i o n : ,

Title of the paper D ura tion .a) Tiieory paper (Written) . , 2 1/2 hours.b) Relief work (Flowers, Leaves etc.

• v-i onlclav)':*; t < 3 hours. >'c) Sculpture in round (Birds, Animals, i

T o^s’etc. frorfi.models 'in clay) 3 hou'rs.

155

SYLLABUS ,\N B H ^R ,A JA N A T Y A M

S y l la b u s f o r f i r s t y e a r - T h e o r y

. Greatness o f the A'rt o f Dancft.‘ilta honoured; p ja p e jn Jndia.f

2. Distinctive fâiures,qf,Jndia^.Ij);ince.as coxnpared with Western D ance j

3. The triple aspect o f Saogi.ta (G ita , Vachya and N ritya ) ..1 , y

4. Suggestive c h a ra r te r o f Indian Danije:' i .

5. The types o f D ance in vogue in India . Bharatanaty»s.K uchi- pjijiijQ K athakah ', K a th a k & Nânipuri, their distrinctive features.

6 Te^Jinica! term s an^ ,f l je ir m ean in g : B liara tam , Bhava-Raga & Tala , T andavam ,& L as jap i , Adva and its variety,T irm anam , N r i t ta , f^rj;iya„ Abh^jnaya & Natya , M udra , C hari , K arana , Auga Sudhan.

f . . . -1. A n g a P r a t v a n g a , Up;iTiaas, P u s h p a n j a t i , S th a n i i t a , M a n d a l a ,

* 'T a n d a v a ja t \^ f j a ty M d h a rm i ' ,* L t ik a d h a i iT i i . M e la " p ra p ? i .f r

'is. A b h i r t a ^ a aKd-'hs foUi'Sv’a r ' i e t i e s ’: A6g'iTca, ^ V a c h ik a , A h a r y a a n d S a iv ik a .

PR \,CTICAL

.( r' .1 13. Adava v&ri^^'es I'n-lrjâli R oppaka and, Misrichap-

talas.“2. ^Sfrnfiie Jaiis and'-Trr'hiC'Uonts.’ ' '3. Moveinents of the neck, head', eye-b/6ws‘,-ei'es.4. A la r ippu .5. Jansw aram .6. 'Sabdam .-7. A simple padam .

S y l l a b n s - f d r 's e c o n d y e a r - T h e o r y s

1, S anga ta 'and Asangata Hastbas and their Vinijo'ga,.' i2. Deva, D asav a ta ra , Bandhavya and Jati Hastas.), N avarasas. '

156

P A R T r l l l . D A N C ^

4 Lakshaaas of ihe niiisical.forms uspd in B hara tana tyam .

5. The types Darust (inuring ip PhajâyajajM fla Mataka.

6. Varieties of Talas u s /d (n B haratanatya,

7. Suddha N a ty a 'P a tra andTier liakshana

8. A harya through th e .....................

9. Stage decoration,-use.oCf.pQt l ig h t^ n d iighting-effecrs,.

10. Accnmpaniments used ih Bharatiiiiaiya. t

\ (•- ^ T h c p j in ^ ip le j j n d e r - l y i n g t j \ s s fq u en cQ o f i(.eoU in a m o d e r n* B h a r a t a n a t y a | : o n c e r t ,

I2.' Cife^Hsior'y and 'c6rtiributions5if4+ie fo llovirn^

- - J . 'Jayadeva, 2? HaVayanafirtha,. 3 .-^} he trayya .

4. Muvv'aluri Sabhapati Ayyar, 5. G hanani Sivayya,

6. G hanam Rrishna>ya^ 7. Taiijore Q uarieiie .

PR A C T IC A L

!. Pedaiijarnam — 12— .PadaS"' ’■ — r

j!-. T illanas — l_.4. IC u c h ta p a d i I5. S lo k a -x-six.*:,.! .

6. Padya — 1

In the practical exam ination ( K u c h i^ d J 'a n d Biîrata Natya) the:andidates are e x p e c t e ^ t o ^ ^ g ^ sojngs and .the ia tj^s used in theirperformance. The record book should con tam the no ta t ion of all;he.items including Jaiie^, and*figur'es;<iofât least ten Saogata and Asargata Hymns.

In the viva-voce, th e ^ a j id id a t« are expect^d.to answer questions put by the examiner and aJsrrejtplain t h e “ Sanchari B h a v a s , ' in the Padas dance hv her. ^

BOOK§ JtE^:OMM-ENDRD

Abhinaya Sarasarriputam.^^,

:157

Dance {Kuchipiidi)

SYLLABUS FOR FIRST YEART H E O R Y

1. S3o* 1. Sp*. srcXfcS WiSeaJSbo, 3. iP'i^ v ie siS o ,

4. C(ê9;S», fi. «fortc-Seaiio, 6. SoSeS 7. <3*fc=g

8. a*0i^Se7';S^^, 9. jio-gortSiDtso, 10.

U ^sa;ii3o, l ( . »sSocSt»<^ Sj’ JS siss«>_a*tS S363j'K;&os5, 12. Sod3»«5'

S»cSrrt;S»«>, 13. iîSj*îS&ccD, U . ^dS&jw

|6 . £ 5 ^ 0 0 . 16.9oO ^ r f ^ e o , 17 esSr** ^êaJSben-

»ocS'5’ ijF’esiScaw}, >1-8. SJofio, -i9.'

20- ;3*t5 55i» Ô jjES 2L. iSS|tf.

22. ^ |S o a s5 -a iS t f CJfl^ eDi3*C& Sa>Ci;5ri3frt)g^S5a ^ aa ' “5j;S.

U , J ) 'S o ! ^ t f S S j ' f \ , X : O o H’ S o 9 ' [ ^ S 3 cSSi j , 8 . 'S o ^ t o i T C T 'd f a e s ,

3o*oÛ a i^w o 'caG a^ '- i^ .

‘1PR A T IC A L S

i / y 'f o r floyj ; C o S ^ e o , s f e j ' c , SrOiS'lio. 5a^ oo.

—SFor G ir ls : Siiijya., Ixodofii *’65 CT'gcSSr'Sj^SdiBD

1. .aociSu^_ Âj5, «5^'î3£ca«o.

2. s»(S;rt>ao: tS(JHQr iS^6£xiO &si>iî)oo_3

C.

e '8aoa.^sr 'i l^< /;JeB .r- I’ , »li •’ -*

3. eiMrffSiaS <H& va l^£ iS ;^tso -CSri ts.

4 . h e m s : (ti) 3 a * d * S sS (rf^ .

(b) ( T ^ ^3fBSSa^

SYLLABUS FOR SECOND YEAR' T ^ ' l ^ ' b R Y

O u t-lin e Knowledge o f the fo llo w in g .

V5S

1. . 6^'6<p !S, ;5 ^ .S s 'a . Ko<fe,

;SoiScre3 6 ^ ^ ! » .—* V

2. ^fcfa' o - i}^ ._^3.

4. !6:5»Sa»«).

i> a » S5*:5S»ao.«

6. CSflbS CT"

7. ^ tw) S'ss’dajeb c DJiCes ,

8 . &s;i3<S3'cc»g'oc, d&'s^CSiTcSbSbw e3<£ra^£^.

9. C ' < i d ' & 9 ^ e * S } KTtogÔO.â

(^J) aj’ C;5ra. (£|) < J o s > b g ^ ,

(es) &d:5)6.

ifi. &'a;jra w;Htfg ;se§s^ .

I |. ^ jJoa«3*6 i§3b tjOjjjroo;

TJ’D'd&es^â#, fcw'&5:Cfa,''

(5 SWLU&esg S'S

!?. Ooo* OOC5- 3;6! So7?«'_jtfcr>^co Sr-O^T^ <»fc>g

Sf&b

P R A G T IG A L S

1. d'«e>rtiii5 tf6o)

2. tiO’ gd^ cr-^cSSjea 5 :5

3. l^ acSig « - 3

<• s -Sj *.-!

ft. dSyâ*i^Ji2Cttj.

fi. ir^Sa3j.-;j)^jjr3'Esau';6s£‘2.

BOOKS R E C O M E N D E U

}. N andikesw ara 's Ahh inayaddrsana.

2. South Indian M usic Vol. i l l , ! V and V! Great Composers Books by Prof. P. Samba M tirthy Buaratarasa Prakarana

159

F IN E ARTS; B. THEy^TRiCA L ARTS.

A. T f jE PLAY

1. D ram atic Forms:

Origin of p lay— The classic— The Yak^ha G ana— The historical The m odern comedies and iiagcdies mixed t \p e s —One aci plays— Musical plays D ance dramas,

2. S truc tu re o f the p l . i j :

Theme— l^lot— Jn c o d u c t io n — C harac te rs— D ia logu •— Surprise Suspence— cris's— Conflict Con!r<ist—Climax—Division in lu jitis and scenes— Conclusion—The Unities,

3. Outlines of the History of i.lte Sanskrit and telugu Drama: Particularly:

[a] the works of Bhasa. Kalidasa Siidraka, h a r s h a and their saiietu features and d ram aiic valueii

[b] Works of D harm avaram . V^dam, G ura jada , Panuganti, Chc- llapilla, Rajam annar,. K opparapu and A trey a— Their s'ailent features and dram atic values.

4. Praciicals:

Evaluiition oT plays selected for* pr;oduc!ion during the course.

B. A CTING:

1. FundanfentaU o f Acfing;[a] Types, schools ond meihods of.actirig,

[b]Preparing and ac to r— O rganic a tten tion— Justification— stage a t t i tude— Stage task-FeeJrngs— stimulus andvresponse— F andam en ta l and accessory actions— A ction— C ounteraction .

2. Bodily Action:

M uscular contro l— Affects of age and period,oo »]9v#;menl-Stagc movements— Stage business, falls—fights.

3. Voice and Speech:P r o d u c t io n o f voice— Organs o f .voice and speech,-Ar.ticulation

M odula tion dialects and accents—Defects of speech and their correction

I6p

4 Characterisation;

Charac te r Analysis-Visualisaton—o f charac ter— Objectives ar.d images— ProjecJion of charac ter— D ifferent typ^s 'of chaia'cters S’tyles o f acting.

5. Practicals :

(a) Exercises and improvisation—Exercises on m em ory and con- centra tion-w alk ing-S itt ing rising Breatbing-On acquiring a t t i tudes on fulfilling stage takes-Feelings and em otions with second act o r-w iih groups.

(b) M ake up— Functions and types, of make up, make up m aterials and accessories—Straight make up C h^tac te r make up.

IC . D I R E C T I O N :

1. Selection o f Play:

Availability of the players’ place o f petform aiice, p roduction losts and audience, lry ,ouis .

2. Play Analysis:

Theme» plot act scenes, episodes, point of climax interesting curve— C haracterisation chief a im and purpose of p roduction.

3. Blocking the play:

Preparation o f production script Movements-i-Stag^ business C om position grouping-Baiancing, —C on tin u i ty -rT eam work.

4. P ra c t ic a l s :

(a) Production o f imprompt play—Two short plays—and onefull lenahth play. ^

(b) P roduc tiono f Scenc;^:-One injeresiing episode from any play may be selected and the s tudent pt;ftau9er will be required to pi;cjduce jinder the supervision o f the instructor -

j

D. P R O D U C T IO N TEC^HNJQUPS?

1, Stage M anagement:

Stage organisation and crew; Maaag.ec his funciio'n'»and 4utics p repara t ion of char ts cue sheets, etc.

161

2. Scenic Design : ^

Stage geography—C om position with line mass colour and perspective— Balaniing different types o f design—abstract Symbolic and realistic— Use o f small and limited stages an< use o f levels

3. Stage C raf t ;

P repara tion of sets and scenery— Fla— D rappery-figging the scen- nery—Sight lines m asking doors and windo\*s simple methods of building stage properties—T rees-P ii la rs-h i l locks-C aves— Mountains, etc.

4. Costume :

Functions of costum‘e —physical and piychologica l-C oslum e through the agcs-Buddhists, Kindu, Islamic and Western.

5. Lighting effects :

1. Principles o f electricity circuits, switches, fusing-switch boards.

2. Stage lighting; func tions-d fs tage lighting—lighting equipment C o n u o l —S>clorama lighting— lighting spot; lighting effect of pri.je- ciors.

6.. ColouT and its U til isa tion—Scenic d c 'ign stage craft; costume, m ake up—lighting. ^

7, S o u n d :Off stage: public address equipm ent-Principles functions and du r

ation of public address equfpm ent—Tape-records and record p layers’ etc. simple m ethods of stage sound effects-

8. Practicals ;

(a) Stage model ; D enionslia t ion of stage models o f selected plays.

(b) Construction of s c e n e ry a n d {jrops; flats-cut-outs; drappery; moulds and other stage and any props.

(c) C ostum e design and sketching-Exercise in dressing faviours types o f characters of various periods. ^

(d) Experiments in stage lighting and e f fec ts : Tra in ing students in handling and opera ting light equipm ent

(e) Sound equipm ent : T rain ing the students in handling and operating"public address equipm ent tape -reco rds and .record players

c.

162

I n t e r m e d i a t e S a n s k r i t S a s t r a s :

The total teaching hours for this subject will IS hours per week (instead o f 3 x 6 for the other courses in humanities).

There will be 6 papers for tHe Final exam ination each having 75 m arks maxim um and o f 3 hours 'du ra t ion .

Paper I N it i ; Bhartrhari; N itisa takam .N arayana H itopa desa-M iira labha only.

fPaper II E lements o f N ^aya bnd M imamsa.

i) A nnam bhatta ; THrkd Saragrha Text only.

ii) Krishnayajvam ; M im am sa P ap b h asa ; Text only.

Paper IH G ram m ar; S iddhant K aum udi-Sam jna Pdribhasa.Sandhi, S tripratyava.

IPaper IV Poetry; M agha; Sisupalavadh'a Cantos 1 and II.

Paper V P r o s e ; R. V. K rishnam acharya; K adam barisangraha ,from the beginning upto the end o f Sukanasopadeia .

Paper VI D ram a : KalijJasa-M alavikagnimitra.

a n d Y e a r I n t e r m e d i a t e Veda^^t

N o t e ; the candidates stu'ding In te rm edia te Vedas must necessarily take Sanskrit a lone upder P a r t II.

W ritten papers 2-ea<5h o f 75 marks and-of 3 hours du ra t ion . The text bocks for these papers are the sam e as for papers [■& I l 'o f In te rm ed ia te Sastras respectively.

Oral Papers ; 4-TJiese four papers are to test the cand ida te 's a t ta in m en t on the ora l rec ita tion o f one o f the Vedas namely R. G. Yajus, Sam a or A tharva Chosen by him Each paper is o f 75 marks and o f tliree hdurs d u f i t io n .

163

164

L i s t o f U n i v e r s i t i e s w h i c h h a v e a c c o r d e d r e c o g n i s a t i o n to t h e I n t e r m e d i a t e P u b l i c E x a m i n a t i o n c o n d u c t e d b y t h e

B o a r d o f I n t e r m e d i a t e E d u c a t io n , A n d h r a P r a d e s h , H y d e r a b a d .

SI.N o .

I

N am e o f ihe U niversity

2

The exam ination o f which it has been recognised as equivalent

3

1. O sm ania University, H yderabad.

Eligible for admission to the first year B A.. B.Sc. ano B.Com. courses as well as in the first year B.E.,B. Tech, M.B B.S. Courses also.

2. Sri V enkateshw ara U niversity, T irupati .

3. A ndhra Pradesh A gricu ltu ral University , H yderabad .

4. Andhra University* W altair.

5. U niversity of Madras, M adras .

- d o -

Eligible for admission into the first year B Sc„ (A gri.) B.V.Sc. and

to B.Sc., (Home Science) Courses.

Pre-University Exam ination for purposes o f admission to the Higher Courses.

P U.C. for purposes o f admission to the first year c f ihe degree courses.

6 . University o f Roorkee , R O O R K E E .

Students who passed the In term ediate Public Exam ination are a l lo wed iq ta^ke com petitive en trance exam ination for admission to iheB.E. Course o f R oorkee Ujiiver- sity.

7. Aligarh M uslim University, C oirespond ing exam ination of tha t Aligarh. University.

8. Ravishankar University, R aipur.

*}. Vikram University, U jja in .

Eligible for admi.'sion to first year o f the th ree years degree courses.

F irs t year o f the th ree year Deg. ree Courses.

165

10. U niversity of Poona, Poona-7,

First year o f the three year De^. ree Courses.

U . University o fK e ra ia , T rivendrum .

Pre-Degfee Exam inations.

12. Berham pur University,Orissa. ,

13. Annamalpi University, A nnam alianagar

14. Punjab University , C handigarh .

Pre-University Examinations.

Pre-University Exam inations.

In iern ied ia te Public Exam ination (Sci.) Passed candidates are accor-

tJed adm ission to B Sc., (Dairy T ech ./D airy Hoshandry)

B.A. Part-1 Exam ination and Pre- Engineering Exam inations of the Univ trs iiy . B A /B Sc (T. l . C . ) P a r t-11 and B.Sc. (Engg), B Com. Pari-I,

15. M ahara ja Sajaji Rao versity ol Baroda, Baroda- 2.

16. University of Saugar> Saugar.

Urii- C orrespond ing p repara to ry Exam ination in Arts, Science and Com-

'm erce for purposes of admission to the Higher Courses of studies. The In te rm edia te Public Exam ination (M. P. C .) passed candidates are allowed to tak e the com petitive selection test held by the U niversity for admission to the first year o f the five year in tegra ted course ai,d Civil, Machaniciil Eiecirical and M etailergicai Engineering and five year B. Archeology courje ’ and F. Text Engineering and F, Text Technology Degree Courses.

Part-1 Examination o f the three year Degree Courses.

166

17. Sard^r Patel Universiiy, ' Cjlijarath.

Preparatory Exam ications for ad- /nission to the first year B. A ,B Sc.; and B Com., Courses.

18. K a rn a lak University, D harw ar-3 .

19. Bariaras H indu University, Varanasi.

20. G u ru n a n a k University, A m ritsar.

>121. N agpur University,

N agpur.

22. University of Jam m u, Jam nan Tawi.

23. University of Jo d h p u r , Jodhpur .

24. University of Delhi( Delhi.

25. M adura i University , M adurai-^1 .

26. Visvi'a Bharati Santiniketan, West Bengal.

27. K u iu k sh e tra Uaiversity , K urukshctra .

28. South G u ja ra t University, SU R A T .

Eligible for admissiop ,to jhe first year o f the Degree Course,

B A , Part-1.

B A., B'Sc., Part-I Exam ination.

For purposes of admission to. the f i r s t - B A . , First B.Sc., B.Com., Part-1 and F irst Year B.E. and F irst Year B.Tech. Courses.

Pre-University Examination for puiposes o f admission to First year of T .D .C . Exam ination.

For admission to the first year T .D .C . Course;

•Fo; purposes of admission to ^^igher Courses of study in their ■University. ''

Pre-University Exam ination for purposes o f admission to Higher Courses o f study in the ir U n ive rsity.

II Y ear H igher School Certificate E xam ination .

Pre-University E xam inaiion o f the University.

Pre-University Science for adm ission to B.E.

)67

29 University o f Udaipur, U oaipur,G auhati

' 0 'G auhati University,

31. Pa,njabi University, Patiala.

I32. M ara ihw ada University,

M arathw ada.

33. Bangi) lore University. Bangalore.

34. University of Burd\vân, West'Bengal,

35, University of Bombay, Bonibby.

,.Higher Secondî^y Exam ination for admission to 1st year T .D .C . ,Cour-

,se.

.Pre-University Exam ination o f the jUniversity.

•B.Sc.. Part-I. ^ j jam ina tion o f th a University for admissiop to higher Courses.

P .U C. Exam ination of the U niversity for admission to 1st year of the T hree Year Degree Courses.

1st year P U .C. for admissipn ô 1st year Degree Course.

Admission' to Higher Courses t s in the case o f lA /ISC passed stu- ^lents o f o ther Universities/Board Institutions in India.

F or purposfe o f admission to 2nd 'year class o f the Two Year In te r mediate Course in Sciences.

36. Shivaji 'University, Kolhapur.

As equivalent to the Pre-Degree Exam ination in Arts, C om m erce

'or Sciences.

37. Utkal University,Vani Vihar, Bhubne;swar.

38 University of Rajasthan, Ja ip u r .

As equivalent to the P re-U niversity E xam ination fo t purposes of admission to the Secon,d Year Interm edia te C6urse.

Recognised for purpose o f adm ission to the 1st ye'af Three Year Degree Course.

168

39. University o f Indore, In d o re -1.

40 University of M ysore, -Mysore

41. Sam balpur Univeisity , Sambalpur.

Recognised as equivalent to the Higher Secondary Exam ination o f M P. Board o f Secondary Education for purposes o f admission to P a r t- l o f 8.Sc,,B Com.B A (3 year Degree Course.

‘Recognised as equi'valent to P U C. o f the University .

Equivalence to the Pre U niv trs ity for the purpose of admission to the 1st Year Degree and 1st year Professional Courses.

42. P a tna Univers ity / Pa tna .

43. University of C alicu t , Calicui.

44. University o f Agricultural Sciences, Bangalore .

45. U niversity of Jaba lpur , Jaba lpu r .

Equivalent to In te rm edia te Examination o f the Pa ina University.

In te rm ed ia te Public Examination as equivaiect to the Pre-Degree Exam ina tioo of C alicut University .

In te rm ed ia te Public Exam ination or P .U C. is considered as equivalent to the Two Y ear P .U .C . for purposes o f admission to u n d e r graduate Courses in th e U n iversity.

In term edia te Public Exam ination recognised as equivalent to 1stB. A., and B. Sc„ E xam ination o f Jaba lpur University

46. P u n j a b ’ A gricu ltura l Univer- In te rm ed ia te Pubtit Examination sity, PU>iJAB. candidates are eligible for admis

sion in the H igher Courses o f their University.

47. C a lc u t ta University, Calcutta .

In te rm edia te Examin&tion (SC) Recognised for purpose of adm ission to the 1st Y ear B.Sc. & Professional Courses o f the ir U niversity.

1

16?

4.®. A. p. Singh University, R EW A .

4'i. Milgadh University. Bodh-Gaya.

50. H aryana Agiicultusal University,H aryana.

51. University of Rajasthan, Jaipur.

52. Saurash tra University, Rfijkot.

In te rm ed ia te Public Exam ination recognised as equivalent to Higher Secondary Exam ination of iheir- University.

Equivalent !o In te rm edia te Exam ination of their University for pu rposes o f higher Studies

No such exam ination is conducted in the U niversiiy -R ecognition of In te rm ed ia te Public Exam ination does no t arise.

In te rm edia te Public' Exaihination (Arts) recognised for purpose o f admission tn 1st year T hree Year Degree Course (Arts) of the University.

Eligible for admission to the 1st Year B A.. B Sc., and B.Com. and Hre Medical. Pre Engineering.

53. University ('f Agricultural «S In te im edia te Public Exam ination Technology; Panvnagar. recognisrcl for purpo>e of admis

sion to the University.

54. Meerat University, Meerat

55 G orekhpui University', G orak h p u r .

56 SNDT v/omen’s Unive^Uy, Bombay,

In te rm edia te Public E xam ina tion tccogn sed as equ iva ljp t to In t t i - niediate for admission to Degree Cliiises.

In term edia te Publ.c E x ;m ina iion recognised f j r purpose of adm ission to the 1st year Degree and Professional Courses of the University.' «. 'I

Inferm edin te Public Exam ination recrgniscd as equivalent to theB.A., P a r t -1 for purpose o f admission to the B A., Part- l l .

170

57. D ib ru g a rh University, D ib ru g arh .

58. G u ru k n la K angri Viswavidyalaya,

(Dist.) Saharanpur .

59. H im achal Pradesh University ,Simla. •

In te rm ed ia te Public Exam ination recognised as equivalent to Pre- D egree Exam ination ' o f the U n iversity.

In te rm ed ia te Public Exam ination recognised for adm ission to Alan- k a r P a r t I Exam ination provided th a t it is passeLrwitn Sanskrit and o r V edic as one o f the subjects.

In term edia te Public Ecam ination recognised as equivalen t to B. A.. B. Sc., and B. Com ., Part I o f the University .

NIEPA DC

DO 080

fE-fr TVationr'l Systerofi ^ 1 " of Fdiicational

.....................

regulations and syllabi of the irwo year …

Documents